Home

Orchestrator User Guide - Measurement Systems Ltd

1. z E x 2 WE The start prefix can not be greater than the end prefix i e if the start tag refers to P30 then the end tag must refer to a channel greater than or equal to P30 If this situation arises the tag range will be removed from the logged channels range The tag name can be changed at will However the start tag must refer to a prefix will is less than or equal to the end tag The significance of changing tags to a state whereby one of the above rules is breached is that the trend information for the logged channel or channel range will not be shown in Trends Version 4 0 0 390 Part Seven Replays Editing a Line After a line has been added to an ORCHESTRATOR Trend Window it can be edited at any time If the Legend Box at the bottom of the Trend Window is visible select the line to edit within the Legend Box Then either choose Edit Line from the Edit menu or click on the z toolbar button If the Legend Box is not available at the bottom of the screen choose Edit Line from the Edit menu or the Edit Line tool from the toolbar as above If a channel is not selected for editing a Select a Line For Editing dialog box will appear with a list of possible channels Select the channel to edit and choose the OK button An Edit Line dialog box will appear The dialog box has almost exactly the same contents as the Add Line to Trend dialog box Please refer to the previous section for
2. Part Four SkyTel USA 1 601 3600504 7 e 1 SkyTel USA 1 800 7596366 7 e 1 Sprint PCS USA 1 888 6561727 7 e 1 Telecom Paging New 64 26 4001283 7 e 1 Zealand Telenor Mobil PS 47 968 90050 7 e 1 This service is for Norway Telenor Mobil pagers only not SMS messaging Telepage Private 41 74 0900003 7 e 1 Switzerland Telepage Swiss 41 74 0900103 7 e 1 Switzerland TelMI Germany 49 166 01010101 7 e 1 Telstra Australia 61 180 18767 7 e 1 password mnmail Telus Canada 1 403 2532266 7 e 1 TIM Italy 39 335 9609600 4800 8 n 1 USA Mobile USA 1 800 5899776 7 e 1 VIAG Interkom 49 179 7673425 8 n 1 Germany Vodafone Mobiles 44 07785 499993 8 n 1 TAP UK VodaZap UK 44 07666 699699 8 n 1 VoiceStream USA 1 800 9378941 8 n 1 Version Error Reference source not found 110 Part Four Configuring Processors E Mail Destination Settings Upon choosing the select button for the first time the logged in user will be prompted to provide the necessary account details in order to use the default mail client r Default Windows NT login for mail User Name useri Password Domain MEASURESOFT Cancel User Name This optional field allows the user to specify name of default mail profile it is required by Microsoft Outlook and is automatically defaulted to the logged on users name Password This field allows the user to specify optional password for default mail profile Domain This
3. Version 4 0 0 286 Part Five Monitors By default when a new monitor is created a grid will not be displayed on the monitor The monitor also defaults to snap to grid mode The grid size will default to the page size of the current printer setting The spacing between grid lines and the grid colour can be configured using the Grid Settings Dialog The snap to grid mode can also be disabled here Set Default Visual Properties All Monitor objects share some common attributes such as border width background colour etc The Default Visual Properties dialog allows the user to set or change certain properties which all newly created objects in the monitor will have unless specifically changed on an object by object basis These include Text Visual Properties Value Visual Properties Border and Fill Properties and Alarm Indication r L1 a IE a Object Text Object Border FontName Fixedsys Border Thickness fis Font Size 9 Border Colour EE Alignment Let TheeDOn C Object Values Object Background Font Name Fixedsys F iv FilOn Colour L Font Size 9 ont Object State Indication Alarm Indication Inverse Normal EE Waming Indication Inverse x Normal ll S Error Indication Inverse 7 Normal a OK Cancel Help The alarm indication and object value groups apply to channel objects only Default visual properties are saved with the monitor document
4. Version 4 0 0 49 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Orchestrator Menu Options File Menu The file menu has the following options Select server This allows the user to select an Orchestrator RTE data server from the available list The Server machine selected must have Orchestrator Server installed r Select PRODUCT NAME Server MESVIS180 OK E Auto Browse Cance Cx Entire Network E Xt Microsoft Terminal Services Ej 3 Microsoft Windows Network E Web Client Network ACCOUNTS amp Bs e rs MESVIS160 IB MESXP139 IB MESXP161 Once a data server has been selected the Orchestrator main program appears The title bar displays the Server nametluser name and the Orchestrator configuration The configuration name displayed will be the same as the current configuration on the selected server Current configuration and information on Devices Processors and Loggers are all picked up from this configuration New This option asks the user if they want to blank the current configuration If the user answers Yes the system configuration is returned to the state it was in when the system was installed If the user answers No the name of the current configuration is changed to Untitled orc until a save is performed See Blanking the Current Configuration earlier in this chapter for more details Open See Opening and Saving Configurations earlier in this
5. Event Checking jz F Low Alarm Checking High Alarm Checking fox ege D pcne D ia pP im D Enable Channel Click this check box on to enable the channel Description Enter up to 32 characters to describe the channel Units Enter up to 4 characters to describe the unit of measurement Significant Change To enable the Significant Change feature check the Significant Change check box This facility allows filtering of data on channels on which significant change is of interest Such changes can cause an event which can be logged The figure entered in the Value text box in engineering units is the rate of change that if the measured channel exceeds per scan either increasing or decreasing will cause the significant change event trigger If a logger is configured in Event mode or Period Event each time the significant change trigger operates information on the channels defined in the logger will be recorded A significant change event only lasts one scan unless the next reading also changes greater than the Significant change value When monitoring Version 4 0 0 417 Part Ten Data Exchange channels if the Significant Change is triggered then the fact will be annotated alongside any other channel information The significant change events are in addition to those caused by an Event See Below Event Checking Event checking is used if required to trigger a logger to record information on a number of channels
6. Fr Select Channel Range e OB oo Server MESVIS1850 Tag Description Secs Number of Seconds since Midnight Sine Wave 0 10 Zero to Ten Counter 0 6 Zero to Six Counter 0 60 Zero to Sixty Counter 0 100 Zero to Hundred Counter 0 1000 Zero to Thousand Counter Assign Chans Assign Channels 1 sec Pulse One Second Pulse 2 sec Pulse Two Second Pulse 3 sec Pulse Three Second Pulse 4 sec Pulse Four Second Pulse 1st Switch 1st Switch 2nd Switch 2nd Switch 3rd Switch 3rd Switch 4th Switch 4th Switch m Cancel Help To select a single channel simply click the channel and click the OK button To select a block of channels click the first channel press and hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and click the last channel in the block Release the Shift key and click the OK button on the dialog Choose the OK button to confirm the selection Version 4 0 0 302 Part Six Loggers The previous Configure Logger Channels Window will be shown with the selected channels displayed in the Channel Block If a single channel is to be logged the channel tag is displayed in the channel block button if it will fit within the button Alongside each channel block is a check box marked Avg If this box remains unchecked the Orchestrator System will record to disk the current value of the channels at the time of the log If the Avg check box is checked the logger will store the average value of the channels since the last log
7. op 3 Ob Tree or 3 0 GB D New Volume D Aidan Mallon E 556 2 Gb Tree of 252 OD New Volume E uke SH i ca tec of 5 Ge Computer K Devices with Removable Storage 5 a t4 gt A Network A DVD RW Drive F OFFICEL1 Save as type Data Interchange Format DIF Cancel Help Before completing this dialog box one must know the type of file acceptable to the spreadsheet or other software package that is to accept this file File Name Enter the filename of the resulting exported file The extension used should be of the correct type see Save File As Type later in this section Save in Using normal Windows techniques choose the directory where the exported file is to be placed Save File as Type This field defines the ultimate format of the file The correct type of file must be selected so the software package that is to import this file can do so correctly The choices are Version 4 0 0 367 Part Seven Replays Lotus Files PRN Text Files TXT Data Interchange Format DIF Excel Spreadsheet XLS Other Files Network Exported files can be stored anywhere the user has access to on a Network In the Save in field a list of other drives on the network available to the user will appear The Network Neighbourhood icon in the Save in field allows the user to connect to a remote drive This facility would be used to make a connection over a modem link to another system
8. If the Three D option is on the border colour is ignored The 3D drawing in the configurable monitor will always use the colours dark grey and white to achieve it s effect For best results the monitor background colour has been set to a default of grey If Alarm Indication is changed then the changes apply to all existing objects Version 4 0 0 287 Part Five Monitors Set up an ActiveX Document and run it across the internet This topic will show you how to set up an HTML page that you may use to monitor Configurable Monitor files over the Internet The discussion is based around the Microsoft Package FrontPage 98 On your WEB SERVER create the directory MSActiveXDocuments as this will be the directory you will store the monitor files into You may choose any name for the directory but for example purposes use this one Step 1 1 Launch the Configurable Monitor Application 2 Create a Configurable Monitor Document and put a control on it such as the angular gauge 3 Save the document with a suitable name i e configmon orm to the WEB SERVERMMSActiveDocuments directory Step 2 1 Run Microsoft FrontPage 98 2 Cancel the GettingStarted Dialog that you are prompted with 3 From the Menu select Tools Show FrontPage Editor 4 You are now presented with the FrontPage Editor Step 3 You should note that you can edit the blank page in two modes Normal or HTML see the tabs positioned on the bottom l
9. Line Rectangle A N ie S fa i zi Ellipse Polygon Aguage NumericLED Percent Slider Toggle The following icon is also displayed on the toolbar menu X This is used when you want to select an object Version 4 0 0 184 Part Five Monitors 3 Position the mouse on the point where the top left point of the object is to be and drag the mouse to the position where the bottom right point of the object is to be Release the mouse button In the case of the polygon drawing object click the mouse button where the first point of the object is to be and drag the mouse to draw the polygon To finish drawing release the mouse button and double click The Select tool is automatically selected Drawing Plug In Shapes Each Shape discussed next has a library property attached to it This discussion will explain what this tool is used for Library i Properties Frames Hubs Needles Scales Tes Gms Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts s 4 Configuration Name H E Clocks H E Import T Compass H E Comers H E Weather LaryClock 4 29 General Meters Rolling Airplane ed oo Import Export Load How to use configurations This discussion is intended to help the user understand the built in utility for saving and loading different configurations As mentioned this library enables users to load and save configurations o
10. Note USB and TCP printer ports are not supported Alarm Logging If the Enable Alarm Logging box is checked the alarm logger will log alarms to disk The logger will run continually whilst the Alarm System is enabled and this field is set to Enabled The remainder of the entries in this box determine the way in which the logger operates The Alarm Logger is independent of the Data Loggers described in Part 5 The two should not be confused Enable Alarm Logging ALARMS Log Format Short Long Logger Name Start Mode APPEND LOGS YY MM DD HH MM M Cycle Mode Align Time I a a a a Cycle E very DAY nd Log For DAY T Start Mode From the drop down list select one of the two options APPEND or CREATE This field determines where logged data is placed on the hard disk Selecting CREATE means that a new file will be started each time the Alarm system is enabled or when the system is restarted after a power failure APPEND means if the system is disabled and then restarted the alarm logging will continue and data added to the end of the most recent alarm log file This facility is useful in the case of power failures Providing the system is set to Autostart when the power is restored the alarm logger will continue placing the alarm logged data into the same data file Version Error Reference source not found 97 Part Four Configuring Processors Logger Name Enter a suitable name for the alarm l
11. Pointers Pointers can be displayed in a variety of shapes and sizes Properties are used to modify the pointer s style size width color and associated scale Multiple pointers can be placed on a single gauge r Properties Bands Captions Digtal Fonts Scales Tics GMS porne ij E Color Picture PointerlD D ScalelD 0 a ij m MouseControl 1 Relative Style 0 Rectangular v Type Vaue v Snaplncrement E Inner ass Value Quer oso Stat Width Ifo Stop User Defined Shape Pointer Color Determines the color for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD PointerlD When multiple pointers exist PointerlD is used to index the pointer to which the other pointer properties apply The total number of pointers is determined by the Pointers property and PointerlD has valid values from 0 to Pointers 1 Pointer Inner Outer Determines the inner and outer extents of the pointer currently selected by PointerlD If the control s orientation is horizontal these values are measured from top to bottom Otherwise they are measured from left to right These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Version 4 0 0 214 Part Five Monitors Mouse Control Determines the type of mouse input for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD PointerPicture Determines the graph
12. We will now configure the Background Properties of the LED Select the Background Tab and configure the fields as follows Bevel 2 10 BorderWidth 0 Bevellnner Lowered BevelOuter Raised BackColor Black Click Apply This gives the LED the Window Frame Style Effect Step 3 Now we will configure the Numeric Display Properties of the LED select the General Tab and configure the fields as follows Digits 9 Decimals 1 DecimalPostion 0 Decimal Size 7 ItalicOffset 0 LeadingPlusMinus Checked Segments pixels Width 4 Seperation 2 Spacing pixels Horizontal Vertical 5 5 Display Mode Numeric Click Apply Version 4 0 0 225 Part Five Monitors Step 4 Now that the LED has been configured we must now assign a channel to it to do this right click on the LED and select Data Source Properties from the Pop Up menu Assign the channel we used in the last example to the LED use this shape in conjunction with the Knob we made in a previous example to see the LED in action Version 4 0 0 226 Part Five Percent Monitors The Percent control is a versatile percentage interface used to indicate a level or progress Percent levels can be set directly by the user or indirectly by allowing the control to calculate them The user can define the number of percentage areas and shapes bar tank user defined It is data aware ems DULL BUDGET 10 Mortgage Utilities Groceries A
13. Help ur HH MM 55 Type 1 MIN D a o Source Channels Type in or edit the entry in the text box to nominate the Orchestrator source channel This could be any Orchestrator channel including any of the Orchestrator processor channels such as User Analogs User Digitals and Calculator Channels Averaging If this box remains unchecked averaging is not selected The values recorded in the history channels will be the instantaneous readings of the source channel at the update When the Averaging Check box is checked averaging is selected The values recorded in the History channels will be the average of the source channel values between updates of the history channel When the Averaging Check box is checked averaging is selected The values stored in the History channels will represent the average of the source channel between updates History Period From the drop down list choose the time period for the application Each of the History channels in the block will contain values 1 30 of the time period apart Choices are Day Mns anows If fixed time periods do not suit choose Time and enter actual time period in text box as HH MM SS Click on the OK Button to accept configuration or select the Cancel button to return to the previous Window without changing the configuration Version Error Reference source not found 70 Part Four Configuring Processors Calculated Channels To c
14. Low Mesaured Value a 0 465 Engineering Value 0 4 65 Cancel Apply Help Version 4 0 0 419 Part Ten Data Exchange Note Scaling is only available for Analog Input and Counter Input channels Saving Channel Configurations To save a channel configuration click on the OK button The user will be asked if the configuration is to be saved at this point Click Yes to do so No to quit without saving changes and Cancel to return to the configuration dialog Setting Channel Values Any System Output channel digital or analog channels can have their values changed manually To modify the value of a channel point to the Value field and double click the left mouse button Depending on the channel type Analog or Digital the following dialogs will be displayed Analog Channels If the channel chosen is an analog output the dialog box will contain a text field Edit the value in that field and choose the OK button The channel value will be changed to the new value on the next scan Modify Analog Variable Value Enter Value Zz Cancel Help Digital Channels If the selected channel is a digital output channel the dialog box will contain two radio buttons The button of the current status will be selected initially Choose the required button and then select the OK button to confirm the change The digital output will be set on the next scan Modify Digital Variable Value Selec
15. Mathematical Functions A range of mathematical functions are available Argument x can be Orchestrator channel an actual value Calculator variable or any expression hypot x y Euclidean distance function le fx y sin x Sine of angle x in radians cos x Cosine of angle x in radians tan x Tangent of angle x in radians dsin x Sine of angle x in degrees dcos x Cosine of angle x in degrees dtan x Tangent of angle x in degrees asin x Arc sine of angle x in radians acos x Arc cosine of angle x in radians atan x Arc tangent of angle x in radians dasin x Arc sine of angle x in degrees dacos x Arc cosine of angle x in degrees datan x Arc tangent of angle x in degrees In x Natural Log of x log x Log to the base 10 of x exp x Raise to the power of x fabs x Absolute value of x floor x Round down to the nearest integer ceil x Round up to the nearest integer rnd x Round to nearest integer sqrt x Square root of x Counting and Timing Functions ctime Seconds since midnight ytime Days since January 1 in the current year day Day of the week 1 Monday 7 Sunday Version Error Reference source not found 82 Part Four Configuring Processors The time functions return an integer value period H1 M1 S1 H2 M2 S2 The time period test function returns the value of 1 TRUE when the time as reported by the computer system clock is between H1 M1 S1 and H2 M2 S2 When time is not between the listed parame
16. Message Version 4 0 0 Defaulted to 30 seconds this is the time the annunciator system will wait for the host to respond Some hosts may require 60 seconds or more User can provide login ID and password for mail account if required by server 320 Part Six Loggers The user can test current configuration pressing this button Message Settings A number of mnemonics are provided which can be used to construct a message Subject and Text User can use l or L to specify a data log file name corresponding to the current logger t or T can be used to specify a text log file name and n or N specifies name of the data export file without extension In addition the subject and message can include channel value See Including Channel Values below Attach Then user selects this option file will be sent as attachment Append Then user selects this option file content will be added to message text text files only Delete file after emailing Then checked program will delete sent file Version 4 0 0 321 Part Six Loggers The Advanced Tab General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Advanced Logger Configuration In fast logging situations it is more economical on system resources to store the logged data into cache buffers created in memory and then write the data to disk at a slower rate To configure the way the logger will write to disk choose the Advanced Configu
17. Part Seven Replays e All scans times in Log B will be shifted before any calculations are done such that a scan time at the Alignment Time 2 will be shifted to Alignment Time 1 If these two times are identical no shift will take place Version 4 0 0 374 Part Seven Replays Log File Merge Utility This utility is used to merge two log files with same channel sets e Orchestrator Log File Merge Utility Available Log Files Merge Log Files i Browse C PRODUCTNAMESLOGGED_DATA mes Delete Files After Merge sa one Select the Source directory by using the Browse button Once the appropriate directory has been selected a list of the available log files will be displayed in the Available Log Files list box To select one or more log files for merging simply click on them with the Left Mouse button Once this operation is completed click on the gt gt button to transfer the files into the Merge Log Files list box Files Can be removed from the Merge Log Files list box by first selecting them and then clicking on the button Once all the files for merging have been selected use the Merge button to perform the merge This button will allow you to select the appropriate directory to merge to Version 4 0 0 375 Part Seven r Browse for Folder Select Folder 4 j PRODUCTNAME d AMONITORS je BIN p aii CMONITORS gt J CURRENT_CONFIG 4 LOGGED D
18. The Alarm Monitor Window The information held within the Alarm Monitor Window is divided into separate rows and columns A row will give the real time information about a particular channel The Column indicates the separate fields that relate to the channel in question see Section Column Identification The Alarm Monitor Window comprises a main application window and a number of child monitor windows The amount of Alarm Monitor Windows that may be open in the Alarm Monitor Main Window depends on the amount of available memory of your system Menu Bar Toolbar Qi Alsrm Montor Application Alamit E Bie Yu Options Y ndom Hiep G Oe EREE vie te O r TK Aura to are Montor Windows Minimize Maxmimixe and Ext Buttons Monitor Control Bars MESVISIOD Alarms Present 141347 Scroll Bars es ne E ELS NN Status Bar Monitor Tite Bars Server Name Server State Tima The Main Application Title Bar will display the title of the active window The Alarm Monitor Window that is active will have its Title Bar displayed in a highlighted colour To make another Alarm Monitor Window active point to it and click the mouse button the Title bars will change colour The Main Application title bar will show the name of the active window Windows can be reduced to an icon by pointing and clicking the mouse on the Minimize button Any Window can be maximized to fill the application window by pointing and clickin
19. po ooo mw Refresh 2 Enter information to log on to the server C Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password User name Password Blank password Allow saving password 3 Select the database on the server x Attach a database file as a database name Test Connection Enter the name of the SQL Server you wish to log to In section 2 specify Windows NT Integrated Security or specify a specific Username and Password Check with your SQL Server administrator which type of authentication is required From the Select the Database on the Server drop down list all the available databases on the SQL Server are displayed Select the required database It is also possible to attach to a SQL Server Database file by selecting the database file mdf file It is a good idea to click the test connection button as this will indicate if there are any problems connecting to the database Logging to a Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet From the General tab of the logger configuration select Database from the storage type drop down list On the advanced tab the Database properties should now be configurable The connection string can be edited manually by changing the text in the user defined text box below The logger can automatically create the connection string by clicking the select button and selecting the properties you require Logger Database C Default User Defined Provider MSDAS
20. If Logged Hearder Text is selected information from the Logger Header Text will be included for export This information is stored with the log and is specified in the Header of the Text section for that log If User Defined is selected the edit region will allow manually entry of text for inclusion in the export If None is selected no Header information is included for export Logger Header Sheet CSV TXT and DIF export files If logger Header sheet is included the logged data file name the logger name and the start and stop times of the logger will be included in the exported data at the top of the file Excel Worksheet XLS files A worksheet wil be created called LOGGERS which will give detailed information in column format about the logged data this includes logger name start and stop times header information and logger sequence Channels Header Sheet This will display the channel number prefix plus number tags descriptions units and Low and High state descriptions of the channels selected for export Excel Worksheet XLS files A worksheet wil be created called CHANNELS this will display in column format the details of the channels selected for export such as the channel number prefix plus number tags descriptions units and Low and High state descriptions min and max scales and more Text Logs Header Sheet CSV TXT and DIF export files Text logs from the data log file will be exported By default they are export
21. Orchestrator Channel Name Displays a list of channel names for the selected Orchestrator Data Source The user can select individual channels by clicking on this list The channel name is actually the 16 character channel description As the user scrolls through the list of sources and channels the source prefix and channel number will be displayed along side Users can enter a user defined channel by selecting the first source USER DEFINED and first channel USER DEFINED in the lists and then entering there own channel number and prefix If the channel being configured is not recognised or the selected server is down then edit fields will replace the combo boxes so that the user can enter a user defined channel Version 4 0 0 176 Part Five Monitors Configuring Visual Properties Edit Channel Properties Data Source Properties Visual Properties Display Options Data Conversion Object Text Object Border Font Name Fixedsys Border Thickness am Border Colour Three D On G Object Value Object Background Font Name Fixedsys Font Size 9 Fort Object State Indication Alarm Indication Inverse Waming Indication Inverse Eror Indication Inverse When editing a Channel Object for the first time the dialog box is first presented with the default visual properties already in place The operator can then make specific changes if required Object Text The user can set t
22. Part Five Monitors Sliders Description The Slider control is a versatile input output tool used to create sliders gauges meters etc that incorporate a sliding mechanism It uses dynamic property pages for easy design of unique sliding displays in short time Its mouse control and data aware features make it an ideal element for technical interfaces Big Number Demo Elliptical Shape Tank 16 49 aH co 30000 80000 79988 70000 60000 50000 40000 30000 Reverse Scale ee ee ELLE M Equalizer 20000 10000 E Version 4 0 0 244 Part Five Monitors Bars The slider bar properties allow the user to manipulate the On Off characteristics of the slider separately Colors or bitmaps may be used to fill the ON or OFF bar area Also the orientation width border and position of the bar can be controlled through properties Properties General Tics GMS Captions Digital Fonts Balnner BarQuter _ 080 OnPicture BaStat 0 05 OffColo OffPictue BarStop _ _ gt 0 95 Bar Shape D Rectangle X User Defined Bar Inner Outer If the Orientation property is set to horizontal then these properties determine the top and bottom extents of the slider as shown in the figure below If the Orientation property is set to vertical then they determine the
23. Port Settings Bits per second Data bits Panty Stop bits Flow control Restore Defaults menm For details of the entries required for each section consult the printers hardware manual or seek help from a competent hardware specialist Remote Printers The alarm printing system can print alarms to a printer which is attached to a remote machine on the same network To enable remote printing set the printer location to remote and type in the name of the machine where the printer is located Alternatively click on the Select button The Browse for a Computer dialog will appear with a list of all visible computers on the network Select the computer where the printer is located and click the OK button The computer name is automatically filled in to the Server Name of the Alarm System window For a machine to act as a host for remote alarm printing the machine which has the printer physically attached to it the Alarm Printer service must be installed and started Version Error Reference source not found 96 Part Four Configuring Processors To install the alarm printer service on the machine with the printer attached perform the following in a DOS window replace root with the root directory of your software e g ORCHESTRATOR cd root bin alrmprnt install If you type alrmprnt a full list of command line options will appear
24. Scales 1 as there is only one scale for this example X Position 1 49 Y Position 1 09 The gauge may look a bit strange but this is ok Step 4 Now we will change the annulars those are the Red Yellow and Blue Lines you see on the above example We need three annulars for this example so set the Annulars field in the Annulars tab to be three Let us configure the First Annular In the AnnularlD Field make sure the value is Zero then configure the fields as follows Version 4 0 0 197 Part Five Monitors Start Value 1 Stop Value 10 Radius Inner 1 99 Radius Outer 2 05 FloatOffset 0 Click on Color and choose Blue Now Click Apply You will see the blue Outline for the gauge appear as in the above example Now lets Configure the other Annulars To configure the second Annular set the value of AnnularlD to be one and set the Configuration Fields as follows Start Value 8 Stop Value 10 Radius Inner 1 85 Radius Outer 1 99 FloatOffset 0 Click on Color and choose Red Now Click Apply And for the Third and Final Annular Set the Value of AnnularlD to be two and configure the fields as follows Start Value 6 Stop Value 8 Radius Inner 1 85 Radius Outer 1 99 FloatOffset 0 Click on Color and choose Yellow Now Click Apply Now the Gauge is looking a bit more like our above example Step 5 We will now configure the Tics on the Gauge that is the lines on the gauge marking the position of th
25. 1 Fixed Decimal Determines whether or not the decimal s position is constant or variable Display Mode Determines the type of value which may be displayed by the control Value Alphanumeric Sets or returns the control s displayed value when DisplayMode is set to Numeric Segment Separation Determines the spacing in pixels between the segments that make up a single digit Segment Width Determines the width in pixels of each segment Spacing Horizontal Determines the distance in pixels between each digit It also is the distance between the border and end first and last digits Version 4 0 0 223 Part Five Monitors Spacing Vertical Determines the distance in pixels between the upper and lower borders and the digital display Note See Generic configuration Fields for information on background Version 4 0 0 224 Part Five Monitors Drawing a numeric LED Example We will now go through an example of drawing a numeric LED similar to the one below Step 1 After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the Numeric LED a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the LED is of the required size An LED will appear this is the default setting for the LED but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2
26. 95 is installed first However do to security restrictions actual DCOM facilities for this product are not supported on Windows 95 Version 4 0 0 423 Part Ten Data Exchange Configuration To configure either double click on the Data Exchange icon in the Orchestrator programme group or select Processors and then Data Exchange from the Orchestrator menu bar The Data Exchange Configuration window will show which channels have been configured Channels not yet configured will bear the tag description of DISABLED Channels that have been configured will be shown with a tag description and a channel description 2 mes 3 Configure DATA EXCHANGE MESVIS160 _ eus Gute 22 c GO mcum File Edit View Control Help aaaea YE Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration PRODUCT NAME OPCSERVERA DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED pranirm For Help press F1 Enabled No Errors To configure a channel point to and double click the mouse button on the channel to be configured A Configure Channel Dialog box will be displayed Version 4 0 0 424 Part Ten Data Exchange Advanced Data Exchange Configuration AutoEnable Data Exchange Before any Data Exchange Channel can be incorporated into the overall Orchestrator System the Advanced Data Exchange Configur
27. Alarm messages will remain even if the channel has returned to a normal status until they are acknowledged Alarms should be acknowledged within the monitor windows The Alarm bar can be toggled on or off by choosing the Alarm Bar option from the View menu Also the alarm bar is dockable It can be placed on any position on the windows desktop Opening and Saving Configurations When a request is made to save a modified configuration for a module e g the Calculator processor then this is placed in the CURRENT CONFIG directory The Current configuration files i e everything in CURRENT CONFIG can be saved as one file in the directory SAVED CONFIG Complete configurations can therefore be saved and recalled at a later date Save Complete Configurations Using the File menu choose Save or Save As Using normal Windows techniques the configuration can be saved The configuration can be saved in any of three formats e Zipped Configuration zip e Compressed Configuration orc e Uncompressed Configuration tar A typical configuration can be 5MB in size If saved in Zipped format the file will be compressed to around 10 of the original size When saved in Zipped format the configuration can be opened with a compatible Zip viewer such as WinZip or with Windows Explorer on Windows XP and Windows Vista systems If compressed configuration is selected the file will normally be compressed to 20 of the original size orc files can only
28. Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced m Predefined Messages Add Destiniation Departure Edit Delete 4 m j For Help press F1 Enabled No Errors Click the Enable Text Logging checkbox to enable text logging for the logger Enter a Header message that will be displayed when the log file is replayed Version 4 0 0 309 Part Six Loggers You can Add Edit Delete predefined messages by clicking on the appropriate button The user can select these messages when entering text logs using Orchestrator Trend Replays Logger text can include channel values See Including Channel Values below The Export Tab General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Data Export Data files stored on the hard disk by any Orchestrator loggers can be converted into file formats suitable for importing into industry standard spreadsheets such as Microsoft Excel or other standard spreadsheet applications The Orchestrator Data Export facility allows the user to carry out such conversions To enable the data export facility you need to click the Logger Export check box 4 Configure LOGGER 1 MESVIS170 c wes File View Control Help De amp g 7X General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced V Logger Export Run Command Export Data To File Header TEXT FILE PRODUCT P3 i SHIFT P4 3 BATCH
29. Configure Channel Lists Wellhead amp Choke Manifold Trendi Trend2 Data Interval SKIP TIME FREQUENCY 900 Seconds L9 Cum Click enable to enable the replay period The first drop down indicitates the start period name underneath this is the start time of that period which can be edited here for the data export The next drop down indicates the name of the end period If a different period name is choosen the stop time will reference the stop time of that period A different period name would be choosen as the stop period in order to incorporate multiple data lists for the one period The replay channels section is performed as described above Data Interval Users may wish to export only a certain amount of data The Sample Skip option allows the user to decide how many samples will be exported If a sample rate of say n is entered then every nth sample will be exported The Sample Skip combo box has Three options Export All and Skip Every and Skip Time Frequency Select Skip Every and an edit box will appear type in the skip factor in terms of logs scans Select Skip Time Frequency and an edit box will appear type in the skip factor in terms of seconds Select Skip Duplicates to skip duplicated data Export Options Version 4 0 0 361 Part Seven Replays 4 Logger Header Sheet V Channels Header Sheet V Text Logs Header Sheet V Date Time of Text Logs V Long Date Format on Heade
30. Could not initialise the communications resource nnnnn Program can t open resource nnnnn check hardware or another program uses this resource Could not connect to the SMSC Check SMS Centre number Could not connect to the operator Check SMS Centre number Could not login to the messaging center Check SMS Centre number or password Login failed Check password Could not send packet to the messaging center Operator doesn t support TAP protocol MAPI Sendmail retcode nnn where nnn is Return Code Error Message 0 The call succeeded and the message was sent 1 The user canceled one of the dialog boxes No message was sent 2 One or more unspecified errors occurred No message was sent 3 There was no default logon and the user failed to log on successfully when the logon dialog box was displayed No message was sent 5 There was insufficient memory to proceed No message was sent 10 There were too many recipients No message was sent 14 A recipient did not appear in the address list No message was sent 25 One or more recipients were invalid or did not resolve to any address Version Error Reference source not found 115 Part Four Configuring Processors System Error Processor Configuration Introduction The System Error Processor Allows the User to Enable a Set of Channels which will report any Errors that occour in the system and if necessary will generate alarms or drive a common
31. Enter the initial catalog to use lc Ntemp Excel Spreadsheet xls v Test Connection From the Data Source drop down select Excel Files If authentication is required enter a username and password in the logon section Enter the name of the Excel file to be used in section 3 On the advanced tab access permissions for the Spreadsheet can be granted Note The Orchestrator Service must be configured to log on as a user To configure the Service to log on a user click Start Programs and Control Panel From the Control Panel select Administrative Tools Select the Computer Management applet Double Click on Services Find the Orchestrator Service from the list right click on the service and select properties Click the Log On tab Enter a username and password as shown in the image below Version 4 0 0 329 Part Six Loggers Fr PRODUCT NAME Properties Local Computer Log on as Local System account Allow service to interact with desktop This account domain usemame Browse Password 999909999909999 Confirm password 9999999999990 9 Help me configure user account log on options You can enable or disable this service for the hardware profiles listed below Hardware Profile Service Undocked Profile Enabled Troubleshooting using hardware profiles Enable Disable It is necessary to stop and start the service before this change will take effect To st
32. Random 0 100 Random 0 1000 For Help press Fl The Main Application Title Bar will display the title of the active window The Channel Monitor Window that is active will have its Title Bar displayed in a highlighted colour To make another Channel Monitor Window active point to it and click the mouse button the Title bars will change colour The Main Application title bar will show the name of the active window Version 4 0 0 122 Part Five Monitors Windows can be reduced to an icon by pointing and clicking the mouse on the Minimise button Any Window can be maximised to fill the application window by pointing and clicking the Maximise button Often Windows get laid on top of each other obscuring other windows To locate and bring another Window to the front select Window from the menu bar and select the Window required from the drop down list Alternatively Windows can be Tiled or Cascaded from the same menu option Windows can be closed by clicking on the X button of the title bar Often all the contents of a Window cannot be displayed at once Scroll Bars are provided to facilitate moving the contents of the Window to display the information required You can alternatively resize the columns by pointing the mouse pointer at the rightmost corner of the column header and by holding down the left mouse button drag the column to the width you require The menu bar comprises drop down lists of options To select an option
33. Re xz M finite x Auto Tic Tic Hf0 SealelD fo Enabled TicCount MajorTics B e TicSubCount MinorTics 0 Style fo Rectangle Float Labels M n ff Rotated Pec uj ago Position 2 20 Position Size Range Inner 11 70 StatValue off Outer 2 00 StopValue 10 Width o o0 DelaValue olf cmoa o TicColor Determines the color for the tic set currently selected by TiclD TicDelta Determines the value of the gap between numbers for the tic set currently selected by TiclD Version 4 0 0 195 Part Five Monitors TicFloatOffset Determines the offset value of the tic set currently selected by TiclID Essentially this property is used to shift tic sets by adding the offset to TicStartValue For example if TicStartValue 2 TicSopValue 4 and TicFloatOffset 1 then the tic set will range from three 3 to five 5 instead of two 2 to four 4 This is useful when trying to display a floating instrument an instrument where the needle remains stationary and the tics and or annulars move such as a compass TicFontlD Determines which font is used for the labels of the tic set currently selected by TicID TiclD When multiple tic sets exist TicID is used to index the tic sets to which the other tic properties apply The total number of tic sets is determined by the Tics property and TicID has valid values from 0 to Tics 1
34. Source Selection Default User Defined PRODUCT NAME Server 1 c2 15 18 iol PRODUCT NAME PRODUCT NAME Source USER_DEFINED PRODUCT NAME Channe USER DEFINED X o Source Type The Data Source Type is of Channel Type This will be selected by default Source Selection Allows either the Default Orchestrator server or User Defined data source to be selected If Default is selected the server button will be greyed out With User Defined the Server button is active To user define a server other than the Orchestrator default click the Server button and select the required source from the Select Server window as shown below Version 4 0 0 175 Part Five Monitors Server Name The name of the server which contains the required Channel The server does not have to be currently attached to the monitor If the server can not send data back to this object then the object will display Disabled after the OK button has been clicked r Select PRODUCT NAME Server MESVIS160 OK C Auto Browse Cancel E Entire Network 3 Microsoft Terminal Services af Microsoft Windows Network 3 Web Client Network amp ACCOUNTS Bs Fs MESVIS160 MESXP139 IB MESXP150 Orchestrator Source Name This list displays all configured Orchestrator sources on a particular server The user must select the name of the required source e g Device Channels User Analog Channels etc
35. There may be lines of text at the start of the ASCII file to import which could be used to describe the data This header information can be imported into a text file with the correct System format This header information can also be ignored Import Header Click this check box on if you require header information to be imported No Header Lines Enter the number of header lines at the start of the ASCII file Note It is important to fill in the No Header Lines field even if you do not require header information to be imported It informs the application which line the data starts at Version 4 0 0 369 Part Seven Replays Line Information This information describes how each column of data is formatted in the ASCII file Delimiter Three options and a User Defined alternative are available in this drop down list The delimiter separates each field in a row The correct delimiter is required for the data to be interpreted correctly The choices are Comma Space Tab User As an alternative to the fixed choices a User option is available If this is chosen enter the delimiting character in the text box that appears alongside the list End Line Similar to the Delimiter there are choices for the end of line separator The choices are CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed CR LF User A User option is again an option Adding Columns You must add a column entry for every column of data you wish to import Click on the
36. TicInnerRadius TicOuterRadius Determines the inner and outer radii of the tic set currently selected by TiclID These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 TicLabel Enables or disables labels at each tic mark for the tic set currently selected by TiclD The position of the tic labels is defined by the TicLabelRadius property TicLabelRadius Determines the radius at which TiclD displays the labels for the tic set currently selected This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 TicLabelRotated Determines whether the labels for the tic set currently selected by TicID are oriented with respect to the control or the tic mark Both orientations are shown in the figure below This feature is useful when trying to display a floating instrument an instrument where the needle remains stationary and the tics and or annulars move Such as a compass Tics Determines the number of tic sets displayed on the control This property must be set before all other tic properties The TiclD property is used to select the tic set to which tic properties apply TicScalelD Determines the scale on which the tic set currently selected by TiclD is based The TicStartValue and TicStopValue properties must fall within the range defined by ScaleMaxValue and ScaleMinValue TicStartValue TicStopValue Determines the values at which the tic marks start and stop for t
37. Using Toolbar Button To zoom to top level choose the T button for horizontal trends or the button for vertical trends Zooming an Area To zoom an area of the Window first select the area A dotted rectangular box will be displayed enclosing the area that is required to fill the Window when zoomed Then do one of the following Using Zoom Menu choose Zoom Selected Area Using Fast Key Press CTRL Z Using Toolbar Button To zoom area use Q button Zooming to Time To zoom to a particular time select the start date and start time followed by the end date and end time To zoom to a particular period select the start period followed by the end period and adjust the time if required the data will display at that time Version 4 0 0 393 Part Seven Replays Zoom To Time Zoom Times Select Start and End Period Start Time 15 10 2008 Jr 12 00 00 lt Select End Period Stop Time 15 10 2008 J 12 35 00 Gitar Using Zoom Menu choose Zoom To Time Using Fast Key Press CTRL Y Using Toolbar Button zoom to time amp button Panning Through a Trend When a trend has been zoomed it may be necessary to move forward and backwards through the Trend to examine points of interest There are several different methods to pan through a Trend When a Trend is panned the time base will not change but the time axis will move forwards or backwards half a screen for each step Pan Backwards Use
38. and tics Version 4 0 0 260 Part Five Monitors Tracks The Strip Chart Control allows the user to include up to 30 individual tracks per strip chart It determines the number of individual plots maintained by the control This property must be set before all other track properties The TracklD property is used to select the track to which track properties apply mE c E u f 5 n Library Background Captions Fonts General Stamps TrackBands Variables XAxs GMS Tracks 1 Invert Asis TrackColor TrackID 0 XTics 3 Both 7 TrackPicture YTics 3 Both A r TrackOutline Separation 0 10 OutlineColor Y Axis Labels v Labels TicColor Max 10 00 Fonip o 4 Min 10 00 Align E Right 7 Display Max 10 00 Orientation 0 Horizontal Display Min 10 00 MajorTics 9 Offset cp mpm l MinorTics ENEE N TracklD When multiple tracks exist TracklD is used to index the track to which the other track properties apply The total number of tracks is determined by the Tracks property and TrackID has valid values from 0 to Tracks 1 Invert Axis Determines the direction the track plots i e it inverts the Y axis XTics Determines the position of the tic marks for the X and Y axes respectively These properties allow the user to set the X and Y Tic marks on the top bottom left right etc for each track Ytics Dete
39. noisy channels from reporting multiple alarms when the average reading is close to the alarm or warning threshold The Hysteresis value is relative to the alarm or warning limit For example if a channel s high alarm is set to 80 degrees C Hysteresis is enabled and a Hysteresis value of 5 degrees C is specified the system will respond as follows When the channel reading goes above the high alarm limit of 80 it will trigger the alarm The alarm will not be reset until the channel reading falls below 75 the high limit Hysteresis value Check the box if this feature is needed Enter the value of the dead band in the text box Priority Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of this alarm Drive Common Alarm A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Alarm Message An Alarm Message can be defined to be displayed on the Status line of the Orchestrator Main Window when a channel goes into an alarm state Enter the message up to 32 characters Version 4 0 0 429 Part Ten Data Exchange Access Read Write This field specifies whether this channel will be able to Read Write it s connected data source If Read is selected then Write options are greyed out If Write is selected then the user can also specify some read characteristics for
40. sizing Layout Functions Aligns left edges of selected objects with the dominant object ss Aligns right edges of selected objects with the dominant object amp Aligns top edges of selected objects with the dominant object 28 Aligns bottom edges of selected objects with the dominant object e Resize selected objects to be the same width as the dominant object Resize selected objects to be the same height as the dominant object El Resize selected objects to be the same width and height as the dominant object Display Hide monitor grid Alignment and re sizing of selected objects are carried out with reference to a dominant object Version 4 0 0 282 Part Five Monitors The dominant object highlighted in red is selected by moving the pointing device to the required item and clicking once objects to be aligned resized are then selected by holding down the shift key and single clicking the required objects highlighted in grey Extent selection is also possible by dragging the mouse around the outside of all the objects to be selected Now click the required alignment resize icon Value Entry Mode In value entry mode it is possible to change the value of channels and acknowledge alarms from within Configurable monitor Changing a channel value Ensure the monitor is not locked in the Monitor Menu Lock Monitor should not be checked Right click the mouse on the channel object which represents the channel whos
41. the Destination File must be selected to specify the type of file you wish to export to The following image displays the Destination File section of Data Export Destination File 5 C PRODUCT NAMESEXPORTED DATA Report XLS Select Destination File Delimiter COMMA J Template Daily Report sls Select Value Precision 4 Multiple files for Excel col limit V Open Destination The types of file available for export are Spreadsheet File CSV Data Interchange Format DIF Text Files TXT Excel Workbook XLS Split into Multiple Files for Excel Column Limit When importing csv text files Excel can only read 255 columns and when importing dif files Excel can only read 254 columns Select this option if exporting a large number of channels to Excel Data will be exported in files appended with a sequence number Split into Multiple Files for Time Periods When exporting to Excel Spreadsheet if using multiple time periods these periods can be separated into single spreadsheet files for each period Template Excel Workbook XLS Format Only When an Excel Workbook xls format is chosen for data export a Template check box appears to allow selection of an Excel Workbook file for use as the template Excel Templates are stored in the REPLAY_OPTIONS TEMPLATES system folder by default Data export will use this Excel Template file to persist formating options defined by the user Data is exported i
42. 0 141 Part Five Monitors Column Sorting Gl File View Options Configuration Window Help e x iD amo 0n g G Ll Channel Monitor CALCULATED C c Channel Monitor CALCULATED C Gl File View Options Configuration Window Help e x um DE GQ NO O 05 DISABLED Ea C0999 DISABLED i Ea co99s DISABLED E c0997 DISABLED Ea co DISABLED ES c0995 DISABLED IE cos DISABLED Ea co993 DISABLED E co DISABLED DISABLED E Number of Seco Zero to Ten Cou Zero to Six Coun Zero to Sixty Cou 0 100 Zero to Hundred 0 1000 Zero to Thousan Assign Chans Assign Channels 1sec Pulse One Second Pul 2 sec Pulse Two Second Pul Dann Didan Thenn Canned D The Channel Monitor Application allows for each Channel Monitoring Window to be sorted in Ascending or Descending Order in the following three columns 1 Channel 2 Tag 3 Description A Sort take place when the user clicks on the header of the column he she wishes to sort Once clicked the application will sort the column in either Ascending or Descending order depending on the previous state it was in To indicate to the user what state the sorted column is in a small triangular box appears on the side of the column header pointing upwards if Ascending and downwards if Descending Version 4 0 0 142 Part Five Monitors Once A Sort takes place the user can s
43. 7 aa o mms 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Version 4 0 0 210 Part Five Monitors Bands Bands are used for aesthetics as well as indicators of operating ranges Properties are provided to modify the band s start stop values inner outer positions color and associated scale Multiple bands can be placed on a single gauge Properties Ae Pointers Scales Tics GMS Library Background Captions Digtal Fonts Bands a BandColor BandPicture BandInner 060 BandOuter _ 0 40 BandStyle 0 Rectangular BandStart 4 fio BandStop gt f100 BandShape BandColor Determines the color of the band currently selected by BanalD BandID When multiple bands exist BandID is used to index the band to which the other band properties apply The total number of bands is determined by the Bands property and BandlD has valid values from 0 to Bands 1 Bandinner BandOuter Determines the inner and outer extents of the band currently selected by BandID If the instrument s orientation is horizontal these values are measured from top to bottom Otherwise they are measured from left to right These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 BandPicture Determines the graphic to be displayed in the band area defined by BandlInner BandOuter BandStart and BandStop for the band currently selected by BandlD Version 4 0
44. ACROSS NETWORKS PART NINE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION CHANNEL CONFIGURATION CONFIGURING DIGITAL CHANNELS CONFIGURING ANALOGUE CHANNELS AUTOMATIC SCALING SAVING CHANNEL CONFIGURATIONS SETTING CHANNEL VALUES ALARM MASKING PART 10 DATA EXCHANGE DATA EXCHANGE CONFIGURATION ADVANCED DATA EXCHANGE CONFIGURATION SAVING THE CONFIGURATION COPY AND PASTE CONFIGURE DATA EXCHANGE CHANNEL CONFIGURING DATA EXCHANGE FOR REMOTE OPERATION SERVER MACHINE CLIENT MACHINE REGISTER OPC PROXY TROUBLE SHOOTING APPENDIX A ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES ORCHESTRATOR ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES REPLAYS ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES MONITORS ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES APPENDIX B SECURITY 404 404 404 406 407 407 408 409 409 410 413 414 415 415 417 419 420 420 420 422 423 424 425 426 426 427 433 434 440 441 442 443 444 444 444 446 ORCHESTRATOR SECURITY 447 PREREQUISITES 447 FILE LOCATION 447 PROTECTING THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 452 PROTECTING THE SYSTEM MONITORING 452 PROTECTING THE SYSTEM SYSTEM STATUS 453 GENERAL RULES FOR IMPLEMENTING SECURITY 455 Preface Preface and conventions The Orchestrator RTE User Guide contains detailed information about using Orchestrator Real Time Engine Data Acquisition Software package The guide assumes a working knowledge of Windows For information on Windows please refer to the documentation supplied with that product The guide details the u
45. Axes will be drawn to the left top of the graph depending on orientation Right Bottom of Graph The Axes will be drawn to the right bottom of the graph depending on orientation NB If too many axes are configured to the left of the graph The horizontal space left for the actual graph will be reduced Major Tick Marks If this check box is crossed then a tick mark with the value alongside will be placed at every position identified by the entry in the Every text box Minor Tick Marks If this box is checked then a tick with no value will be placed on the channels axis at positions identified by the entry in the Every text box Control Limit Lines Up to 5 different fixed lines can be displayed on the trend to display upper control upper warning center lower warning and lower control limit lines Check the limit line box in order to be able to see a fixed line for the selected channel on the trend Value The value for the fixed limit line Line Colour The colour of the line can be chosen from the drop down list As each line is added to the graph a new colour will be offered for each line Line Width From the drop down list select the thickness of the line The thinnest line is the default Version 4 0 0 388 Part Seven Replays Line Style To enable lines to be identified more easily the style of the line can be chosen from a continuous line dotted dashed or combination of dotted and dashed Line On Check th
46. B Rolling Airplane m Pitching Submarine 4 29 Automobile Instruments S EE m Compass Import Export Load Ste See the previous bitmap images Right Click on the control and choose Visual Display Properties Go the Library tabbed property page Click on the Import button and find the gms file you wish to import The tree will reflect an Import directory and the new configuration s will reside within that directory If you wish to move them out of that directory drag the configuration s to the location within the tree where you wish them to reside me Version 4 0 0 187 Part Five Monitors Deleting Configurations Right Click on the control and choose Visual Display Properties Go the Library tabbed property page Click on the configuration or the directory of configurations you wish to delete Either hit the delete key or right click on the configuration and select Delete DOS Version 4 0 0 188 Part Five Monitors Plug in Shapes Angular Gauges MIN MAX PSi GAUGE 5 5 SM we d Compass Seconds z SS A S HWW 5 2 30 Description AGauge is a multi purpose highly customisable angular gauge custom control Its dynamic property pages provide a powerful tool for designing gauges with full control of scales needles fonts captions annulars and tics With its data aware and mouse input features AGauge is an ideal display element for tec
47. Box Version 4 0 0 384 Part Seven Replays If you wish to define your own custom colours whilst in the Colour dialog box choose the Define Custom Colours button The Colour dialog box will expand to show a customising section Select a Basic Colour first by pointing to one and clicking the mouse Move the cursor to the colour spectrum and drag the cursor across the colour range until the required colour is found Alternatively edit the text boxes in the customise section to achieve the colour needed Choose Add to Custom Colours Button and the colour will be added to the Custom Colour boxes on the left of the dialog box Fonts Options Page The fonts for the various components in the Trend Display windows can be configured Category From the category field select the component whose font you wish to change then click on the change font button to bring up a new dialog box select the font font size and style you want then click OK Click Apply to make the changes if you are not happy with the new fonts click Reset All then Apply to restore the fonts to their defaults Sample Shows a sample of the currently selected font Log Selection The log file page allows for one of five options to be selected Manual Manual is the default option This option does not alter the behavior of the current Trend configuration Most Recent File In directory or Most Recent Log in a Database This option is useful when you are monitoring
48. Cancel button Version 4 0 0 350 Part Six Loggers Program Arguments This application can accept command line arguments in 2 ways The Import Configuration file only ORI The application opens the previously saved configuration file and is ready to import an ASCII file The ASCII file and the Import Configuration file ORI in that order The application opens the previously saved configuration file and immediately launches the import task on the ASCII file File names with spaces must have quotes 7 wrapped around them to allow the names to be interpreted correctly Version 4 0 0 351 Part Six Loggers Editing Channel properties For each column of data enter the following Column Number The column number in which the data appears in the ACSII file Tag Enter up to 16 characters of tag information Description Enter up to 32 characters of description information Units Enter up to 4 characters of units information A column may be imported more than once at a time For performance it is recommended that columns be imported sequentially When done click on the OK button The entry will be added to the list Version 4 0 0 352 Part Seven Replays Part Seven Replay options Part Seven details the use of the Replay Options available in Orchestrator Data Export Trend Replays Data Import Log File Merge Utility Log File Synchronisation Utility Version 4 0 0 353 Part Seven Rep
49. Data Module Signals Alarm System User Analogs User Digitals Loggers Logger Logger User Tasks 1 64 Replays Spreadsheets Alarm Trend Data Printer Listing Windows Export Other Applications Version 4 0 0 11 Part One Installation Procedure Orchestrator Configuration All aspects of the product are user configurable and simple to use Point and click techniques encompassed with pull down menus make it easy to navigate around the software Separate windows for configuration menus enable configurations to be checked on line System design integration commissioning and training costs are significantly reduced with this product Data Acquisition The true real time multi tasking operation of the product enables data to be acquired in real time from a wide selection of devices including programmable logic controllers PLCs 3 term controllers and other intelligent devices The system architecture permits a large number of devices to be connected to the host computer depending on available serial ports Real Time Calculator The real time calculator allows the creation and calculation of data directly from signal inputs Calculations can be devised in a free form fashion and can be processed in the same way as other data i e logged displayed animated or alarm processed Alarm Processing An important aspect of monitoring systems is the ability to handle alarms and events With
50. Drawing a Toggle Example Step 1 fal After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the Toggle a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the Toggle is of the required size A Slider will appear this is the default setting for the Toggle There are not too many fields for the toggle play around with them and you should get a feel for them Version 4 0 0 253 Part Five Monitors Led s Description LED provides a highly customizable Light Emitting Diode LED interface Its dynamic property pages provide full control of the LED s size shape colors and bitmaps Horizontal or vertical arrays of LEDs may be used to display meter levels or dip switch settings With its data aware and mouse input features LED is an ideal element for technical interfaces m e ds T BEBE NN 666605000 j f j j f j j f IGG 7 o0 oy e a i E I A E E t E d a Seeeeeee 1441131344411 Version 4 0 0 254 Part Five Monitors LED s General r Properties Value fo Dimensions LE D w idth go M MouseControl LEDHeight 1 3 LEDStylelD fo LEDS tion Mode fo Value ARE Direction E Backward Decay LED Orientation E Vertical MaxDecay AutoSize 2 SizeLEDs v DecayRate 200 NumLEDs Determines the number of LEDs to be used LEDIndex D
51. For Example The Device Scan rate is set to 1 second the Period log rate to 5 minutes and the Average feature selected Every 5 minutes the logger will record the average of the last 300 scans of each of the selected channels Alongside each channel block is a check box marked Lag If this box remains unchecked or the logger is not a rate of change logger the Orchestrator System will record to disk the current value of the channels at the time of the log If the Lag check box is checked on a rate of change logger the logger will store the value of the channel when the lagged rate of change channel changes by the required amount When configuration of the Channels is complete accept the selections by clicking on the OK button at the bottom of the Window If the Cancel button is chosen any changes made to the configuration will be discarded The Events Tab General Channels Events Text Esport Advanced If Event Mode or Period Event Mode is selected in the Event Channels there is a drop down list title Trigger with two selections Logged Channels or Event Channels If there is enough space on the button a block that contains a single channel the channel s tag identifier will be displayed instead of the channel range Trigger Logged Channels If Logged Channels is selected then any channel configured for this logger will trigger the logger when it goes into an Event mode Trigger Event Channels If Event Channels is
52. Protection System has completed successfully ld Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 InstallShield Wizard ox InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 Click Finish to exit the wizard Protection Installer Orchestrator Client Installation Follow the Install Wizard screens In most instances it is recommended to use the default answers to questions as follows Version 4 0 0 36 Part One Installation Procedure PRODUCT NAME Client Setup Welcome To PRODUCT NAME Client Setup Version 3 9 11 0 The InstallShield Wizard will install PRODUCT NAME Client on your computer To continue click Next You must read and accept the end user licence agreement before the installation can continue Using your mouse scroll to the bottom of the licence dialog When you reach the bottom of the licence dialog the I Agree button will become active If you have fully read and agree with the end user licence agreement EULA click the I Agree button to continue with the installation If you do not agree with the EULA click the I Disagree button to terminate the installation Measuresoft Licence Agreemnet END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT FOR MEASURESOFT SOFTWARE SINGLE USER PRODUCT PLEASE READ THIS CAREFULLY BEFORE YOU INSTALL COPY OR DOWNLOAD THE ACCOMPANYING MEASURESOFT SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THIS SOFTWARE IS S
53. TicSubCount MinorTics o Style 0 Rectangular w Label On Ottlv o Cow Position f X 0 15 Inner o 40 StartValue _ 0 00 Quer gt O060 StopValue 100 0 wid E000 DeltaValue ifo User Defined Shape Color Determines the color for the tic set currently selected by TiclD Delta Value Determines the interval value between tic marks for the tic set currently selected by TiclD FontiD Determines which font is used for the labels of the tic set currently selected by TicID TiclD When multiple tic sets exist TicID is used to index the tic sets to which the other tic properties apply The total number of tic sets is determined by the Tics property and TicID has valid values from 0 to Tics 1 Inner Outer Determines the inner and outer extents of the tic set currently selected by TiclD These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Version 4 0 0 218 Part Five Monitors Label On Off Enables or disables labels at each tic mark for the tic set currently selected by TiclD The position of the tic labels is defined by the TicLabelPosition property Label Position Sets or returns the position where labels are displayed for the tic set currently selected by TicID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Tics Determines the number of tic sets d
54. Trends to be created and examined Both the vertical Y axis and the horizontal X axis can be expanded The graphs along with full legend and file time information can be printed Particular areas of the Trend that are of interest can be selected and examined in more detail or exported to a spreadsheet format file The Trends application has a multiple document interface MDI which allows several Trends to be open at the same time Trends can be used to replay data in real time Trend Configurations or layouts can be saved independently of the logged data This allows the same configuration to be used on different logged data files Launching Trends ORCHESTRATOR Trends can be launched in one of two ways zx Trends Select the Trends icon by going to Start Menu gt gt Programs gt gt ORCHESTRATOR gt gt Trends or from the ORCHESTRATOR main program window select the Replays option from the menu bar and then choose Trends If the latter method is used a secondary menu will drop down offering a choice as follows MESVIS160 aidan mallon demo PRODUCT NAME File View Control Monitors Replays Devices Processors Loggers Help ALARM NOTEPAD HES amp B LOG FILE SYNCRONISATION DATA EXPORT gt TRENDS d Replay File Selection Replay Database Selection Replay Last If Configure is selected a blank trend is presented for configuration If Replay File Selection is made the user is prompted for a log fil
55. Userd C LOGGED ALARMS C LOGGED DAT G REPLA amp Y OPTIONS G SAVED CONFIG SAVED VALUES E C Trends The main directory containing all the Orchestrator files is called Orchestrator Each of the sub directories is described below BIN Contains all the program files necessary to run Orchestrator AMONITORS Contains saved Alarm Monitor Configuration Files CMONITORS Contains saved Configurable Monitor Configuration Files CURRENT_CONFIG Contains all the configuration files for the current configuration Within this directory are more sub directories holding the configuration for each device data processor and logger configured LOGGED_ALARMS If the Alarm System has been enabled and configured to log alarms to disk then this sub directory will exist containing the alarm data files LOGGED_DATA When a Logger has been enabled this sub directory will be created Within this sub directory will be further sub directories one for each logger that has been enabled See Parts 6 for logger configuration information MONITORS Contains saved Channel Monitor Configuration Files REPLAY_OPTIONS This sub directory will contain files used during Data Export operations SAVED_CONFIG The SAVED_CONFIG sub directory stores all configuration files that have been saved Some or all of these may be in compressed form SAVED_VALUES This sub directory is created when the Save Outputs option on one o
56. a Trend This Print dialog box appears where you may specify the range of trends to be printed the number of copies the destination printer and other printer set up options Shortcuts Toolbar amp Keys Ctrl P Version 4 0 0 398 Part Seven Replays Fr Print HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Properties Ready HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 192 168 1 167 3 Number of copies Print range Curent Page C Time Print dialog box The following options allow you to specify how the Trend should be printed Printer This section describes the name status and type of printer and the port it is connected to on its host computer If the printer is a network printer and the system administrator has entered a comment for the printer this is also displayed Print Range The user can select Current page printing where the entire log will be printed Time allows you to specify a range within a page for printing Selecting All allows the user to specify a length of time using page length Copies Specify the number of copies you want to print of the Trend Collate This option has no effect within the Trends Version 4 0 0 399 Part Seven Replays Print Progress Dialog The Printing dialog box is shown during the time that ORCHESTRATOR Trends is sending output to the printer The page number indicates the progress of the printing To abort printing choose Cancel Print Preview command File menu Fr
57. and an extension of up to three characters Trends add the extension specified in the Save File As Type box This should normally be specified as Trend File ort Save in Select where you want to store the trend configuration file The drop down list shows all possible areas to save to Directories Select the directory in which you want to store the file This will normally be in a sub directory called Trends within the ORCHESTRATOR main directory Alternative locations can be used if for example you would rather use a project directory Save Command From the File menu choose Save or from the toolbar choose the a tool button Use this command to save the active document to its current name and directory When you save a document for the first time Trend displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your configuration file If you want to change the name and directory of an existing configuration before you save it choose the Save As command Version 4 0 0 402 Part Seven Replays Retrieving a Trend Configuration File Open To retrieve a Trend Configuration select the Open command from the File Or select from the toolbar the 5 button An Open File Dialog will be displayed Lookin Ji TRENDS v 4 er Eg i Name Date modif Type Size d Recent Places Desktop E demotrend A A Network Files of type Trend Files ort Cancel Open as read only File Name Type or selec
58. and printer options Most Recent File Displays a list of the monitors most recently used When one of these is selected the List monitor it represents will be opened Exits the Configurable Monitor and prompts to save any document with unsaved changes Edit Menu Commands The Edit menu offers the following commands View Menu Commands The View menu offers the following commands Status Bar Toggles the status bar on off Layout Bar Toggles the layout bar on off Full Screen Toggles full screen mode Draw Menu Commands The Draw menu offers the following commands which enable you to draw various shapes objects within the Configurable Monitor Version 4 0 0 290 Part Five Monitors The select tool allows the user to select a single or multiple objects using the mouse The channel tool allows the user to draw a channel object Object Menu Commands The Object menu offers the following commands which enable you to manipulate the way that shapes objects are presented visually on screen Move To Front Moves the selected object to the front of the drawing Move To Back Moves the selected object to the back of drawing Move Forward Moves the selected object to next position in z order Order in which objects are placed on top of one another in Windows Move the selected object to previous position in z order Alignment Left Align Right Align Top Align Bottom Align Make Same Size Monitor Menu Command
59. be opened using Orchestrator If the configuration is saved in uncompressed format the file can be opened using compatible tar viewers Version 4 0 0 46 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Open Stored Configurations Configurations saved onto disk can only be recovered when the Orchestrator system is disabled If the existing configuration has been changed since it was last saved a dialog box will ask if you wish to save the old configuration before opening the new files Blanking the Current Configuration Selecting File New will prompt the user if s he wishes to blank the current configuration Answering Yes will return all channels in the system to Disabled clears all loggers and returns the system to the state it was in when first installed Answering No will leave the last configuration intact and allow the user to save under a new name Trace Save Histrory If trace save history is switched on a dialog box will appear requesting a comment each time a configuration change is saved This provides tracability in reviewing changes made to the Orchestrator configuration View History Selecting View History will display a text file showing comments made on each system configuration change The username date and time of the change are also recorded Version 4 0 0 47 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Using Orchestrator Client Running Orchestrator Client amp Selecting a Data Server To run O
60. channels to be exported the file to export to etc Import Export Dialog r Export Configuration Export Options 7 Header Came j Value Width E Value Precision 4 Delimiter COMMA v End Line CR LF ad Export File C configuation cs i Channel Range All Channels 1 1000 Channel The Import Export dialog allows the user to configure how channel configurations will be imported exported User settings are saved and are used as default settings the next time the dialog is invoked Version 4 0 0 56 Part Three Configuring Channels Header If Header is checked column headers will be exported with the configuration these headers make it easier to identify the contents of each column Value Width Results are stored in the Systems Log Files with full floating point precision The actual width of the number passed can be modified In the Value Width text box enter or edit the total number of digits including the decimal point required If the value when converted is greater than the width defined the value will be converted to Scientific notation Value Precision In this box enter the number of digits after the decimal point Delimiter Three options and a User Defined alternative are available in this drop down list The delimiter separates each field in a row The correct delimiter is required for the spreadsheet package to import the data correctly The choices are User Sp
61. chosen then a selection of channels can be chosen any of which will cause the trigger The same technique is employed to select Event Channel blocks as for the Logged Channel Blocks Version 4 0 0 303 Part Six Loggers 4 Configure LOGGER 1 MESVIS160 1 EE Ele View Contro Help DiE en General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced For Help press F1 Enabled No Errors The chosen Event Channels can be different from those channels selected for logging to disk When configuration of the Channels is complete accept the selections by clicking on the OK button at the bottom of the Window If the Cancel button is chosen any changes made to the configuration will be nullified Version 4 0 0 304 Part Six Loggers Log By Tag Setting Up The Log By Tab Option To Enable Logging by Tab you must add settings to the Windows Registry These settings can only be made on the Orchestrator Server and should not be made on a client machine You can do this as follows Click on the Start Menu go to Run type Regedit in the text box and click OK Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open rcu Cancel Jl Browse Look for HKEY LOCAL MACHINE E Registry Editor File Edit View Favorites Help 42 Computer 4 HKEY CLASSES ROOT d HKEY CURRENT USER i HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Jy HKEY USERS L H
62. corresponding files s he has No access to RW N A N A zzz User cannot read or write configuration nor can they monitor or set channel values for any of the channel types within the data source data source is completely hidden from the user N B The user rights for configuring channels within a data source must be less than or equal to the most important access right among the channel type files 456
63. details The Next and Previous buttons allow you to move backwards and forwards through the list of channel which are currently display on the Trend Delete a Line After a line has been added to an ORCHESTRATOR Trend Window it can be deleted at anytime If the Legend Box at the bottom of the Trend Window is visible select the line to delete within the Legend Box Then either choose Delete Line from the Edit menu or use the Delete Line toolbar button x If the Legend Box is not available at the bottom of the screen choose Delete Line from the Edit menu or the Delete Line button from the toolbar as above If a channel has not been selected for deleting a Select a Line to Delete dialog box will appear with a list of possible channels Select the channel to delete and choose the OK button Examining a Completed Trend Graph Once a Trend has been displayed in it s window it can be expanded and areas of particular interest examined in close detail Initially when lines are drawn on the Trend Window from a closed log file the Time base x axis will show all the scans of the selected channels from the log file The time base could be from 2 seconds to one year wide depending on the Logged data file This initial time base is called the TOP LEVEL time base for this Trend Window Using The Cursor To examine data at a single point in time ORCHESTRATOR Trends has incorporated a Cursor The cursor can be used to identify a particular point of inter
64. down list choose a suitable log period the options are as listed above In Cycle Mode the start time is used to define the alignment time This time would normally be configured as a time in the past that a selection will be aligned to A Stop Time should not normally be configured as the cycles will not continue past any configured time In Cycle Mode it is normal to select a Start Mode of APPEND This will allow the system to continue logging immediately if necessary after a system reboot If not set the log file will wait until the start of the next cycle to commence logging On Event If either Period Event or Event Loggers are selected an additional field in the Cycle Mode drop down list will be available Selecting On Event will cause a new log file to be created every time an event occurs Each file will therefore be active for the duration of an event This facility is useful where it is better to align log files to a process rather than a time For example in a batch process a log file can store data for a complete batch manufacturing cycle An Event will indicate the start of the process and remain until completed Version 4 0 0 300 Part Six Loggers The Channel Tab General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Channel Configuration To configure the channels to be included click on the Channels tab at the top of the Standard Logger Configuration Window The following dialog is displayed
65. during an event Check the Event Checking check box if this facility is needed High Limit A value in engineering units entered in this text box will define the level that if exceeded will cause an event trigger Low Limit A value entered in this text box will define the level that if the channel result falls below will cause an event trigger Scaling To enable the utility check the Scaling Check box The Slope and Offset values can be entered directly into the text boxes The formula applied is y mx c where m is Slope x is the measured value c is the Offset Auto Scale Click On the Auto Scale button if you want the scale and offset values calculated automatically In the dialog box enter the values in the text boxes The low measured value and the high measured value the output range of the transducer Note Scaling is only available for Analog Input and Counter Input channels Low and High Alarm Checking Alarm checking is available on all channels throughout the system Low Alarm and High Alarm levels can be configured independent of each other All the values entered are in engineering units If a channel reading exceeds the High Alarm limit then an alarm will be triggered as it will if the channel goes below the Low Alarm limit When monitoring channels if the high or low alarm is triggered then the fact will be annotated alongside any other channel information Enable Alarm Checking Check either the Lo
66. enabled the CYCLE MODE check box left unchecked and the Alarm Logging System is enabled and if START MODE is set to APPEND one continuous Alarm Log file will be created Each time the system is enabled then more alarm data will be added to the file The resulting log file could become very large and therefore more difficult and slower to retrieve information from If the STAHT MODE is set to CREATE then separate files will be created every time the system is enabled and closed when the system is disabled This again could result in large unmanageable alarm data files being created By using the CYCLE MODE option individual Alarm logged files would cover specific periods of time It will be easier when replaying the data to locate particular occurrences or to examine a file for a certain period of time The Alarm Logger can be set to log for specific periods that match the operation cycle of the plant being monitored Version Error Reference source not found 98 Part Four Configuring Processors An Alarm Logger could for example be set to start logging alarm data at 07 00 every Monday morning and continue until 18 00 on Friday not logging at the Weekend when the plant may be idle Alternatively the CYCLE MODE can be configured to record alarm data on 8 hour cycles to match production shift patterns After checking the CYCLE MODE check box the following fields are accessible Version Error Reference source not found 99 Part Fo
67. from that file and added to the graph To add a line from the Edit menu choose Add Line Alternatively from the toolbar choose the button The result will be an Add Line to Trend dialog box Version 4 0 0 386 Part Seven Replays Add Line To Trend eer Source c CALCULATED CHANNELS C7 Channel C7 0 1000 Zero to Thousand Counter Scale Options Control Limit Lines Value Type Minimum Limit Line Value Color Width Style NORMAL Maximum Uppercut 0 B V Axis On T umewal MEME Ie Aris Posion ONGRAFH cne NEN V Major Tick Marks Every i0 l Lowewa B V Minor Tick Marks Evey 5 I Line Color Line Width Line Style IW Plot Errors Line Track n Marker Type X ERE EN V Display in Valuebar Cancel Help When editing the dialog box detailed in the following sections has been completed choose the Add button The configured trace will appear on the Trend Graph and the information in the dialog box incremented to the next possible channel When all the required channels have been added to the trend choose the Done button If at a later time more traces are to be added return to the Add Line To Trend dialog box Source From the drop down list select the block of channels that contains the channel that is to be added to the graph If the User Defined option is chosen e
68. how labels are displayed on the time axis Click on the Absolute Time radio button to display the absolute time of the data this is the default selection Click on the Elapsed Time radio button to display the time elapsed since the start of the current time frame Skip Multiple Samples for each X Pixel On a time based trend each pixel in the X direction represents a time range If more than one log is available in the time range of a particular pixel this option can be used to display only the first sample for the time range If this option is switched off which is the default the minimum and maximum values for all samples for each X pixel time range are plotted Switching on this option can increase drawing speed on a large log If using a database log settting scan buffer size see below to 1 will significantly increase the retrieval time from large log files as the trend will only need to retrieve one scan per X pixel Channel Based Options These options are specific to Channel Based Trends X Channel If the Trend is channel based then an x channel should be specified This channel will become the x axis against which all other channels are plotted To nominate an x channel click on the Change button A dialog will be displayed which lists all channels configured for the Trend Select a channel and click on the OK button If there are no channels configured for the Trend then the dialog will not be displayed If an x channel is not
69. if averaging is being used These fields are blank for channels not yet enabled To configure a block of H channels point to them and the line will be highlighted then double click the mouse button A Configure History Channels dialog box will be shown Version Error Reference source not found 67 Part Four Configuring Processors Advanced History Configuration AutoEnable History Channels Before any History Channel can be incorporated into the overall Orchestrator System the Advanced History Channel Configuration bar must be selected and the AutoEnable History Channels box checked Now when the Orchestrator system is enabled from the Main Menu the History channels will automatically be enabled also AutoSave History Channels The history of a channel can be preserved across system disable and re enable sequences by selecting Auto Save The Auto Save rate is the rate at which saved history values are written to disk When the system is re enabled history values are restored from disk At least one history channel may be in error after system enable depending on the time to establish channel values r e Configure HISTORY CHANNELS MESVIS160 File Edit View Help i T NW Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration History Channels System Disabled No Errors For Help press F1 Saving the Configuration When a configuration has been completed it must be saved to retain any change
70. is complete it will Show you a message as below simply click OK to continue to the installtion of the ORCHESTRATOR client You can now connect your USB Hardware Key it will be automaticlly recognised and installed Version 4 0 0 15 Part One Installation Procedure Sentinel Protection System Installation Hardware key only If you are using a parallel hardware key the key should be plugged into the parallel port of the Orchestrator Server machine before continuing If you are using a USB key do not plug the key into the machine until the Sentinel Protection System installation phase has been completed see below Server and Client Keys are different The software will not operate if the wrong key is used Click Next to continue the Sentinel Protection System installation ie Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 The InstallShield R Wizard will install Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 on your computer To continue click Next Protection Installer Cancel Version 4 0 0 16 Part One Installation Procedure Click I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next JH Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully License Grant Warranty for Software This License describes limited rights granted by Safe
71. is the users domain which is automatically defaulted to the logged on users domain The following settings may be specified for each E Mail configured in the system Mail Settings Properties Mail Settings Email addresses emakSdomancom SS Mailing method Use MAPI Configure MAPI Resolve address es C Use SMTP Contig MTI Test configuration Email Addresses This field specifies the name or e mail from default system mailer address book to be used for sending information Email Addresses Will resolve addresses entered for users default mail client Note this is not necessary for users to perform as it will be done automatically Mailing Method Version Error Reference source not found 111 Part Four Configuring Processors Selecting MAPI or SMTP will allow you to configure alarm mail settings for these type of mail clients Configure MAPI m MAPI Configuration MAPI Settings Mail profile aida Mail password p m Log 0n s C Service account This Account username Password oem Domain MEASURESOFT Cancel This defaults all fields to the currently logged on users details You can set the configuration to use another users account but only if they have previously logged onto the local computer Configure SMTP r SMTP Configuration m Sender Name UserName Email Juser domain com Server Name IP Address ma
72. left and right extents of the slider These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Bar Start Stop If the Orientation property is set to horizontal then these properties determine the border sizes along the left and right sides of the slider as shown in the figure below If the Orientation property is set to vertical then they determine the border sizes along the top and bottom of the slider This creates space on the control for captions tics etc These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Bar Shape Defines the Shape of the Bar may be user defined Version 4 0 0 245 Part Five Monitors Knob There are also properties available to manipulate the knob s appearance Knob properties exist for scaling offset color shape and bitmap Properties MouseControl 2 Snap To Y Style None M width Color Inner Value 4 E Picture Outer Value 4 User Defined Color Determines the color of the control s knob Inner Outer Value Determines the inner and outer extents of the control s knob These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Picture Determines the graphic to be displayed as the knob Unlike knobs which are defined using the KnobStyle property a knob defined by a picture does not rotate Style Sets or returns the s
73. logger stops because a configured Stop Time is reached the logger must still be manually disabled to close the log file down Force No matter which mode a logger is operating in providing it is enabled Force will cause a one shot log to the log file of the configured channels Cycle Selecting Cycle from the control options will cause a logger to stop logging during the current time cycle but to commence logging at the start of the next cycle Version 4 0 0 342 Part Six Loggers Control via Configuration Window Individual loggers can be controlled from within their own Logger Configuration Window To Enable the logger click on the button To Disable the logger choose the button The intensity of the legend on the buttons will depend on the current status of the logger If the legend is dark then the option is available If lighter it is not available whilst the logger is in the current condition As an alternative to using the toolbar all the control options including Force and Cycle are available from the Control menu When a logger s configuration window is the active window the following fast keys can be used CTRL E Enable Logger CTRL D Disable Logger CTRL C Suspend Current Cycle CTRL F Version 4 0 0 343 Part Six Loggers Control via Orchestrator Window Control of all loggers can be performed from a single window invoked by choosing Logger Control from the Loggers menu in the Orchestrator Main Co
74. on a printer when a channel goes into alarm when it returns to a normal level and also record when the Alarm occurrence is acknowledged by the user from the Alarm Monitor Window In addition or instead an Alarm Logger can be configured to log this alarm information to disk System Error Processor For each Module in Orchestrator an internal channel called a system error channel is configured when the Orchestrator Service Starts These channels can be used to report any system errors that occur while the system is running Once configured System Error Channels have the prefix SE and can be monitored logged and replayed in the usual way Version Error Reference source not found 66 Part Four Configuring Processors History Channel Configuration Before they can be used the History channels must be configured To configure either double click on the History icon in the Orchestrator program group or choose History Channels from the Processor menu on the Orchestrator Menu bar 2 History Channels A History Channels Configuration Window will be displayed Voss e Configure HISTORY CHANNELS MES IBLOO File Edit View Help B Bos e v Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration History Chans t t 30 _ Source Channel For Help press Fl System Disabled No Errors Channel blocks that have been configured will have entries displayed describing the source channel time period and
75. on if you require header information to be imported No Header Lines Enter the number of header lines at the start of the ASCII file Note It is important to fill in the No Header Lines field even if you do not require header information to be imported It informs the application which line the data starts at Version 4 0 0 348 Part Six Loggers Line Information This information describes how each column of data is formatted in the ASCII file Delimiter Three options and a User Defined alternative are available in this drop down list The delimiter separates each field in a row The correct delimiter is required for the data to be interpreted correctly The choices are Comma Space Tab User As an alternative to the fixed choices a User option is available If this is chosen enter the delimiting character in the text box that appears alongside the list End Line Similar to the Delimiter there are choices for the end of line separator The choices are CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed CR LF User A User option is again an option Adding Columns You must add a column entry for every column of data you wish to import Click on the Add button to launch a dialog which allows you to enter this information For each column of data enter the following Column Number The column number in which the data appears in the ACSII file Tag Enter up to 16 characters of tag information Description E
76. orc files Data files include log files in the LOGGED DATA sub directory and export files created by the Data Export program The uninstall utility will not remove these files or the directories they are in Files created by running and using Orchestrator will be left on the system after the Uninstall utility has run The user can backup these data and configuration files before removing them and the rest of the Orchestrator directory structure ALL CONFIGURATION AND DATA DIRECTORIES MUST BE BACKED UP MANUALLY BEFORE THE Orchestrator DIRECTORY AND ALL SUBDIRECTORIES ARE DELETED These directories and files should be removed manually using Explorer if required The exact directory structure and files remaining after uninstall will depend on whether the machine had Orchestrator Server or Orchestrator Client software installed Version 4 0 0 28 Part One Installation Procedure Orchestrator Client Installation Hardware Requirements Orchestrator Client can be run on the following Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista 32 64 BIT Windows 7 32 64 BIT Client machines must be of a suitable specification to run the required operating system Hardware specification for Orchestrator Client machines under Windows are as follows Minimum Requirements x86 based microprocessor 486 66 or higher 128 Mb of RAM Windows 2000 Minimum 60 Mb free disk space for system files Further free space required for logged data 250 Mb Rec
77. place is included in a number Too Many Exponents More than one exponent is included in the number Invalid Channel Name The specified name is not a valid Orchestrator channel name Version Error Reference source not found 92 Part Four Configuring Processors Too Many Statements Too Many Statements The number of and contained in conditional expressions do not match or are in incorrect order Token Count Exceeded A maximum number of 26 tokens are allowed per formula expression Tokens include operands operators and functions Variable Stack Exceeded A maximum number of 10 operands are allowed per formula expression Bad Ihs Not a Channel The left hand side of an assignment expression is not a channel Invalid Argument Type The stimer etimer rtimer delta scount ecount and rcount functions expect a number in the range 1 to 1000 Invalid Number of Arguments Too few or too many arguments are passed to a function call Missing Arguments in a Function Call There are no arguments between comma separators in a function call Invalid Function Name The function called is not a Calculator function Comma Outside Function Call Comma can only be used to separate arguments in a function call Unrecognised Operator The operator specified is not a valid calculator operator Version Error Reference source not found 93 Part Four Configuring Processors Alarm System Configuration To c
78. properly configured selecting the OK button will result in a hard copy of the selected Monitor pages being produced Exiting the Channel Monitor Application To close the Channel Monitor Application either click the X button on the Application Window title bar or choose Exit from the File menu If there are any non saved Channel Monitor Windows in your workspace or if you have made any alterations to a Channel Monitor Window you will be issued with save requests for them The layout of the Channel Monitor Main Windows will be maintained and when launched again will revert to the last configuration Version 4 0 0 132 Part Five Monitors Toggle Gridlines An option provided by the Channel Monitor Application is to toggle whether the Channel Monitor Window displays the data in grid form To place the data of the Channel Monitor Window into grid form simply select Gridlines On from the View menu To de select the gridlines select Gridlines Off from the View menu An alternative way to do this is to select the Gridlines Toggle icon from the toolbar H Clicking on the icon once toggles from Gridlines On Off and vice versa ug DB S amp A E gt OH Trd ES A01 Random1 Random 0 1 0 61 ES 40002 Random5 Random 0 5 2 68 Wd Random10 Random 0 10 Ed 410004 Randomi00 Random 0 100 60 57 ES 10005 Random1000 Random 0 1000 577 32 ES aos DISABLED E93 ainnnz NIQARI FN Modifying Channel Values Any Orchestrator Output Channel di
79. reach the bottom of the licence dialog the I Agree button will become active If you have fully read and agree with the end user licence agreement EULA click the I Agree button to continue with the installation If you do not agree with the EULA click the I Disagree button to terminate the installation If you are not using a standard Orchestrator hardware key and are installing Orchestrator for the first time the following dialog is displayed Version 4 0 0 20 Part One Installation Procedure n appropriate key has not been located on this system Please contact your distributor for an Unlock Key specifying Product Code and Lock Code provided below Distributor Details SEES Eee SCIENS Distributor Phone 44 0 1635 576800 Distributor Link mailto support measys com Product Code JORCHESTRATOR V4 0 0 SERVERSW m Lock Method DiskID NIC Adapter Address Hardware Key Serial Number Lock Code ngscB 4AA Unlock Key o Sl If the computer has an internet connection click Get from Web to receive the unlock code via the web The following dialog will appear Email Address To Receive Unlock Code Use Proxy Server Proxy Server Port Version 4 0 0 21 Part One Installation Procedure Enter an email address to receive the unlock code to the unlock code will appear in the key required dialog within a few seconds The email sent to the ema
80. single event counters If a counter is halted with the ecount n function then the counter value is retained and starts from that value when restarted with the scount n function NB When using the counters be aware that the counts increment every time the calculator channel evaluates the expression containing the scount n start counter function See later examples delta n Reports the time in seconds since the last call to this delta timer There are up to 1000 delta timers available The value of each timer is reported in seconds and is accurate to 1 100 of a second Delta timers are used to report the time since they were last called Control Pulse Functions Version Error Reference source not found 83 Part Four Configuring Processors The following functions all provide a pulse output Normally the return value of the function is zero FALSE but at the appropriate time the return value becomes 1 TRUE The duration of the pulse will last one scan sufficient time for all calculations that are dependent on the pulse to be evaluated once These pulses can therefore be used to specify when calculations occur see later examples pulse h m s dpulse h m s r cpulse x ppulse x npulse x Statistical Functions min x y max x y limit x y ulimit x y least x r range x r rate x integral x r v filter x y mean x r stdev x r Provides a pulse at time h hours
81. single time period or as multiple time periods If a single time period is choosen select the start and stop information as below One set of data will then be exported Multiple time periods allow mulitiple sets of data for export with different time periods channels and data intervals Time periods are identified and set in the logged data using trends Start Time If this box is not checked the data will be converted from the first scan of the file If a different start time is needed check this box Edit the resulting date and time boxes to the start time needed v Start Time 04 08 2009 wv 14 50 49 Stop Time If this box is not checked the data will be converted up to the last scan of the file If a different stop time is needed check this box Edit the resulting date and time boxes to the stop time needed v Stop Time 04 08 2009 Ev 14 50 59 lt Text Header There are three options available for export of Text Header information None User Defined and Logged Header Text If Logged Hearder Text is selected information from the Logger Header Text will be included for export This information is stored with the log and is specified in the Header of the Text section for that log If User Defined is selected the edit region will allow manually entry of text for inclusion in the export If None is selected no Header information is included for export Replay Channels Single Time Period Only Either all channels in th
82. specified explicitly then by default the first channel line configured in the Trend will be used as the x channel If the channel does not exist in a log file associated with the trend then the first channel to exist in both the log file and the Trend will be used Advanced Options Scan Buffer Size The scan buffer size determines how many log file scans are held in memory at any one time This buffer affects data retrieval performance Version 4 0 0 382 Part Seven Replays No Logged Text Chars This field indicates the maximum number of logged text characters that will be displayed for a scan in the logged text area If there are more characters in the text log than have been specified then the text will be clipped No Header Text Lines Determines how many header lines of text will be visible without scrolling No Visible Legend Lines The default number of legend lines which will be shown at the particular time is four This number may be changed according to your needs Header Logo Left Click Browse to select a valid image file to use as the left hand logo Header Logo Right Click Browse to select a valid image file to use as the right hand logo Embedded When Embedded is check the logo files are saved within the Trends document if Embedded is not check the Trends document links to the external image files In this scenario if the image files are moved or deleted the logo s will not appear Value Bar Options Page If
83. system clock has the same time hour minute and second as that in the parameter list In the above examples Channel C33 will hold the greatest value that channel DS1 attains As 06 00 every day the greatest value will be reset Hence producing the greatest value of a channel on a daily basis It is only necessary to enter the first Four characters of a function name However it is recommended that if space allows the full name is used for readability and clarity Version Error Reference source not found 81 Part Four Function calls can be grouped into 8 categories Logical Functions Mathematical Functions Counting and timing functions Control pulse functions Statistical functions Steam Table Functions Channel Status Functions Component Control Functions Configuring Processors In addition to these functions String handling functionality has also been implemented this will be explained latter Logical Functions These groups of functions perform bitwise operations on their arguments Arguments are rounded to the nearest integer before being passed to the function Arguments x and y can be Orchestrator channels actual values or calculator variables and x y bitwise AND of x y or x y bitwise OR of x y xor x y bitwise exclusive or XOR of x y not x bitwise compliment of x nand x y bitwise not and NAND of x y nor x y bitwise not or NOR of x y xnor x y bitwise nor exclusive or XNOR of x y
84. the Processors menu in the Main Application Menu Set up a calculator as follows with the following Formula Ctime floor ctime 10 10 Right Click on the Gauge and select Data source Properties and for the channel source select the channel you just calculator configured Set the Monitor to Value Entry Mode and Enable the System The Gauge will now reflect the value of the calculator channel Version 4 0 0 199 Part Five Control Knobs High DB 20 5 10 10 Mid DB 2 9 2 mas Gain Description 10 Mid DB Monitors 10 0 High DE 2 0 2 EN 10 Mid DE 258 Gain The Knob control is a highly customizable knob or dial control Its dynamic property pages provide a powerful tool for interactively designing knobs or dials with full control of styles scales tics annulars captions border and background With its data aware and mouse input features Knob is a simple and intuitive input to technical interfaces Version 4 0 0 200 Part Five Monitors Knobs There are several styles of knobs Properties are provided to modify the knob s style inner outer radii width and color Additionally user defined knob shapes may be specified Properties EEE Library Background Annulars Captions Digta Fonts Mak Scale Tis Gms KnobColor KnobPicture KnobMultiT urn KnobSnap I KnobMultiT um alue 5 KnobSnaplncrement 1 KnobVaue D Knob
85. the Trend cursor is on the value boxes will show the values of the channels at the time position of the cursor If the cursor is off and the logger is still adding scans to the log file the value boxes will show the actual values of the channels at the last recorded Value Bar On De selecting this option will turn off the Value boxes normally displayed above the graph Date Format Select one of the following formats to represent dates in the Trend Short Date Format Displays dates in their short format as defined in the Regional Settings applet of Control Panel Long Date Format Displays dates in their long format as defined in the Regional Settings applet of Control Panel Values Display Value Width amp Value Precision These text boxes refer to the width and precision of the analogue channel values that appear in the Value Boxes In the Width text box enter the total number of digits including the decimal point In the Precision box enter the number of places required after the decimal point If a width is chosen too small for any value the result will be shown in scientific notation Version 4 0 0 383 Part Seven Replays Display Options Identifier Shows the channel identifier Prefix and Channel Number in the value bar Tag Shows the channel tag in the value bar Description Shows the channel description in the value bar Units Shows the units for the channel value in the value bar Grid Options Page Grid Opti
86. the directory but for example purposes use this one Step 1 1 Launch the Channel Monitor Application 2 Create a Channel Monitor Document and connect to a source such as User Analogs 3 Save the document with a suitable name i e useralalogs mcm to the WEB SERVERWMSActiveDocuments directory Step 2 1 Run Microsoft FrontPage 98 2 Cancel the GettingStarted Dialog that you are prompted with 3 From the Menu select Tools Show FrontPage Editor 4 You are now presented with the FrontPage Editor Step 3 You should note that you can edit the blank page in two modes Normal or HTML see the tabs positioned on the bottom left hand side of the application Preview allows you to preview the work you have done so far To enter in a link to the Channel Monitor Document you created in Step 1 do the following 1 Enter a suitable name for the Link you are about to make to the Channel Monitor File i e UserAnalog Channels for example 2 Once you have entered a suitable name for the link highlight the entire link the text you have just entered 3 While the text is highlighted from the Toolbar select the Create or Edit Hyperlink icon Version 4 0 0 144 Part Five Monitors You are then presented with the Edit HyperLink Dialog allowing you to enter the URL to jump to when you click on the link i e ub m4 Sa m Optional 4 Enter your domain address i e http www yourcompan
87. the user name and password of the account in which the OPC server process should run e Click the Apply button e Click the OK button Windows XP Service Pack 2 Firewall Configuration By default your Firewall is turned on and this setting recommended to give the machine the highest possible protection It may be appropriate to turn of the Firewall completely if the machine is sufficiently protected behind a corporate Firewall The steps below describe configuration changes required to allow Remote OPC Communication when the Firewall is turned on Version 4 0 0 439 Part Ten Data Exchange Click Start Settings and Control Panel Open the Security Centre Applet Click the Firewall option Click the Exceptions Tab Click Add Program and add Data Exchange from the list of applications Click the Browse button and navigate to C Orchestrator Bin and add MS OPCSvr exe If you wish to use any 3 Party OPC Servers or Clients you must specify their executable exe file names here also e Click the Add Port button Port 135 is needed to initiate DCOM Communications and allow for incoming echo requests Enter the following Details Name DCOM Port Number 135 Choose the TCP Radio Button e Click Ok and Restart the Computer Client Machine The client machine will not normally already have the Orchestrator OPC Server registered If this is the case it must be registered before following the instructions below This can normally be done e
88. this channel These are Read at startup and Read if no change Readatstart up On the first pass of the processor the value will be read into the RTE gt Read if no change If there is no data to be written then the value will be read into the RTE Type Data is available from two source types OPC server and DDE server OPC These following fields are used to configure the OPC Data Item that the channel will be linked to Node Enter the name of the machine where the desired OPC Data Access Server resides Alternatively click on the Node button to select the machine name from a list of machines found on the network Server Enter the name of the OPC Data Access Server you wish to retrieve data from Alternatively click on the Server button to select the server from a list of servers found on the desired machine Read Quality When read quality is check the channel with return the OPC Read Quality This is useful when it is necessary to monitor the quality of OPC data over remote links F Select an OPC Data Access Server OPC Data Access Servers PRODUCT NAME OPCServer NAME OPCServer Cancel Node Name lv OPC 1 04 MESVIS150 m 7 0PC20 Item Enter the name of the individual Data Item on the OPC Data Access Server you wish to retrieve data from Alternatively click on the Item button to select the item from a list of Version 4 0 0 430 Part Ten Data Exchange items found on the desir
89. to set permissions you must be familiar with the location of certain files and sub directories within the Orchestrator system The following section tells you how to locate the files Configuration Subdirectories Data sources fall under the categories of Devices and Processors Each of the data sources and loggers in the Orchestrator system has a corresponding configuration program which is run from the Devices Processors or Loggers menu in Orchestrator Main Menu Each data source has a corresponding file called config where the data source s configuration is permanently stored Loggers also store their configuration on disk These configuration files are located in the Orchestrator CURRENT_CONFIG directory under the data source s configuration sub directory or in the case of loggers in the LOGGERS sub directory The data source configuration sub directory is named as follows Configuration Sub directory Devices The configuration sub directory for devices is named using the device name followed by an underscore followed by the device number This information can be found in the devcap txt file located in the Orchestrator CURRENT_CONFIG directory Each device in the Orchestrator system has a single line entry in the devcap txt file which has the following format device name device number print name an ip dig ip an op dig op cntr ip The first two fields are the ones we re interested in The name you see in the Or
90. user to define how the DDE server will start up when Orchestrator service is first invoked On pressing the Start up button the Orchestrator DDE start up dialog box is displayed PRODUCT NAME DDE Startup F Automatic Cancel Iv Manual Help Priority Highest Above Normal v Normal M Idle Version 4 0 0 409 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Automatic When the Automatic check box is checked the DDE server will be enabled automatically when the Orchestrator service is started Manual When Manual is checked the DDE server will only commence once the Start Button on the previous dialog box is pressed Priority Select the appropriate check box for the system priority of the DDE links The higher the priority the faster the link will be updated in the destination application but this may be at the expense of system speed in other applications and services Using DDE to Link to other Applications To specify a DDE link on another application to an Orchestrator DDE source an Application Name Topic and Item must be specified All Orchestrator DDE links have the application name Orchdde If the topic is Channel then the Item is an Orchestrator channel e g C1 The value of the Orchestrator channel will then be linked to the destination application If the topic is defined as Logger then the Item is a logger name The enabled status of the logger 1 for enabled O for disabled will be the inf
91. which background and foreground colors to use with each individual Channel monitor window The default colors the system operates on whatever system colors you have on your operating system The colors uses can be changed via clicking on the Color Combo boxes provided which in turn provides you with a separate small color picking dialog box providing the user with 40 alternate colors to choose from To pick one of these colors the user clicks on the color and is returned immediately to the Color Setup Dialog Box Edit Monitor Properties lt m a m s DataSource Selection Columns Setup Color Setup Intemet Server m Settings Select the Background and Foreground Colors of the Tabular View i Background Color DataSource i MESVIS160 CALCULATED CHANNELS I Foreground Color ae OK Cancel Help Alternatively if the user is not satisfied with the colors provided by the small color picking dialog box clicking on Custom will provide another more advanced color picking dialog box s r Color Basic colors NI SN NINEI IS BH SUNSZENN E oe EE Bee eee ee i Custom colors EH uU UD ON DE OD b Wo mm mm m M M 4 Hue 160 Red 0 Sat 0 Green 0 ___Define Custom Colors gt gt ColoriSolid lum 0 Bue o Eam EN NN From this advanced Color Picking dialog box the user can 1 Choose from 48 different colors 2 Via the color palette provided on the
92. you wish the logged information to be exported too There are two ways of doing this Click the Select Export File button Before completing this dialog box one must know the type of file acceptable to the spreadsheet or other software package that is to accept this file Version 4 0 0 314 Part Six Loggers r 4 Select Data Export Output File Save in TEMP e e Ed i Name Date modif Type Size a YT Places d Client d Datascan 7000 Ww 4 DISKO J DISK File name data d Y Save as type Data Interchange Format DIF Cancel Help File Name Enter the filename of the resulting exported file The extension used should be of the correct type Yon can be used to substitute the log file name Note n is not supported when logging to Databases The export file name can include channel values See Including Channel Values below Save in Using normal Windows techniques choose the directory where the exported file is to be placed Save File as Type This field defines the ultimate format of the file The correct type of file must be selected so the software package that is to import this file can do so correctly The choices are Spreadsheet Files PRN Text Files TXT Data Interchange Format DIF Excel Spreadsheet XLS Other Files Version 4 0 0 315 Part Six Loggers Network Exported files can be stored anywhere the service has access to on a Network
93. 0 0 120 Part Five Monitors Monitor Last If the Monitor Last option is taken the persistent details from the last session of running the configurable monitor will be opened i e the last workspace The persistent details are in relation to window layouts monitors opened toolbar layouts etc Configure If the configure option is taken the user is presented with the Edit New Monitor Properties Property Page to generate a new monitor Another option to launch the Channel Monitor Application is via the command prompt This feature allows the user to specify the Server to connect to and whether to display the Channel Monitor in Full Screen Mode The command line parameters to pass are To indicate Server name gt U S lt ServerName gt To indicate file name gt FileName For full screen mode gt F Note The brackets used in this example are not used when passing command line arguments and the inverted commas are optional Examples 1 This specifies a Server Name mon_nt exe S ServerName or mon nt exe S ServerName 2 This opens the file normally mon nt exe c XOrchestrator monitors monitor1 mcm or mon_nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 mcm 3 This starts the application with the New Monitor Properties Property Page but once the user selects OK the monitor will be in full screen mode mon nt exe S ServerName F Or mon nt exe S ServerName F 4 This opens the f
94. 0 211 Part Five Monitors Bands Determines the number of bands displayed on the control This property must be set before all other band properties The BandlD property is used to select the band to which band properties apply BandScalelD Determines the scale on which the band currently selected by BandID is based The BandStart and BandStop properties must fall within the range defined by ScaleMax and ScaleMin BandShape Determines the shape of a user defined band This property only applies when BandStyle is set to User Defined and defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the upper left corner of the control BandStart BandStop Determines the start and stop values for the band currently selected by BandID These values are numbers between ScaleMin and ScaleMax for the scale referenced by BandScalelD BandStyle Determines the style of the band currently selected by BanalD Bevellnner BevelOuter Determines the inner or outer shadow styles of the control BevelWidth Determines the shadow sizes of the inner and outer bevels of the control BorderWidth Determines the border size between the inner and outer bevels of the control Captions The gauge can be embellished with multiple captions to indicate the type of measurement being displayed units used or any other informative or decorative labelling Version
95. 2 MESVIS160 c s File View Control Help Dia Sr x SAMPLES Lagged Trigger Channel BATCH TARGET Rewind VALUE 25 For Help press F1 Disabled No Errors Trigger Channel This is the channel which is used to trigger a log of non lagged data if it changes by the rate of change Change This is rate of change specified either by a value of the current value of a channel Lagged Trigger Channel This is the channel which is used to trigger a log of lagged data if it changes by the rate of change Version 4 0 0 308 Part Six Loggers The Text Tab General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Logger Text Configuration Text logging allows the user to add text labels at certain points of a log file Predefined messages can be inserted at any point in the log or custom messages can be added Header text can also be inserted to give context to the data in the log file While a logger is running or on historical log data Orchestrator Trend Replays can be used to insert text items at certain time frame reference points in the log file For details see part Seven of this manual To configure text logging click on the Configure Text button in the main logger window Use the Logger Text Configuration dialog to configure text logging r 4 Configure LOGGER 1 MESVIS160 s Se File View Control Help DH amp nu TN General
96. 4 0 0 212 Part Five Monitors r Properties Pointers Scales GMS library Background Bands i Digtal Forts Captions Ex D ei a CaptionlD E 0 aptionLolor Fon H fo Position gt 0 00 Y Position a gt 0 00 Caption Cancel Apply Caption Determines the text displayed on the control for the caption currently selected by CaptionID The number of captions displayed is set by the Captions property CaptionColor Determines the text color for the caption currently selected by CaptionID FontID Determines which font is used for the caption currently selected by CaptionID CaptionID When multiple captions exist CaptionID is used to index the caption to which the other caption properties apply The total number of captions is determined by the Captions property and CaptionID has valid values from 0 to Captions 1 Captions Determines the number of captions displayed on the control This property must be set before all other caption properties The CaptionID property is used to select the caption to which caption properties apply Version 4 0 0 213 Part Five Monitors X Position Y Position Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the caption currently selected by the CaptionID property These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located at the upper left corner of the control
97. 5e 6 Engineering Constants A set of predefined constants are provided pi 3 14159 PI me 9 10953e 31 Electron Rest mass kg u0 1 25664e 06 Permeability of free space H m na 6 02205e 23 Avagadros number mol vm 0 0224138 Molar Volume mol e0 8 85419e 12 Epsilon zero F m C 2 99792e 08 Speed of Light in free space ms h 6 62618e 34 Planck s constant JS ge 6 672e 11 Gravitational constant Nm kg g 9 80665 Acceleration due to gravity ms ec 1 60219e 19 Unitary charge Coulombs u 1 66057e 27 Unit of atomic mass kg k 1 38066e 23 Boltzmans constant J K r 8 31441 Gas constant J mol K Example DS3 pi Channels Any channel in the Orchestrator system can be specified as an operand in an expression Calculator channels may also be specified Channels can reference tags eg DS1 or as an array eg D1 0 Tags can also be user to access arrays eg If DS1 DS16 stores a temperature profile and P1 is the current index then DS P1 1 will access the profile array NB Calculations are evaluated in Channel number order The result of any Calculator channel can be used in subsequent calculator channel formula but NOT in preceding channels Calculator Variables There are up to 1000 local variables available for use within the Calculator These variables have the prefix V and within the Calculator package look like normal Orchestrator channels They cannot be seen by the rest of the Orchestrator System and have no ch
98. 7 Part Ten Data Exchange Engineering Units Minimum Minimum engineering value for all analog channels in addition to the unit field The default is 0 Maximum Maximum engineering value for all analog channels in addition to the unit field The default is 100 Descriptor A 10 character field available to describe the units of the measurement Significant Change To enable check the Significant Change check box This facility allows filtering of data on channels on which significant change is of interest Such changes can cause an event which can be logged The figure entered in the Value text box is the rate of change in engineering units which if the measured channel exceeds per scan either increasing or decreasing will cause the significant change event trigger Event Checking Event checking is used if required to trigger a logger to record information on an event Check the Event Checking check box if this facility is needed High Limit A value entered in this text box will define the level that if exceeded by the channel result will cause an event trigger Low Limit A value entered in this text box will define the level that if the channel result falls below will cause an event trigger Alarm Error Checking Drive Common A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Ala
99. 93 RH 200 204 J jj ii J I lji i T Logger Header Sheet Channels Header Sheet 4 Data Logs Worksheet 4 Column Headers V Header Tags V Header Units V Date Time Column Time Base ABSOLUTE Y V Date LongDate Format MS Col SKIP TIME FREQUENCY M 300 Seconds C Statistics Destination File C PRODUCT NAMENEXPORTED DATANesported data XLS Select Destination File Delimiter COMMA v 4 Template Final Report xls Value Precision 2 F Multiple files for Excel col limit V Open Destination SS The complete log does not have to be exported A time portion can be chosen as well as selected channels Descriptive information about the channels can be omitted if required The resolution of the results can be modified as can the format of the data The following details the configuration of each section Configuration Files Select from the drop down list a predefined Configuration file which contains settings to be applied to the current log Configuration Files can be edited and are saved automatically on generation of the export or by clicking exit Click new to create a new configuration file delete to delete one rename to edit the name of the configuration file or copy to copy the settings to a new file Version 4 0 0 358 Part Seven Replays Single Time Period Multiple Time Period Choose from the drop down whether the source log file will be exported as a
100. ATA Ji LOGGER 1 Jj MONITORS _ REPLAY OPTIONS 4 SAVED CONFIG dJ SAVED VALUES Version 4 0 0 a mai 376 Replays Part Seven Replays Enter Text Logs This utility is used to add edit text logs to a log The user is prompted to select a log file When the log file is selected the following menu is displayed Fr ff ENTER TEXT LOGS MH NX Log C PRODUCT NAMESLOGGED DATANLOGGER 13031015 120423 091015 122538 odl Select Log File Select Database Log Logged Text Date Time Message 09 10 15 12 11 38 OPEN VALVE 09 10 15 12 15 38 CLOSE VALVE 03 10 15 12 25 38 OPEN VALVE 09 1 0 15 12 25 40 Manual Message Inserted 09 10 15 12 25 41 CLOSE VALVE 09 10 15 12 25 42 CLOSE VALVE Add Edt Delete Find Es Logged Text The list of messages entered for the log This list is presented in chronological order Predefined Messages from the logger or new manually entered text logs can be entered by clicking the Add button below the Logged Text menu To locate an event click the Find button and enter a date and time within the job start and stop times Version 4 0 0 377 Part Seven Replays ORCHESTRATOR Trend Replays The most useful method of analysing recorded data is to view it graphically The Engineering Trends Replay facility of the ORCHESTRATOR system allows detailed analysis of data recorded by any ORCHESTRATOR logger The utility allows
101. Add button to launch a dialog which allows you to enter this information For each column of data enter the following Column Number The column number in which the data appears in the ACSII file Tag Enter up to 16 characters of tag information Description Enter up to 32 characters of description information Units Enter up to 4 characters of units information A column may be imported more than once at a time For performance it is recommended that columns be imported sequentially When done click on the OK button The entry will be added to the list Click on the Import button to continue configuration A dialog will be launched which asks for further import details The following information is required Version 4 0 0 370 Part Seven Replays Time In Column Click this check box on if the scan time is contained in a column in the ASCII file Column Number Enter the column number of the scan time if it is contained in a column in the ASCII file Time Type If the scan time is contained in a column in the ASCII file select the type of time this column contains Differential or Elapsed Time Interval Per Scan If the scan time is not contained in a column in the ASCII file enter the number of seconds between each scan Start Time Enter the start time for the new log file Click on the Current Time button to set the Start Time to the current time Logger Directory Enter the directory where the output log file should be create
102. COM Config OffProvl0 9 LJ e z9xosiBES n1 ES OlnfoP11 Outlook PenIMC2 b C3 Running Processe Office Finder b Di Distributed Trans gt fd Event Viewer Local 3 Sh Services Local PhotoAcq PLA Profile Notificati RCM RegisterCo Scan sdchange 4 m D Set User SetupLogS ca 2 X amp x OpcEnum OutOfProc Outlook DCOM Config a Mapi Han Message More Actions gt PerfCenter PhoneCont PhotoAcq Enabler Class PNPXAssoc PrintBrmEn PrintFilterP RASDLGLUA RAServer RASGCWLUA RemotePro rshx32 dll rundll32 exe Class sdclt SDRSVC ServiceLayer service ShapeColle Share SharedAcc The OPC Server must be configured to Run As a particular user follow the steps below Expand the DCOM Config group as shown above and find the Orchestrator OPC Server object Right click on the object and select properties Version 4 0 0 438 Part Ten Data Exchange PRODUCT NAME OPC Server Properties wile General Location Secunty Endpoints Identity Which user account do you want to use to run this application The interactive user The launching user measuresoft aidan mallon Browse Password 0999990090909099 Confirm password eeeceeeeeceocsce Leam more about setting these properties mm e Select the Identity tab e Select the This user radio button e Enter
103. Configuration module is used to create the data log file odl which is used as input for the Trends module The Standard Logger allows you to log up to 64 channels or channel ranges A channel range has a start and an end prefix which will be displayed on the Logged Channels range buttons However the Log By Tag facility allows for the user to log channel ranges by tags instead of prefixes The rules for this as described below Rules For Logging By Tab Version 4 0 0 389 Part Seven Replays As the system is logging data by tag details for setting up the Log By Tab Option are detailed in Part Six of the User Manual the user is free to alter the value of the prefix associated with the tag i e if a logged channel has a tag called Temperature and a prefix P10 logging will still work if you change the prefix to another prefix number as tag will refer to the prefix number The start and end tag will be displayed on the block button if the size of the tags do not exceed the button extent Otherwise the channel range will be displayed If there is only one channel on the range the tag will be displayed if it does not exceed the button extent When the logger is enabled the channels from the start to the end tag will be logged Logged Channels Channels Avg Channels Avg Channels Avg Channels Avg Vsec Pulse I oi E en
104. Direction is set to forward clockwise then ScaleMinValue is located at ScaleStartAngle and ScaleMaxValue is located at ScaleStopAngle The converse is true if ScaleDirection is set to backward counter clockwise Version 4 0 0 194 Part Five Monitors ScaleOriginX ScaleOriginY Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the center of the scale currently selected by ScalelD These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located in the center of the control Scales Determines the number of scales used to define the control This property must be set before all other scale properties The ScalelD property is used to select the scale to which scale properties apply ScaleStartAngle ScaleStopAngle Determines the angular extents of the scale currently selected by ScalelD When ScaleDirection is set to forward the ScaleStartAngle corresponds to ScaleMinValue and when ScaleDirection is set to backward the ScaleStartAngle corresponds to ScaleMaxValue The ScaleStopAngle property behaves in a similar fashion Tics Tics are used to mark intervals on the gauge s face Properties are used to set the tic s style start stop values interval inner outer radii width color label positions and associated scale m Properties Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts Fames Hubs Needles Scales f lis E GMS
105. ENDROOT environment variable PIC ENV PIC ENV is the environment variable name of the configuration directory for the replay option For example the ORC TRENDS environment variable defines the name of the Trends configuration directory ROOTLOG ROOTLOG is the environment variable name of logger file directory for the log file to be replayed for example the ROOTLOG environment variable for Trends is defined by the TRENDLOG environment variable MRF MRF is the environment variable which tells Trends whether to use the Most Recent File option or not If it is set then when Trends is run it takes the most recent file from the ROOTLOG directory instead of prompting the user for a log file A typical environment variable name for MRF would be TRENDMF Monitors Environment Variables The entries in the MONCAP TXT file require some environment variables as follows Version 4 0 0 444 Appendix A Environment Variables ROOT ROOT is the environment variable defining an automatically selected monitor for example the root picture for Configurable Monitor is defined by the MONROOT environment variable PIC ENV PIC ENV is the environment variable name of the configuration directory for the monitor option For example the ORC CMONITORS environment variable defines the name of the Configurable Monitor configuration directory Version 4 0 0 445 Appendix B Security Appendix B Security Appendix B details Orchestrator S
106. HE TEXT TAB THE EXPORT TAB CONFIGURING DATA FOR EXPORT EXPORTING DATA SELECTING DATA EXPORT FILE SELECTING DATA EXPORT FILE CREATION OPTIONS RUN COMMAND EMAIL LOG FILES THE ADVANCED TAB LOG FILES SYNCHRONOUS DEVICE SCANNING INCLUDING CHANNEL VALUES RELOADING LOGGER CONFIGURATION SAVING LOGGER CONFIGURATION LOGGER CONTROL LOG FILES DATABASE LOGS DATA IMPORT PROGRAM ARGUMENTS EDITING CHANNEL PROPERTIES PART SEVEN REPLAY OPTIONS DATA EXPORT CONFIGURING DATA FOR EXPORT EXPORTING DATA EXPORTING TO MICROSOFT EXCEL EXPORTING TO Lorus 1 2 3 DATA IMPORT LOG FILE SYNCHRONIZATION LOG FILE MERGE UTILITY ENTER TEXT LOGS ORCHESTRATOR TREND REPLAYS LAUNCHING TRENDS TRENDS WINDOW QUICK START TO TRENDS CONFIGURING A TREND Loc Bv TAG EXAMINING A COMPLETED TREND GRAPH THE LOGGER WIZARD DATA EXPORT PRINTING A TREND SAVING A TREND CONFIGURATION RETRIEVING A TREND CONFIGURATION 286 286 287 290 293 294 296 301 303 308 309 310 311 314 314 317 317 318 322 336 336 337 342 342 342 345 347 348 351 352 353 354 358 367 368 368 369 373 375 377 378 378 379 379 380 389 391 397 397 398 401 403 CREATING NEW TREND WINDOWS COPYING TRACES NAVIGATING TREND WINDOWS PART EIGHT EXCEL RTD amp DDE EXCEL REAL TIME DATA ExcEL RTD ACROSS NETWORKS ExcEL RTD THROTTLE INTERVAL DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE STARTING AND STOPPING DDE USING DDE TO LINK TO OTHER APPLICATIONS DDE
107. ITOR gt Monitor Selection Monitor Last The user is then presented with the options to either Monitor Selection run an existing monitor configuration Monitor Last revert to the last saved workspace or Configure generate a new configuration or modify an existing configuration Monitor Selection If the monitor selection option is taken the user is presented with a standard Windows file selection menu the required configuration file should be highlighted and the OK button clicked The monitor will then be displayed in monitor locked value entry mode preventing configurations changes Version 4 0 0 171 Part Five Monitors Window Help v Configure Mode Value Entry Mode Lock Monitor Ctrl L Grid Settings Ctrl G Stop Updating Default Visual Properties s Channel Wizard Ctrl W Select Server Communications Internet Server Changes to configuration can be made from within monitor mode if required by selecting the monitor option and clicking the configure mode and lock monitor fields This operation should be reversed when configuration changes are complete Monitor Last If the Monitor Last option is taken the persistent details from the last session of running the configurable monitor will be opened i e the last workspace The persistent details are in relation to window layouts monitors opened toolbar layouts etc Configure If the c
108. In the Save in field a list of other drives on the network available to the user will appear The Network Neighbourhood icon in the Save in field allows the user to connect to a remote drive This facility would be used to make a connection over a modem link to another system using the Remote Access features of Windows If you are sure of the directory path and file name required for the data export file you can type it in manually into the text box on the left of the Select Export File button File Settings c results test results dif Select Export File Split into separate files for Excel column limit Create new file always Append to old files C Overwrite old files DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SELECT A NETWORK DRIVE USE UNC FORMAT lt server gt lt share gt INSTEAD Note that when configuring from a client the directory is the name as it applies from the server e g the C drive is the C drive on the server and not the C drive on the client The Orchestrator service must have access to the file path This can be achieved by specifying the Orchestrator service to log on as a user in the Services applet in the Control Panel The n File Name Specifier Above you saw how to enter in the name of the data export output file However there is another option available Instead of specifying a filename like data dif you could name the file Yon dif When the output file is being created the logger will alread
109. KEY CURRENT CONFIG Expand this branch go to SOFTWARE expand it and then find the Measuresoft key and expand it Version 4 0 0 305 Part Six Loggers a J HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Jj COMPONENTS Jp HARDWARE Ji SAM SECURITY a J SOFTWARE J Adobe a ATI Technologies Jj CDDB Classes J Clients Crystal Decisions d Global Majic Software Inc Jo Hewlett Packard Intel J Macromedia a Measuresoft d DataExchange d Datascan 7000 Driver 4 NT PRODUCT NAME Inside the Orchestrator key you will see the current Orchestrator registry settings You should not modify any of these settings To enter in the setting for Logging by tag go to the Edit menu select New followed by String Value Edit View Favorites Help New gt Key Permissions String Value Delete Del Binary Value Rank DWORD 32 bit Value QWORD 64 bit Value Ep Multi String Value Find Ctrl F Expandable String Value You will notice that on the right of the Registry Editor a key called New Value 1 has appeared Change this value to LogByTag Once you have changed it right click on the LogByTag value and select Modify from the popup menu In the value data field enter the word ON and click OK If the values you have entered do not correspond to the illustration below then you must re enter the values 8S LockMode REG DWORD 0x00000 ab Root REG SZ CAPROI ab ServerSWkey REG SZ AAMRD ab REG SZ ON Version 4 0 0 306 Pa
110. LAN An easy way to open the a Configurable Monitor ActiveX Document via your web browser is from the File menu select Open and the browse to the Computer that contains the orm file you wish to open When you choose open the Configurable Monitor File will open embedded into your web browser Not that you can open a orm file across the network using the Configurable Monitor Application or any other ActiveX Document Server Applications i e Microsoft FrontPage 98 and Microsoft Binder for example Version 4 0 0 289 Part Five Monitors Overview of Menu Items File Menu Commands The File menu offers the following commands New Creates a new Monitor document and displays an associated window inside the main window You are presented with the standard Windows File Open dialog box which allows you to open an existing Configurable Monitor document When opened an associated window is displayed inside he main window Closes the active document and asks to save any changes Saves any changes to the currently active document Save As Saves an opened document to a specified file name You are presented with the standard Windows File Save As dialog box which allows you to save the Configurable Monitor Document for reuse A Configurable Monitor document is given a ORM file extension Prints the currently active document Displays full pages of the currently active document as they would be printed Print Set up Changes the printer
111. Measurement Systems Ltd Orchestrator Real Time Monitoring amp Control Softw Version 4 0 0 Uses Gute PREFACE AND CONVENTIONS PART ONE OVERVIEW INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION ORCHESTRATOR SERVER INSTALLATION ORCHESTRATOR CLIENT INSTALLATION PART TWO PRODUCT USAGE USING ORCHESTRATOR USING ORCHESTRATOR CLIENT ORCHESTRATOR MENU OPTIONS PART THREE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION CHANNEL CONFIGURATION ADVANCED CHANNEL CONFIGURATION SAVING THE CONFIGURATION IMPORT EXPORT THE CONFIGURATION CONFIGURE ANALOG CHANNEL CONFIGURE DIGITAL CHANNEL PART FOUR PROCESSORS USER ANALOG CHANNELS USER DIGITAL CHANNEL DESCRIPTION HISTORY CHANNEL DESCRIPTION CALCULATOR CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ALARM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SYSTEM ERROR PROCESSOR HISTORY CHANNEL CONFIGURATION ADVANCED HISTORY CONFIGURATION SAVING THE CONFIGURATION COPY AND PASTE CONFIGURE HISTORY CHANNELS CALCULATED CHANNELS ADVANCED CALCULATOR CONFIGURATION SAVING THE CALCULATOR CONFIGURATION IMPORT EXPORT THE CALCULATOR CONFIGURATION COPY AND PASTE CONFIGURE CALCULATOR CHANNEL CALCULATOR FORMULAE ALARM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 13 29 42 43 49 ALARM CONFIGURATION ALARM ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM ERROR PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION RUNNING SYSTEM ERROR PROCESSOR SYSTEM ERROR PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION SAVING CONFIGURATION PRINTING CONFIGURATION GETTING ONLINE HELP PART FIVE MONITORING CHANNEL MONITOR OVERVIEW CHANNEL MONITO
112. NUMBER P11 OPERATOR 913 E Logger Header Sheet 4 Channels Header Sheet J Text Logs Header Sheet V Date Time of Text Logs V Long Date Format on Headers Sheets V Data Logs w orksheet 4 Column Headers V Header Tags V Header Units 4 Date Time Column Time Base ELAPSED v Time Units SECONDS V MS Col m EXPORT ALL 4 Text Logs with Data File Settings C test data DIF Select Export File Delimiter End Line Value Width 8 Value Precision 2 Split into separate files for Excel column limit E Mail Create new file always Appendtooldfiles Overwrite old files settings T yy m Tm D E For Help press F1 Enabled No Errors Version 4 0 0 310 Part Six Loggers By default the Export Data To File option is selected The Run Command Option will be discussed shortly C Run Command Export Data To File A ccsssdtatatoesenesduecseostocstcensectseasted Configuring Data for Export The complete logged file does not have to be exported A time portion can be chosen as well as selected channels Descriptive information about the channels can be omitted if required The resolution of the results can be modified as can the format of the data The following details the configuration of each section Header There are three options available for export of Text Header information None User Defined and Logged Header Text
113. Net Inc and or one of its subsidiaries such grantor Seller to the Buyer A The term Software as used herein shall mean a program or programs consisting of machine readable logical instruction and tables of information designed as libraries or drivers to work in conjunction with Seller s Sentinel Keys C Products Title to all Software furnished to Buyer hereunder shall Callar meme tn Dinene n man meli man rmm rS I do not accept the terms in the license HUNE InstallShield Version 4 0 0 17 Part One Installation Procedure Click the Complete radio button and click Next i Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 InstallShield Wizard Setup Type aa S x tii Protection Installer Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space O Custom Choose which program features you want to install Recommended for advanced users Ce es Click Yes to changing the Windows Firewall i Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 InstallShield Wizard Windows Firewall detected ET S a t Protection Installer Important Note The setup program will install Sentinel Protection Server and Sentinel Keys Server on this system To allow accessing the Sentinel keys attached to this system by clients on the network your firewall settings will be modified This will not affect the existing security set
114. Of Change The rate of change between each conversion step Analog Scaling Scale The slope of the analog scaling Offset The offset to add to the scaling Statistical Process Control Minimum Sets the value to the minimum value read Maximum Sets the value to the maximum value read Average Sets the value to the average of the values read Standard Deviation Calculates the standard deviation of the values read Notes 1 The SPC values are derived from the current values being read from the channels assigned The SPC values are real time values that are calculated at an interval of the channels update rate 2 SPC operates differently when using the Strip Chart Control The values are derived over a period An example is if you are viewing a set of values over 60 seconds i e the XSpan of the control is set to 1 24 60 the period is derived as follows XSpan Sources UpdateRate So If we are monitoring a source over 60 seconds at an update rate of 1 second the SPC values are calculated from the last 60 values read Version 4 0 0 180 Part Five Monitors STRIP CHART Configuring Multiple Data Source Properties r Edit Channel Properties 2osw B Oe Data Source Properties Data Conversion X Axis Selector m Set up Channel Track Mappings Assign Channel To Drive A Variable Vae P ajel DAIL eS 7 ENERO LLL TR TN me Data Source Source Type PRODUCT NAME Channel Source
115. Orchestrator each channel can be given an event and an alarm condition Each alarm condition can be given priority and an associated block of text to give meaning to the alarm Alarm channels can be linked to a common alarm output channel for annunciation purposes or to automatically switch off important parts of the process or plant The alarm monitor allows operators to monitor and acknowledge their occurrence The integral alarm logger records all alarms and the time they were acknowledged Data Logging ORCHESTRATOR can operate up to 64 independent logging tasks each of which can be configured to take 64 independent groups of channels to files or databases The loggers can be configured to operate on a period basis an event basis or period until event basis In addition there is a separate alarm logger that stores all alarms identified by the system Loggers can be cycled to store data on an hourly daily weekly or shift basis Trends MDI is used to present the real time trends This means a number of separate trends can be displayed on the screen simultaneously Each trend can support infinite channels of data Features such as pan and zoom make it simple to isolate specific areas of interest Trend displays can be any length from a few seconds to 50 years dependent on disk space Version 4 0 0 12 Part One Installation Procedure Orchestrator Server Installation Hardware requirements The following are the minimum and rec
116. Part Five Monitors Navigation Button Properties o Navigation Settings C Run Command Line Run Command Line and Monitor Assign Function Key Channel Navigation Channel Navigation Disabled C Navigate on LOW HIGH state change C Navigate on HIGH LOW state change Run Command Settings Run Monitor Settings Overlay Wind A b Select Monitor C New Window Maximise C Minimise C Same Size C Tile Horizontally C Tile Vertically Cascade All Navigation Setting Selects the action that you want the button to perform You can either configure it to run another monitor or to run a command line i e Program Settings Use this to configure the way in which you want the new monitor to run Select the Window in which you want it to run and the format of the window Assign Function Key Use this button to set up a Function Key to act as a trigger mechanism to launch the Navigation buttons operation You can assign the Keys F1 gt F12 to a navigation button Version 4 0 0 259 Part Five Monitors Strip Chart Description The Strip Chart Control is a dynamic two dimensional charting control that provides an ideal interface for viewing one or more streams of real time data Panning and zooming functionality allows for quick review and in depth analysis of data trends Its dynamic property pages provide a powerful tool for designing charts with full control of scales captions fonts
117. Part Four Configuring Processors a Configure CALCULATED CHANNELS MESVIS160 File Edit View Control Help W e vM Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration Calculator Auto Save For Help press F1 System Disabled No E Auto Save To Enable this utility check the Auto Save flag All values in output channels are saved to disk when the system is disabled The next time the system is restarted the values which were previously in output channels will be restored to the appropriate channel number Saving the Calculator Configuration When a configuration has been completed it must be saved to retain any changes made To save either 1 Click on the Save icon The User Analog configuration will be saved to the current Orchestrator System configuration No File Name will be requested 2 Select Save from the File menu 3 Select Exit from the file menu If any changes have been made a dialog box will ask if you want to save the configuration before exiting the window NB Any changes to the Calculated Channel Configuration will not be incorporated into the Orchestrator System until it is next enabled or the processor is reconfigured Import Export the Calculator Configuration Import the Calculator Configuration Select Import Configuration from the File Menu to import channel configuration from an ASCII file This command presents an Import dialog box where you may specify the range of
118. QL 1 Persist Security Info False D ata Source E cel Select When the select button is pressed the Data Link dialog opens Version 4 0 0 327 Part Six Loggers Click the provider tab and select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers as shown below en Data Link Properties ed Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Native Client Click the next button The Data Link dialog will appear as shown below Version 4 0 0 328 Part Six Loggers r E Data Link Properties rel Provider Connection Advanced a Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files v Refresh C Use connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password Blank password Allow saving password 3
119. R FEATURES CREATE A NEW CHANNEL MONITOR WINDOW COMMUNICATIONS SETUP COLUMN SORTING CHANNEL MONITOR MENU COMMANDS ALARM MONITOR OVERVIEW ALARM MONITOR FEATURES PRINTING INFORMATION CREATING A NEW ALARM MONITOR WINDOW CONFIGURING THE ALARM DISPLAY OPTIONS CONFIGURING COLOUR AND SOUND ALARM HANDLING MISCELLANEOUS ALARM MONITOR MENU COMMANDS CONFIGURABLE MONITOR DRAWING AND CONFIGURING CHANNELS DRAWING SHAPES DRAWING PLUG IN SHAPES PLUG IN SHAPES DRAWING AN ANGULAR GAUGE EXAMPLE CONTROL KNOBS DRAWING A CONTROL KNOB EXAMPLE LINEAR GAUGES DRAWING A LINEAR GAUGE EXAMPLE DRAWING A NUMERIC LED EXAMPLE PERCENT DRAWING A PERCENT CONTROL EXAMPLE SELECTORS DRAWING A SELECTOR EXAMPLE SLIDERS TOGGLE DRAWING A TOGGLE EXAMPLE LED S NAVIGATION BUTTONS STRIP CHART DRAWING A STRIP CHART EXAMPLE GENERIC CONFIGURATION FIELDS USING THE CHANNEL CONFIGURATION WIZARD LAYOUT COMMANDS VALUE ENTRY MODE CONFIGURING COMMUNICATION SETTINGS 95 102 116 116 116 117 118 118 118 119 120 122 124 137 142 146 148 150 156 157 159 160 162 165 169 171 173 184 185 189 197 200 208 210 220 225 227 231 233 242 244 251 253 254 258 260 273 277 282 282 283 283 EDITING VIEW OPTIONS CONFIGURE GRID SETTINGS SET DEFAULT VISUAL PROPERTIES OVERVIEW OF MENU ITEMS PART SIX LOGGING UTILITIES LOGGER CONFIGURATION THE GENERAL TAB THE CHANNEL TAB THE EVENTS TAB THE RATE OF CHANGE TAB T
120. Radius m gt logs KnobStyle 2 Complex MouseControl 2 SnapTo KnobUserD efined KnobColor Determines the color of the control s knob KnobMultiTurn This property determines whether or not the knob can turn through multiple revolutions The number of revolutions is dependent on the KnobMultiTurnValue property KnobMultiTurn Value This property is used to determine how many revolutions a knob can turn The number of revolutions is determined by the knob s maximum value ScaleMaxValue divided by the KnobMultiTurnValue property For example a knob where ScaleMaxValue 500 and KnobMultiTurnValue 100 can make 5 complete revolutions KnobPicture Determines the graphic to be displayed as the knob Unlike knobs which are defined using the KnobStyle property a knob defined by a picture does not rotate Rotating the knob s mark simulates the rotating effect KnobRadius Determines the outer radius of the knob This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Version 4 0 0 201 Part Five Monitors KnobSnap Enables or disables the control s ability to display any value within the range defined by ScaleMinValue and ScaleMaxValue For example if the scale ranges from 0 to 10 KnobSnap TRUE and KnobSnaplncrement 2 then KnobValue can only have the values 0 2 4 6 8 and 10 KnobSnap Increment Determines the allowable incremental change of the knob s value i
121. Reference source not found 85 Part Four Configuring Processors Channel Status Functions The Channel Status functions are a set of functions that get the current status of an Orchestrator channel These functions are used by the extension to a channel eg P1 ALM The functions are note OC Any Processor Orchestrator Channel OC ALM Return Alarm Status of channel 1 if in alarm O if out OC WRN Return Warning Status of channel 1 if in warning O if out OC EVT Return Event Status of channel 1 if in event O if out OC ERR Return Error Status of channel 1 if in error O if out OC UAK Return Acknowledge Status of channel 1 if unacknowledged O if acknowledged Version Error Reference source not found 86 Part Four Configuring Processors Component Control Functions These Functions can be used to Control various Components in the Orchestrator System At present only Logger Control Functions have been implemented but further Control functions may be added in the future The functions are as follows slog num Start Logger where num refers to the logger number elog num Stop Logger where num refers to the logger number vlog name Current Value of Logger where name refers to the Logger name clog num status Set Loggers Status where num is the number and status is the state 1 for on O for off Note See the section on String Handling to see how to use this functions using logger Names instead of numbers St
122. SVISI60 Alarms Present 15 12 01 Version 4 0 0 162 Part Five Monitors Version 4 0 0 163 Part Five Monitors Acknowledge Page has the effect of acknowledging all alarms currently visible in the foremost alarm monitor window Alarms which are not visible within the window are not acknowledged by this option To acknowledge alarms that are not visible scroll the window until the unacknowledged alarms are visible and select Acknowledge Page again If you right click on the Alarm Monitor Window a context menu will appear supplying you with all the functions that the Options menu provides Window Help IS Properties Alt Enter Hp Select Font Ctl F Communication Settings y Acknowledge Alarm Ctl A TA Acknowledge Page Ctl K Cancel Common Alarm Ctl C Q Mask Alarm Ctrl M 4 Stop Updating Cancel Common Alarm The common alarm can be cancelled even if the channel triggering the status is still in alarm There are three ways to cancel a common alarm 1 By clicking on the toolbar icon 2 By using the shortcut Ctrl C 3 From the options menu select Cancel Common Alarm Masking Alarms A channel can be added to the masked alarms list in order to hide all alarms on that channel There are three ways to mask an alarm 1 By clicking on the toolbar icon i e 2 By using the shortcut key Ctrl M 3 From the options menu select Mask Alarm In order to unmask alarms you must first se
123. Selection Setup will add program shortcuts to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the Existing Folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder PRODUCT NAME Existing Folders Administrative Tools Games Maintenance lt Back Cancel Set up copies the appropriate files to your hard disk and creates a program group and icons Version 4 0 0 40 Part One Installation Procedure PRODUCT NAME Client Setup Setup Status PRODUCT NAME Client Setup is performing the requested operations Installing C SPRODUCTNAMESCMONITORS SBitmapssnomail bmp Information x Te Setup is complete You may run the installed program by selecting the N program icon in the Program menu Installation is now complete once the machine restarts you are ready to start the software Version 4 0 0 41 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Part Two Product usage Part Two explains how the Orchestrator package is used How to launch and control it How to save and open configuration files Version 4 0 0 42 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Using Orchestrator The following is a brief guide to the steps necessary to use the system Before any information can be obtained from Orchestrator various modules have to be configured From the Orchestrator program group in the start menu access can be gained to all modules for config
124. Selection Default C User Defined PRODUCT NAME Server PRODUCT NAME PRODUCT NAME Source USER DEFINED PRODUCT NAME Channel USER_DEFINED o Cancel s Hep Assign Channel To Drive A Variable VariablelD Ja 1 C A Track Band Introduction The Strip Chart control allows for up to 50 channels to be monitored in one control i e at any one time there can be up to 50 Orchestrator Channels being monitored on the Strip Chart Selecting channels is exactly the same as it is for single channel controls i e the Angular Gauge control but with a few differences namely 1 Assign To TracklD 2 Assign Channel To Drive 2 1 A Variable 2 2 A Track Band Track ID Track ID is a zero based index that relates to the tracks the strip chart can display Basically a Strip Chart can display up to 30 tracks 0 to 29 onto which you can show your variables on By default your Track ID will be Version 4 0 0 181 Part Five Monitors zero i e the first track on the strip chart You may alter this via the spin buttons that lie directly horizontally to the Track ID edit box The two ways to show a channel Explanation There are two ways to display a channel variable on a strip chart Selecting Assign Channel To Drive A Variable assignes the channel to a variable on the strip chart control i e you can actually see the channel being drawn on the chart Selecting Assign Channel To Drive gt A Track Band
125. Server Selected Server Source s Selected Source 6 Enter the update rate for the source in minutes seconds and milliseconds 7 Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to quit Editing View Options The way in which the Configurable Monitor appears can be altered To change the way the monitor looks choose the View option on the monitor main window The following options are available Allows you to view grid lines on the opened monitor Monitor Colour Allows you to change the background colour of the active monitor Show Objects Allows you to turn OLE object indication on and off Allows you to turn the toolbar on and off Status Bar Allows you to turn the status bar on and off Full Screen Option maximises the application window to the full screen size and hides all frame objects menu title bar toolbar etc with the exception of the vertical scrollbar Configure Grid Settings When a new monitor is generated a grid is created but by default not displayed Use the Grid lines option from the View menu to toggle the grid display between on and off The monitor also defaults to snap to grid mode The grid size will default to the page size of the current printer setting To modify the default grid settings select the Grid Settings option from the Monitor drop down menu The following window will be displayed Monitor Grid Settings Width ea Pixels Cancel Height 24 Pixels Color EN V Snap to Grid
126. Service must be logged on as a user for logging to an Oracle Database to work Disk Space Checking This option allows the user to specify a disk space limit which they wish to be informed about if the disk space on the logger drive goes below To enable this option click on the Disk Space checking checkbox The Current Space Available is checked frequently and the amount of free space is displayed at that time Version 4 0 0 334 Part Six Loggers Disk Space Checking Current Space Available U MegaBytes Notification When Free Disk Space Reaches MegaBytes Once a value is entered in the Notification When Free Disk Space Reaches box the system checks and compares the current free space value against the notification value If the notification value is less than the current free space value then an error message similar to the one below will appear in the Standard Logger Configuration status bar For Help press F1 Enabled WARNING DISK FREE SPACE IS 179 A Note In Database mode the logger checks disk space on the drive specified in the Logger Directory on the Advanced tab Version 4 0 0 335 Part Six Loggers Log Files This section allows the user to save the Orchestrator configuration to the logger directory There is also an option to make the Log Files read only The prefix is used to prefix log files with text The logger file prefix can include channel values See Including Channel Values below Synch
127. TA 8 2 DIET COKE 9 DR PEPPER Channel2 x Shift Values x 1 SHIFT A 2 SHIFT B 3 SHIFT C 4 SHIFT D The string inserted can be modified by preceding the channel identifier or tag within the quotation marks with a format specification A format specification which consists of optional and required fields has the following form flags width precision type Each field of the format specification is a single character or a number signifying a particular format option The simplest format specification contains only the percent sign and a type character for Version 4 0 0 337 Part Six Loggers example 23s If a percent sign is followed by a character that has no meaning as a format field the character is used For example to print a percent sign character use 5 Example For example P1 is set to 1 2320534 and values txt maps 1 to the string WIDGETS sP I will output WIDGETS dP1 will 1 fP1 will output 1 232053 For example Q1 is set to high and description is set to STOPPED sQ1 will output STOPPED dQ1 will output 1 fQ1 will output 1 000000 Version 4 0 0 338 Part Six type Loggers Required character that determines whether the associated channel value is interpreted as a string or a number Character d i Version 4 0 0 Output Format Signed decimal integer Signed decimal integer Unsigned octal integer Unsigned decimal integer Unsigne
128. TRL C CTRL V Version 4 0 0 58 Part Three Configuring Channels Configure Analog Channel The configure User Analog Channel is divided into 5 sections plus a row of buttons at the bottom Configure Analog Channel P1 O esl Enable Channel Tag Channel Description Temp Engineering Units v Significant Change 1 Event Checking Minimum Maximum Descriptor Value 50 150 deg 20 o o IV Alarm Error Checking v Drive Common Priority 1 Delay 20 MV Low Alarm Checking v High Alarm Checking Drive Common Alarm Limit o Drive Common Alarm Limit 2000 Warming fo M Warming fo Hysteresis a Hysteresis fo Priority o Delay fo Priority D o Delay fo Alarm Message Alarm Message CHANNEL1 Alarm Low CHANNEL1 Alarm High Cancel Copy Paste Next Goto Help Enable Channel For a channel to be operative and therefore configurable the Enable Channel check box must be checked Tag A 15 characters alphanumeric field that can contain channel information or wiring schedule references Description A 32 channel alphanumeric field in which a description of the channel can be detailed Engineering Units Minimum The minimum default scale value used in displays Maximum The maximum default scale value used in displays Version 4 0 0 59 Part Three Configuring Channels Descriptor An 8 character field available to describe the units of the measurement Signif
129. UBJECT OT THE TERMS SET OUT IN THIS LICENCE AGREEMENT INSTALLING COPYING DOWNLOADING ACCESSING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS NOTE TECHNICAL SUPPORT AS WELL AS NOTIFICATION OF UPGRADES IS ONLY PROVIDED TO USERS WHO HAVE EITHER APPLIED TO Distributor Name FOR SUPPORT AND WHO HAVE PAID THE APPLICABLE SUPPORT CHARGES 1 GRANT OF LICENCE Under copyright law you are not permitted to install or run the software product accompanying this Agreement the Software or use the user manuals and other documentation that accompanies the Software in document or electronic form the Manuals Accept the default directory location or use the Browse button to select your preferred directory location and name Version 4 0 0 37 Part One Installation Procedure An appropriate key has not been located on this system Please contact your distributor for an Unlock Key specifying Product Code and Lock Code provided below Distributor Details Gey ETE Distributor Phone 00 000 000 Distributor Link www Jdistributorlink com Product Cade PRODUCT NAME V3 3 11 CLIENTSw Lock Method DisklD NIC Adapter Address C Hardware Key Serial Number Lock Code 56455457 Unlock Key Moo If the computer has an internet connection click Get from Web to receive the unlock code via the web The following dialog will appear Version 4 0 0 Ema
130. UK Norman Endpoint Protection NTI Media Maker 3 OpenOffice org 3 2 Version 4 0 0 23 Part One Installation Procedure Input the number of data loggers required the maximum is 64 or accept the default Loggers Setup 5 Enter the number of Data Loggers you require to be installed 15 at Set up copies the appropriate files to your hard disk and creates a program group and icons Note At this point stand alone users will receive the following error message Warning failed to add Orchestrator Share C Orchestrator Networking is not installed or the Server is not started Setup will continue Click Ok and the Setup should continue Setup Status Orchestrator Server Setup is performing the requested operations Updating Orchestrator Capabilities 6 When the setup has finished copying Orchestrator click Ok Version 4 0 0 24 Part One Installation Procedure PRODUCT NAME 3 9 11 0 Server Setup InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing Server on your computer Installation is now complete you are ready to start the software Version 4 0 0 25 Part One Installation Procedure Orchestrator File Structure Once Orchestrator has been installed and the system configured the file structure will be similar to that shown EMEg ROOTDIR G Bin CMONITORS CURRENT CONFIG E Alarm Calc G DATASCAN 2 E History E Loggers Usera E
131. Unitset Specific Heat StmPSG Pressure Entropy Unitset Isentropic Expansion Coefficient StmPSH Pressure Entropy Unitset Specific Enthalpy StmPSQ Pressure Entropy Unitset Quality StmPST Pressure Entropy Unitset Temperature StmPSV Pressure Entropy Unitset Specific Volume StmPSW Pressure Entropy Unitset Sonic Velocity StmPHC Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Specific Heat StmPHG Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Isentropic Expansion Coefficient StmPHQ Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Quality StmPHS Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Specific Entropy StmPHT Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Temperature StmPHV Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Specific Volume StmPHW Pressure Enthalpy Unitset Sonic Velocity StmTQC Temperature Quality Unitset Specific Heat StmTQG Temperature Quality Unitset Isentropic Expansion Coefficient StmTQH Temperature Quality Unitset Specific Enthalpy StmTQK Temperature Quality Unitset Thermal Conductivity StmTQM Temperature Quality Unitset Viscosity StmTQS Temperature Quality Unitset Specific Entropy StmTQV Temperature Quality Unitset Specific Volume StmTQW Temperature Quality Unitset Sonic Velocity StmTempTI ITS 95 Temperature Unitset IPTS 68 Temperature StmTempIT IPTS 68 Temperature Unitset ITS 95 Temperature Version Error
132. Version Error Reference source not found 87 Part Four Configuring Processors Example Formulae The following examples are designed to use most of the function types and utilities in the Calculator package The examples will be introduced with a description of the process and the monitoring requirements The description will include a list of Orchestrator channels allocated Example 1 Process Efficiency Monitoring This imaginary plant operates two 12 hour shifts seven days a week Shifts start at 06 00 and 18 00 each day The requirement is to monitor the plant on a shift basis to calculate machine efficiency To log to disk at the end of each shift the total running time of the machine the downtime and the number of times it stops One analogue Device channel DS1 is monitoring via a transducer the speed of a drum When the transducer indicates greater than 2 rpm then the machine is operating The calculator formula could be configured as follows C1 period 06 00 00 18 00 00 C1 will 21 during the defined period therefore the result of this channel will produce a value of 1 for day shift and O for night shift C2 pulse 05 59 45 C3 pulse 06 00 00 C4 pulse 17 59 45 C5 pulse 18 00 00 Calculator channels 2 and 4 will be configured to trigger a logger Event Low set to 1 and Event High set to 0 5 Two loggers configured one called DAYSHIFT set to event mode event trigger channel defined as C4 the o
133. a cycling logger Click the Browse button and locate the directory which has the live log file Once the end of the current logging cycle is reached the next log file will be opened and displayed on screen This saves you the task of having to reconfigure a new Trend to show the information again Select a Log File or Select a Database Logs This is similar to the above except the same log will be opened with the associated Trend configuration file each time it is opened N B For both of the last two options above save the Trend configuration file exiting Trends otherwise it will not work Select a Logged Data File From the File menu choose the Select Log File command Using the toolbar click on the amp button A Select Log File Dialog box will appear Version 4 0 0 385 Part Seven Replays Select a Database Log 3 From the File menu choose the Select Database Log command Using the toolbar click on the button A Select Datbase Log Dialog box will appear Select Previous Log From the File menu choose the Select Previous Log command Using the toolbar click on the button The previous log created by the currently selected logger is selected Select Next Log From the File menu choose the Select Next Log command Using the toolbar click on the P button The next log created by the currently selected logger is selected Add a Line to a Trend When a log file has been selected channels can be chosen
134. a log file will be exported into a worksheet called TEXTLOGS The default includes the time beside the text log Date Time of Text Logs Check this box to specify the date and time of the text log Long Date Format on Header Sheet If this check box is checked the date will have long date formatting performed E G Monday August 01 2004 11 25 39 If the box is not checked the short format will be used The date has the form MM DD YY E G 08 27 04 15 45 23 Data Logs Sheet To include actual logged data check the Data Logs Sheet check box the following options in this section include additional ways to format the data for export Column Headers Version 4 0 0 362 Part Seven Replays Column Headers alone display the channel number and prefix of the logged channel Check Header Tags to display the tag of the channel and not the channel number check Header Units to include the units on the next line Date Time Column Time Base Three time base options are available The time selected appears in the spreadsheets first column of each scan The choices are Elapsed Time Differential Time and Absolute Time Date If this check box is checked the date column will be included in the exported data logs Date Long Date Format if this check box is checked dates will have the long format Long and short date formats are defined in the Regional Settings applet of the Control Panel Ms Column Include a column for mili
135. ace Comma Tab Most modern spreadsheets including Microsoft Excel and Lotus use the Comma separator As an alternative to the fixed choices a User option is available If this is chosen enter the delimiting character in the text box that appears alongside the list End Line Similar to the Delimiter there are choices for the end of line separator The choices are User CR LF LF LineFeed CR Carriage Return A User option is again an option Microsoft Excel and Lotus require CR LF end of line characters Import Export File Enter the path of the file you wish to export to or import from Alternatively click the button on the right hand side to browse for the desired file Channel Range Select the All Channels button if you wish to import export every channel configuration Alternatively select the Channels button and enter a range of channel configurations you wish to export Copy and Paste Two of the icons on the toolbar are Copy and Paste From the Configuration Window it is possible to copy one channels configuration to another Point to the channel to be copied it will be highlighted click on the Copy icon the configuration will be copied to the clipboard Now point to Version 4 0 0 57 Part Three Configuring Channels the channel that the configuration is to be copied to again it will be highlighted Select the Paste icon and the configuration will be pasted from the clipboard Shortcuts 32 Toolbar Keys C
136. active window Choose Save Monitor from the File menu or click the mouse on the Save Monitor icon within the toolbar Immediately after this you are presented with the Standard Windows File Close Dialog Box in which you can save the Channel Monitor Document by following the steps outlined 1 Enter a name for your monitor file in the File Name Edit box of the Dialog Box Or alternatively you may use the name that it prompts you to use 2 Double clicking on a previously Saved Monitor s Name with the left mouse button indicates to the application that you want to overwrite a saved monitors file Version 4 0 0 130 Part Five Monitors Save As 4 Save in MONITORS wi 4 ex Ear Name Date modif Type Size This folder is empty ee Recent Places Desktop aidan mallon LU Computer me Network File name ar ULATED Y Save as type Channel Monitor Files mcm v Cancel Closing Channel Monitor Windows To close a Channel Monitor Window within the Channel Monitor Main Window first ensure the Window to be closed is the active Window Choose Close from the File menu or click the mouse on the X button on the title bar of the window to be closed You will then be prompted with a Save Dialog Box querying you on whether to save the active Channel Monitor Document or close it without saving changes see Section Saving Channel Monitor Windows NB The Channel Monitor Applic
137. al Orchestrator server in a cell by entering RTD Orchestrator RTDServer server channel identifier e g RTD Orchestrator RTDServer mypc C1 This requires DCOM configuration and should not be undertaken without knowledge of how to configure DCOM Version 4 0 0 407 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Excel RTD Throttle Interval The Excel update rate is called the data throttle interval This defaults to 5 seconds This can only be modified via the Excel object model or the registry There is no user interface for configuring the RTD throttle interval in Excel To set the throttle interval through the Excel object model 1 In Excel go to the Visual Basic Editor by pressing ALT F11 or clicking Visual Basic Editor from the Macro menu Tools menu 2 In the Immediate window press CTRL G or click Immediate Window on the View menu type this code Application RTD ThrottleInterval 1000 3 Make sure your cursor is on the line that you just typed and then press ENTER 4 To verify that it is set correctly type this line of if code in the Immediate window Application RTD ThrottleInterval 5 If you put your cursor at the end of this line and press ENTER it should display 1000 Then you know that your throttle interval is set correctly Alternatively you can define a macro using the Excel Visual Basic Editor which runs when the workspace is opened e g 4g Microsoft Visual Basic RTDServerSample xls ThisWor
138. al or analog Orchestrator devices with output channels and calculator temporary variables V Compound Expression Operators The compound expression operators allow more than one expression to be evaluated The operators are Return result of right hand expression Return result of left hand expression Example In channel C5 the formula is written as DS2 pi lt lt P3 DS23 The Channel C5 will take the value of DS2 pi the expression P3 DS23 will be evaluated but the result will not be assigned to Calculator channel C5 Conditional Operator The conditional operator allows an IF THEN scenario to be computed Conditional Test Do if TRUE Do if FALSE The and are the conditional operator delimiters Example Channel C3 DS23 gt 40 P2240 P2 0 If DS23 is greater than 40 the expression P2 40 will be computed Channel C3 will also assume the value of 40 If DS23 is less than 40 then the expression P2 0 will be actioned C3 and P2 will assume the value of 0 The conditional operator relates to the term If Condition True THEN do this ELSE do this Version Error Reference source not found 80 Part Four Configuring Processors Operator Precedence and Order of Evaluation When more than one operator is used in an expression operators are given a priority to ensure a specific order if evaluation Operators with the highest priority are evaluated first The following list shows the prior
139. alarm Running System Error Processor This section gives details of how to run the System error Processor From The Start Menu Select the System Error Processor from the system sub menu on the start menu by moving the mouse pointer over the icon and clicking soft Visual SourceSafe sott Visual studio 2005 Aidan Mallon 4 PrintMe Internet Printing PRODUCT NAME Documents Viicrosoft Vis Pictures Music Search Recent Items Computer Network r 173 AAC FRUDUL I D E System Error Processor Connect To Control Panel Default Programs Help and Support o From the Main Menu In the System Main Menu first Select Processors then select System Error Channels Version Error Reference source not found 116 Part Four Configuring Processors System Error Processor Configuration Once the System Error Processor has been successfully launched you will be faced with the following dialog O Configure SYSTEM ERROR CHANNELS MESVIS160 Fille View Help Be Iv amp utoEnable System Error Channels Iv Generate Alarm On Error Drive Common Alarm Alarm Priority f Alarm Delay 6 secs For Help press FL System Disabled No Errors An Explanation of the configurable fields are as follows AutoEnable System Error Channels This Check Box must be set on checked to activate the System Error Channels If the channels were previously disabled the con
140. alog This dialog allows the user to choose the alarm selection criteria including a range of priorities alarm types and the server to monitor from Which data fields to display and which colours to use can also be configured here Another option to launch the Alarm Monitor Application is via the command prompt This feature allows the user to specify the Server to connect to and whether to display the Alarm Monitor in Full Screen Mode The command line parameters to pass are To indicate Server name gt L S lt ServerName gt To indicate file name gt FileName For full screen mode gt F Note The brackets used in this example are not used when passing command line arguments and the inverted commas are optional Examples 1 This specifies a Server Name almon_nt exe S ServerName or almon nt exe S ServerName 2 This opens the file normally almon nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 mal Or almon nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 mal 3 This starts the application with the New Monitor Properties Property Page but once the user selects OK the monitor will be in full screen mode almon nt exe S ServerName F Or almon nt exe S ServerName F 4 This opens the file in full screen mode almon nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 mal F or almon nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 mal F Version 4 0 0 149 Part Five Monitors Alarm Monitor Features
141. an select the Colour that the value will be shown in while in alarm condition and also the Style The style should be the standard list Normal Italic Bold or Bold Italic The indication option OFF has also been added so that alarm indication can be turned off Configuring Display Options E Edit Channel Properties Data Source Properties Visual Properties Display Options Data Conversion Channel Display Options v Tag v Description v Value MV Units Sig Change Event Status AlamMsg J Aam Staus Ack Aam Value Entry Value Display Options Width n Precision 2 Engineering Notation The User can select which fields are to be displayed on the monitor by clicking each check box to the On state Version 4 0 0 178 Part Five Monitors Width This field represents how wide analog Channel values are to be displayed For digital Channels it represents how many letters of the On and Off State descriptions will be displayed Precision This field represents the precision to be used when displaying analogue channel values Engineering Notation Enabled This field will default to Off and must be clicked On in order to enable the display of data in engineering notation If this is enabled the display will switch to engineering notation automatically when a number is very large or very small Whenever it is left off the rules that apply are if the precision chosen by the operator is not enough to show a va
142. and short date formats are defined in the Regional Settings applet of the Control Panel Ms Column Include a column for miliseconds in the exported data Text Logs With Data Check Text Logs With Data to include text logs from the log file for export They are appended with the data on the last column of the row Text Logs on Separate Rows Check Text Logs on Separate Rows to display text logs on a new line within the exported data file Statistics Selecting statistics will append statistics for the selected channels at the bottom of the exported data Statistics include Mean Square Root MSR Average AVG Minimum MIN Maximum MAX Standard Deviation STD DEV Difference between Minimum and Maximum DIFF Export Sample Skip e Export All e Skip Every logs scans Version 4 0 0 312 Part Six Loggers e Skip Time Frequency seconds e Skip Duplicates With large data files users may wish to export only a certain amount of data The Sample Skip option allows the user to decide how may samples will be exported If a sample rate of say n is entered then every nth sample will be exported The Sample Skip combo box has Three options Export All and Skip Every and Skip Time Frequency Select Skip Every and an edit box will appear type in the skip factor in terms of logs scans Select Skip Time Frequency and an edit box will appear type in the skip factor in terms of seconds Select Skip Duplicates to skip duplicated d
143. and out about the data displayed on the Strip Chart control different requirements are met The Strip Chart control automatically assumes the most appropriate Time scale seconds minutes hours days etc for the current viewable data set This property defines the format used when the Strip Chart control is scaled to displaying the Date format The formatting codes for these properties are as follows a Abbreviated weekday name A Full weekday name b Abbreviated month name B Full month name c Date and time representation appropriate for locale d Day of month as decimal number Version 4 0 0 268 Part Five Monitors 9 H Hour in 24 hour format l Hour in 12 hour format j Day of year as decimal number m Month as decimal number M Minute as decimal number p Current locale s A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock S Second as decimal number U Week of year as decimal number with Sunday as first day of week w Weekday as decimal number W Week of year as decimal number with Monday as first day of week x Date representation for current locale X Time representation for current locale y Year without century as decimal number Y Year with century as decimal number Z Z Time zone name or abbreviation no characters if time zone is unknown Percent sign Additionally the code may be used to remove leading zeros i e d H etc or to get long date and time formats For example c yields a time si
144. annel configuration They can be assigned any value by the assignment operator their current value used as an operand in any expression Example V eDST2 P2 V1 Function Calls Sets of predefined functions are provided Each function yields a single result known as the return value This value is available for use as an operand Function calls are described later in this section Result of sub expression An expression can be made up of a number of sub expressions Each sub expression yields a single value that becomes an operand for a further expression Version Error Reference source not found 78 Part Four Configuring Processors Operators Operators specify an action to be taken by the calculator Arithmetic Operators Power e g DS143 Multiplier e g DS1 10 Divisor e g DS1 100 Addition e g DS1 DS4 Subtraction e g D81 DS2 Logical Operators Operands are always rounded to the nearest integer before the logical operation In logical operations the number zero is considered as FALSE and any number that is non zero is considered as TRUE The result of a logical operation is 0 if FALSE and 1 if TRUE Logical NOT e g DS1 if logical test if TRUE return 1 if DS1 is non zero then return 0 amp Logical AND e g DS2 amp DS3 TRUE returned if both operands are non Zero Logical OR e g DS6 DS23 TRUE if either are non zero Relational Operators These operators compare the
145. aph Choices are AlignLeft AlignRight and AlignCenter Orientation Determines the alignment and orientation of the tic labels These are used to improve the readability of the labels on the graph Choices are Horizontal or Vertical Offset Determines the spacing between the Y axis and the tic labels for the track currently selected by TrackID It is based on a unitless scale where 0 is no offset and a offset of 1 is equal to the width of the drawing region defined by AreaBottom AreaLeft AreaRight and AreaTop Max Min Determines the absolute extents of the Y Axis drawn on the track currently selected by TrackID Display Max Display Min Determines the display extents of the Y Axis drawn on the track currently selected by TrackID Version 4 0 0 262 Part Five Monitors Major Tics Determines the desired number of major tic marks for the track currently selected by TrackID The control will force the tic delta to be within a specific power of ten and will space the tics at the closest natural interval multiples of 1 2 or 5 depending on TrackMajorTics and the display extents TrackDisplayMin and TrackDisplayMax on which the tics are based Minor Tics Determines the number of minor tic marks between major tic marks for the track currently selected by TrackID Version 4 0 0 263 Part Five Monitors Track Bands o cere A 7 gt s Library Background Captions Fonts General Stamps Variab
146. ariablelD property is used to select the variable to which variable properties apply ne Properties Library Background Captions Fonts General Stamps Tracks TrackBands Van 3l s cms Variables 1 E arabes Type 0 Analog real v VariablelD JO VariableFil Tracki 0 z v VariableVisible Linewidth 1 E Color Deltax 1 00 LineStyle 0 Last 0 00 Symbol fo None SymbolShape valid only if VariableS ymbol is UserDefined Only solid lines may have a width greater than 1 pixell VariablelD When multiple variables exist VariablelD is used to index the variable to which the other variable properties apply The total number of variables is determined by the Variables property and VariablelD has valid values from 0 to Variables 1 TracklD When multiple tracks exist TracklD is used to index the track to which the other track properties apply The total number of tracks is determined by the Tracks property and TracklD has valid values from 0 to Tracks 1 Type Determines the data type for the variable currently selected by VariablelD The choices are Analog Logical or Discrete The Analog setting is the most common type of data and means that the data is free form like a sine wave The Logical setting is used when the data is Boolean on or off The Discrete setting is for use when the data is stepped i e the variable value is either 1 2 3 4 etc The Discrete s
147. assignes the channel to drive a track band i e you can set the channel to drive a track band to indicate the minimum or maximum value that has been derived from the channel your are monitoring Variable ID Variable ID is a zero based index of the channels you are monitoring Each channel has a unique Variable ID attached to it which will be between 0 and 49 inclusive To add a channel simply select the Variable ID you require and enter the channel details as you would before i e Server Source Name Channel Prefix etc You navigate through the 50 Variables channels via the spin buttons that are directly horizontal to the Variable ID edit box By default the channel will be assigned to drive a variable but the user may select to make it drive a track band if they wish The user then must enter whether to drive the minimum or maximum settings of the track band via the check box controls that appear Selecting the channel to drive a track band immediately sets the data conversion settings to either minimum or maximum depending on the users selection NB If you select the Strip Chart s X axis to be driven by a numeric value i e not time based the track band settings you have selected will not work They only work when the x axis is driven by under time based Note 1 The variable will not be displayed on the Strip Chart unless the number of tracks is one greater than the Track ID you entered i e If you choose to put the variable c
148. ata Email Data Export can be configured to send the logged data as an email via SMTP or MAPI SMTP Click the Settings Button Enter a Network Username and Password Enter the email address s you wish to send the logged data to Select SMTP and click the configure button Enter the name which email will be sent from Enter the email address email will be sent from ele Oe SOW Rk IRE Enter the name or IP address of the mail server SMTP Mail Server usually use port 25 but this is not guaranteed to be the case You can verify this with your Mail Server Administrator 8 If your Mail Server Requires authentication enter your Login Name and Password MAPI In order to use MAPI you must have a MAPI Compatible Mail Client installed and configured on the local computer Examples of MAPI compatible mail clients include Outlook Outlook Express AOL Version 7 0 or later and Eudora Click the Settings Button Enter the email address s you wish to send the logged data to Select use MAPI and click Configure MAPI Select the Mail Profile from the drop down list If no mail profiles are available then no MAPI compatible clients are configured on the local computer Enter the password for the mail profile you have selected You can use logon as service although some MAPI accounts may not allow this depending on Network Security settings in which case you must use an account with adequate permissions AUNE OY ul If you have successfu
149. ate defined in the During Event time boxes Post Event When the event clears the pre event circular buffer will resume and the defined number of logs at the Post Event time will be stored on disk If an event occurs again during the post event phase the post event will be suspended and the cycle started at the during event phase If no Post Event logs are needed a value of 0 can be entered Event Logger Single Shot In some instances only a single record of a number of channels is required when an EVENT occurs rather than the three phases described above From the drop down list adjacent to During Event choose Single no times need to be configured Rate of Change A logger configured to this mode is triggered only by a channel changing by a rate of change Version 4 0 0 297 Part Six Loggers Logger Operation Mode This area of the Logger Configuration dialog box deals with the operational requirements of the logger the times for which a logger should operate whether new logs are created or appended to the end of old files whenever loggers start YYYY MM DD HH MIN Start Mode CREATE FILE TABLE Bee em e Stop Time E xx g eoe xx Delete Log Files Records Cycle NONE Old logs can also be automatically deleted if required All of these features are configured within this section Start Mode Two modes are available Create Logs and Append Logs If Create Logs is selec
150. ate rate is the rate at which the client monitors requests for data from a particular server The Update Rate Dialog looks like this Set Update Rate fe ee Update Rate Server MESVIS150 Source s All Update Rate m Mins E Secs o Ms The update rate can be set in one of two ways Server basis and Source basis The format of this dialog will vary depending on which one you select Setting the Update Rate for Server At the Monitor Communications dialog select the server that you want to set the update rate for 1 Click on the Set Update Rate button 2 The Update Rate Settings dialog appears the fields will look as follows Server Selected Server Sources All All sources on server being set 3 Enter your Update Rate in minutes seconds and milliseconds 4 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to quit Setting Update Rate for Source At the Monitor Communications dialog select the server that you want to set the update rate for Version 4 0 0 285 Part Five Monitors 1 Then click on the Sources button 2 The Sources Update Rates Server Name dialog will appear This shows all the sources on a particular server together with their associated prefixes and any update rates already set 3 Choose the source that you want to set the update rate for Click with the mouse OR use the keyboard 4 Click the Set Update Rate button 5 The Update Rate Settings dialog appears The fields will look as follows
151. ation Examples The following examples assume that the current date and time is 11 00 Tuesday 7th June 1994 Daily Logs To log alarms from 06 00 to 18 00 every day a possible configuration would be START MODE APPEND ALIGN TIME 06 00 CYCLE EVERY DAY LOG FOR 12 HOURS The disadvantage of this configuration is if the system is enabled at e g 10 00hrs then the Alarm Logger Version Error Reference source not found 100 Part Four Configuring Processors would not start until 06 00 hr the next day each time the system is re enabled the Alarm logger will wait to the start of a complete cycle A more suitable configuration would be START MODE APPEND ALIGN TIME 94 6 6 06 00 CYCLE EVERY DAY LOG FOR 12 HOURS With an align date and time specified that has passed whenever the system is enabled the Alarm logger will commence recording alarm information immediately It will add the logged information onto the end of the alarm log file that may have already been started during the current cycle If an Alarm log file had not yet been started for that cycle one will be created immediately Weekly Logs To log alarms from 06 00 Monday to 22 00 on Friday every week the configuration would be START MODE APPEND ALIGN TIME 94 6 6 06 00 CYCLE EVERY WEEK LOG FOR TIME 00 05 00 00 Version Error Reference source not found 101 Part Four Configuring Processors Alarm Annunciation In addition to reporting alarm
152. ation Sub Directory Loggers The configuration sub directory for loggers is simply called LOGGERS and is the same for all loggers in the system Therefore the configuration sub directory for loggers is simply CURRENT CONFIGNLOGGERS Configuration Files Each device processor and logger has a configuration file located in each individual configuration sub directory Configuration files do not have any filename extension The following section describes how the configuration file for each data source and logger is named Configuration File Devices and Processors Configuration files for all data sources devices and Processors within the Orchestrator system are simply named config This file is located within the configuration sub directory for the data source Therefore the full path from the Orchestrator root directory to the configuration file for the Generic device numbered 2 is CURRENT_CONFIG gener_2 config Similarly the full path from the Orchestrator root directory to the configuration file for the User Analog processor is CURRENT_CONFIG USERA config 448 Appendix B Security Configuration Files Loggers The configuration file for each logger is named standard followed by an underscore followed by the logger number Loggers are numbered from 1 to the maximum number of loggers on the Orchestrator system To determine the logger number of a logger open the Loggers menu in Orchestrator main menu a
153. ation bar must be selected and the AutoEnable Data Exchange box checked Now when the Orchestrator system is enabled from the Main Menu the Data Exchange channels will automatically be enabled also Configure DATA EXCHANGE MESVIS160 sss oso File Edit View Control Help Baa sees tw Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration Data Exchange Processor Verify Configuration at Startup Update Rate Ming 0 cea Ms 0 OPC Recovery Rate Mins E Secs o DDE Recovery Rate Mins ft Secs 0 Auto Save OPC Writes Synchronous C Asynchronous For Help press F1 Enabled No Erro Update Rate This field specifies the rate at which the Data Exchange processor should attempt to retrieve set values on the connected data sources OPC Recovery Rate This field specifies the rate at which the Data Exchange processor should attempt to re establish contact with OPC servers that are not responding This field should be set to as high a timeout as possible as interrogation of OPC servers which are not operating correctly can take some time Version 4 0 0 425 Part Ten Data Exchange DDE Recovery Rate This field specifies the rate at which the Data Exchange processor should attempt to re establish contact with DDE servers that are not responding Auto Save To Enable this utility check the AutoSave flag All values in all channels are saved to disk when the system is disabled The next tim
154. ation works on the basis of Workspaces The Workspace remembers each Channel Monitor Windows position size and configurable details number of visible columns color settings etc To add a Channel Monitor to the workspace you must save each new Channel Monitor Window to a Channel Monitor Document via the Save option in the menu or toolbar See Section Saving Channel Monitor Windows On Closing the Channel Monitor Application you will be asked to save any unsaved modified Channel Monitor Documents If you don t save a new Channel Monitor Window it will not be re opened the next time you launch the Channel Monitor Application Version 4 0 0 131 Part Five Monitors Printing Channel Monitor Windows Channel results can be printed on the systems printer if required Choose Print from the File menu or click the Print tool button A print Dialog Box will appear r Print Printer Name HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Where 192 168 1 167 Comment Print to file Print range Copies All Number of copies 1 lt C Pages from E to 213 423 V Help From this box under the grouping of Print Range select ALL if all channels are to be printed or Pages entering the start and stop page numbers if only a block of channels are to be printed It is normally acceptable to select the lower print quality of 75 dpi Assuming the printer is
155. ative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed If the number of characters in the output value is less than the specified width blanks are added to the left or the right of the values depending on whether the flag for left alignment is specified until the minimum width is reached If width is prefixed with 0 zeros are added until the minimum width is reached not useful for left aligned numbers The width specification never causes a value to be truncated If the number of characters in the output value is greater than the specified width or if width is not given all characters of the value are used subject to the precision specification Version 4 0 0 340 Part Six precision Loggers Optional number that specifies the maximum number of characters printed for all or part of the output field or the minimum number of digits printed for integer values It specifies a nonnegative decimal integer preceded by a period which specifies the number of characters to be used the number of decimal places or the number of significant digits Unlike the width specification the precision specification can cause either truncation of the output value or rounding of a floating point value If precision is specified as 0 and the channel value to be converted is O the result is no characters output as shown below S 0dPl1 where Pl is equal to 0 then no characters output The type determines the int
156. ave the sorted Channel Monitor Window by clicking on the Save Monitor icon in the toolbar or alternatively selecting Save Monitor from the File Menu Column Positioning Mentioned previously is the fact that each channel has different attributes that appear in the nine different columns of the channel monitor window To suit the users needs he she may drag a column to a different position within the window i e move the order of the column on the screen per channel monitor window To drag a column simply click on the header of the column you wish to move via the left mouse button Hold the left mouse button down over the header and drag the column to its new location Release the left mouse button and the column will now be positioned in the new order r Channel Monitor CALCULATED CHANNELS cji G1 File View Options Configuration Window Help e x bow PE DH ego rxN Y Event Status 01 91 581 02 Secs Number of Seco Sine Wave 0 10 Zero to Ten Cou Q9 ALO This is a lo 0 6 Zero to Six Coun 0 60 Zero to Sity Cou Zero to Hundred Zem ta Thauisan xl MESVISL60 CALCULATED CHANNELS 12 43 11 Alter Active Channel Monitor Font The Fonts of each window can be modified to the user s preference The font selected will also be that used to print results To change the fonts on a window first make that window active From the Options Menu select Choose Fonts or click on the Font t
157. b properties apply Needles Needles can be displayed in a variety of shapes and sizes Properties are used to modify the needle s style length width color and associated scale Multiple needles can be placed on a single gauge ne Properties Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts Frames Hubs f Needles i Scales Tics GMS Needles 1 E MouseControl 0 None NeedlelD fo Style 1 Triangle ScalelD 0 e iv Clip Value offi Length 2 00 Width a E gt 0 36 User Defined Shape es bh Color Determines the color for the needle currently selected by NeedlelD Needle Digital Enables or disables the digital display of the value for the needle currently selected by NeedlelD NeedleDigitalColor Enables or disables the digital display of the value for the needle currently selected by NeedlelD Version 4 0 0 192 Part Five Monitors NeedlesDigitalDecimals Determines how many decimal places are displayed in the digital display if NeedleDigital T RUE of the needle currently selected by NeedlelD NeedleDigitalFontID Determines which font is used in the digital display for the needle currently selected by NeedlelD Needle Digital X Needle Digital Y Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the digital display for the needle currently selected by the NeedlelD property These properties are based on a unitless scale and ty
158. caleStopAngle The converse is true if ScaleDirection is set to backward counter clockwise Version 4 0 0 203 Part Five Monitors ScaleOriginX ScaleOrigin Y Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the center of the scale These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located in the center of the control ScaleStartAngle ScaleStopAngle Determines the angular extents of the scale When ScaleDirection is set to forward the ScaleStartAngle corresponds to ScaleMinValue and when ScaleDirection is set to backward the ScaleStartAngle corresponds to ScaleMaxValue The ScaleStopAngle property behaves in a similar fashion Tics Tics are used to mark intervals on the control face Properties are provided to set the tic s style start stop values interval inner outer radii width color and label positions n Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts Fame Knob Mak Scale Auto Tic Enabled Tics 711 E sm TicCount MajorTics B TicSubCount MajorTics fo Font o Labels Style 0 Rectange x V On Off Rotated Attached Position 1 gt fr o6 Position Size gt Range Inner _ gt f 0 80 StatValue j0 Dute j0 70 StopValue j10 Width o 00 DeltaValue EX Attached Determines whether or not the tic set currently s
159. cess N B In order to be able to view the configuration of a data source the user must have at least read access to all channel types within the data source Preventing a user from monitoring one or more channel types within a data source also prevents them from reading ANY part of the configuration for that data source For example if there exists a device on the system called DEVICE1 and it has a device number of 1 and has the following channel types Devicel Analog Input Channels Devicel Digital Input Channels Devicel Analog Output Channels Devicel Digital Output Channels and you want the user to be able to monitor only input channel types and have no access to other channel types then grant the user read access to the ai and di channel type files and No Access to the ao and do channel type files Protecting the System System Status Only users with Read and Write access to ALL Devices Processors and Loggers within the Orchestrator system can Enable Disable or Reconfigure the system from the Orchestrator main menu 453 Appendix B Security Users who have Read and Write access to a particular device or processor may reconfigure that data source from the Control menu of its configuration screen Only users who have Read and Write access to a particular logger may enable or disable that logger either from its configuration screen or from the Control Loggers screen within Orchestrator Main Me
160. channels to be imported the file to import from etc Export the Calculator Configuration Select Export Configuration from the File Menu to export channel configuration to an ASCII file This command presents an Export dialog box where you may specify the range of channels to be exported the file to export to Version Error Reference source not found 72 Part Four Configuring Processors etc Export Configuration Export Options 4 Header Cancel Value Width E Value Precision 4 Delimiter COMMA End Line CR LF Export File C configuation csv l 3 Channel Range All Channels 1000 Channels Import Export Dialog The Import Export dialog allows the user to configure how channel configurations will be imported exported User settings are saved and are used as default settings the next time the dialog is invoked Header If Header is checked column headers will be exported with the configuration these headers make it easier to identify the contents of each column Value Width Results are stored in the Systems Log Files with full floating point precision The actual width of the number passed can be modified In the Value Width text box enter or edit the total number of digits including the decimal point required If the value when converted is greater than the width defined the value will be converted to Scientific notation Value Precision In this box enter the number of digit
161. chestrator Main Menu s Devices menu corresponds to the print name field in the devcap txt file Here s an example of the devcap txt entry for a Generic device number 2 447 Appendix B Security gener 2 Generic Device EI 1000 EO 1000 From this we can deduce that the configuration sub directory for the Generic device is CURRENT CONFIGWgener 2 Configuration Sub Directory Processors The configuration sub directory name for processors is very similar to that of devices with the exception that processors do not have the trailing underscore and device number combination found on device configuration sub directories The processor configuration sub directory simply consists of the processor name Processor names can be found in the datproc txt file located in the Orchestrator CURRENT CONFIG directory Each processor in the Orchestrator system has a single line entry in the datproc txt file which has the following format processor name print name channel range runtime option This time we are only interested in the first field of the entry The name you see in the Orchestrator Main Menu s Processor menu corresponds to the processors print name field in the datproc txt file Here s an example of the datproc txt entry for the User Analog processor usera USER ANALOG CHANNELS A P 1000 From this we can deduce that the configuration sub directory for the User Analog processor is CURRENT_CONFIG USERA Configur
162. ck on the Browse button to select a server Version 4 0 0 158 Part Five Monitors Configuring the Alarm Display Options The information displayed in each Alarm Monitor Window can be selected from the Edit Monitor Properties dialog box under the Display Fields Tab The page looks like the following Edit New Monitor Properties E S Selection Criteria Display Fields Color and Sound Intemet Server Tag Description V Alarm State IV Value Alam Date Clear Ack Time Clear Ack Date Alarm Message Display Format Options Long Date Format Width Field Settings Selecting the various check boxes will turn on and off the optional fields A check mark indicates an option is selected Display Format Options Long Date Format Displays dates in their long format as defined in the Regional Settings applet in Control Panel Width The total number of figures including the decimal point to be used to display numeric fields in the alarm monitor Precision The number of decimal places to be used to display floating point numeric fields in the alarm monitor Version 4 0 0 159 Part Five Monitors Configuring Colour and Sound The Color and Sound tab allows the user to change the visual and audio options for the Alarm Monitor Color The user can select which background and foreground colors to use when drawing the different alarm types The default for all types is black text wi
163. control Color Determines the color of the frame surrounding the control s face Picture Determines the graphic to be displayed in the frame surrounding the control s face Frame Shape User Defined Determines the shape of a user defined frame and only applies when FrameStyle is set to User Defined In general it defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs This polygon is then scaled into the rectangle defined by FrameBottom FrameTop FrameLeft and FrameRight where the upper left corner is 0 0 and the lower right corner is 1000 1000 Version 4 0 0 279 Part Five Monitors Frame Style Determines the style of the control s frame Configuring Shapes By Right Clicking on the selected object and selecting Properties from the menu which appears an appropriate configuration dialog will appear Different dialogs will be displayed depending on the type of object selected Text shapes have different attributes than the other shapes Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Ellipse and Polygon Edit Text Properties Text Caption Alignment Left Y Font Name Fixedsys Font Size 9 Font Border Colour Ceai Y Thickness 1 iv Fill On Colour Ls Wy T Three D On Cancel Help Text Properties Configuration Dialog Text properties are divided into 3 sections a Text Field Description JA A Text description o
164. crosoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape Click the next button The Data Link properties tab will now look like the image below Version 4 0 0 333 Part Six Loggers r C Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to Oracle data 1 Enter a server name System Measuresoft com 2 Enter information to log on to the database User name SYSTEM Password eeeeece Blank password V Allow saving password ScccceccsscsnstMisccsecceedMtMecccscecssecsccssccsed In the Server name box enter the name of the Oracle database to be used In section 2 specify a Username and Password with appropriate permissions It is a good idea to click the test connection button as this will indicate if there are any problems connecting to the database Tables are automatically created in the SYSTEM Schema The LOGGERS table is always stored in the SYSTEM Schema All other tables can be stored in a schema by setting the table prefix to SchemaName Prefix eg SCOTT LOGGER_1 Note The Product
165. ct the General tab and configure the fields as follows MaxBufferSize 2000 DisplayMode 0 Pan Orientation 0 Horizontal CursorMode 0 Disabled Handles 3 Both Grids 3 Both Click Apply Step 8 Next we set up the Stamp Parameters of the Strip Chart Select the Stamp tab and configure the fields as follows Stamp Mode 1 Track Context Stamp Symbol 4 Diamond Stamp Color Black StampSymbolSize 0 03 Click Apply Version 4 0 0 275 Part Five Monitors Step 9 Next we set up the Caption of the Strip Chart Select the Caption tab and configure the fields as follows Captions 1 CaptionID 0 FontlD 0 Color White X Position 52 Y Position 04 Caption Strip Chart Example Click Apply Step 10 Lastly we set up the Background of the Strip Chart Select the Background tab and configure the fields as follows BackColor Dark Green Click Apply and then the OK button That s the Strip Chart Drawn Now to make it functional we must add a channel channels to it 1 Select Calculator from the Processors menu in the Main Menu Application menu 2 Set up a calculator channel C1 as follows with the following Formula ctime 2 3 Set up another calculator channel C2 as follows with the following Formula DSIN C1 floor C1 20 20 18 Right click on the Strip Chart and select Data source Properties You will be prompted with the Data Source Properties Dialog Box Setup the channel to be C2 the last cha
166. cted will also be that used to print results To change the fonts on a window first make that window active From the Options Menu select Choose Fonts or click on the Font tool button a dialogue box will appear From the options select the Font Font Style and the Size of the font r Font CX Font Microsoft Sans Senf Microsoft Uighur O Microsoft YaHei O Microsoft Yi Baiti O MingLiU O MingLiU HKSCS O MinaLiU HKSCS E B 7 Sample AaBbYyZz Script Westem Full Screen Mode An option provided by the Alarm Monitor application is to toggle whether the Alarm Monitor Window takes up the whole screen or part of the screen To switch to Full Screen mode choose Full Screen from the View Menu To switch back to normal mode hit the escape key Column Positioning Mentioned previously is the fact that each alarm channel has different attributes that appear in the ten different columns of the alarm monitor window To suit the users needs he she may drag a column to a different position within the window i e move the order of the column on the screen per channel monitor window To drag a column simply click on the header of the column you wish to move via the left mouse button Hold the left mouse button down over the header and drag the column to its new location Release the left mouse button and the column will now be positioned in the new order Version 4 0 0 166 Part Five Monitors The Context Menu Prev
167. d Then click on the Import button to select the required ASCII file The import task is launched as soon as the ASCII file has been successfully selected An Import In Progress will be displayed If you wish to stop the operation click on the Cancel button Program Arguments This application can accept command line arguments in 2 ways The Import Configuration file only ORI The application opens the previously saved configuration file and is ready to import an ASCII file The ASCII file and the Import Configuration file ORI in that order The application opens the previously saved configuration file and immediately launches the import task on the ASCII file File names with spaces must have quotes interpreted correctly wrapped around them to allow the names to be Editing Channel properties For each column of data enter the following Column Number The column number in which the data appears in the ACSII file Tag Enter up to 16 characters of tag information Version 4 0 0 371 Part Seven Replays Description Enter up to 32 characters of description information Units Enter up to 4 characters of units information A column may be imported more than once at a time For performance it is recommended that columns be imported sequentially When done click on the OK button The entry will be added to the list Version 4 0 0 372 Part Seven Replays Log File Synchronization This utility is use
168. d hexadecimal integer using abcdef Unsigned hexadecimal integer using ABCDEF Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or Identical to the e format except that E rather than e introduces the exponent Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits The number of digits before the decimal point depends on the magnitude of the number and the number of digits after the decimal point depends on the requested precision Signed value printed in f or e format whichever is more compact for the given value and precision The e format is used only when the exponent of the value is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision argument Trailing zeros are truncated and the decimal point appears only if one or more digits follow it Identical to the g format except that E rather than e introduces the exponent where appropriate Specifies a character string Characters are printed up to the first null character or until the precision value is reached 339 Part Six Loggers flags Optional character or characters that control justification of output and printing of signs blanks decimal points and octal and hexadecimal prefixes More than one flag can appear in a format specification A flag directive is a character that justifie
169. d the configuration of devices and processors can be modified Any modification will not be acted upon until either the system is disabled and enabled again The new configuration will be read from the disk and acted upon Alternately the Reconfigure option can be used to change the configuration without having to disable and enable the system The configuration of Devices can be modified and the devices can be reconfigured without the need for the system to be disabled and re enabled To Reconfigure the devices either choose the LI tool button or select Reconfigure from the Control menu Alternatively press the keys CTRL R whilst the window is active All processors except the Alarm System can be reconfigured in the same way as the devices Shortcut Keys CTRL R Initialise Channels Device channels can be configured to include the reference feature The reference facility allows channels to be referenced to a value of a particular state Choosing Initialise from the Control menu will define the reference value Subsequent readings on channels with the reference feature set will be offset by the values recorded when the Initialise option is selected Shortcut Keys CTRL l Reset Choosing Reset from the Control menu will reset any digital counters on all Devices Shortcut Keys CTRL T Autostart Choosing this option will toggle the feature off and on When selected i e a v appears alongside Autostart in menu list Once the config
170. d the tip of the needle is typically defined as 0 1000 NeedleStyle Determines the style of the needle currently selected by NeedlelD Version 4 0 0 193 Part Five Monitors Needle Value Determines the value of the needle currently selected by NeedlelD The NeedleValue is a number between ScaleMinValue and ScaleMaxValue The corresponding scale is referenced by the NeedleScalelD property Scales Scales are used to define the extent of the units displayed by the gauge the location of the gauge center and the gauge s start and stop angles Multiple scales are supported i Properties Co Library Background Annulars Captions Digtal Fonts Fames Hubs Needles Scales Tics eus Value Limits Direction Scales 1 uj Min 1 C Forward ScalelD 0 Ex Max 10 Backward Origin Position Angle x l 149 Start 4 _ gt 359 v gt 4 03 Stop _ X 2 Ges bh Scale Direction Determines the direction of increasing values from ScaleMinValue to ScaleMaxValue for the scale currently selected by ScalelD ScalelD When multiple scales exist ScalelD is used to index the scale to which the other scale properties apply The total number of scales is determined by the Scales property and ScalelD has valid values from 0 to Scales 1 ScalsMaxValue ScaleMin Value Determines the maximum and minimum values available in the scale currently selected by ScalelD If Scale
171. d to synchronise two log files with different channel sets In most cases the log files will have been created with different configurations including log file type duration and logging rates In addition two loggers configured identically and started at the same time may take logs at slightly different times depending on the load and performance of your system For these reasons a number of rules had to be decided upon for the behavior of the utility in various scenarios These rules are described below We have assumed that two files are loaded say Log A and Log B and these files are to be synchronized and merged into Log C Rules e Log A is to be used to define the scan times for the duration of Log A e Log B is to be used to define the scan times for any period outside the duration of Log A e If there is no value for Log B at a required scan time then the values from Log B will be interpolated using the value immediately before and after the required scan time If there is no value before or after the required scan time then the value is indeterminate and marked as in error Notes e n the case of log files which were logged at very different rates It is usually advisable to select the log file with the highest logging rate as the first log file i e Log A If Log A was selected to be the log file with the slowest scan rate It is possible that scans from Log B will be ignored rather than interpolated Version 4 0 0 373
172. defined as 0 1000 Selections Each switch may have several possible selections The user controls the caption color alignment and offset of each selection Additionally there are automatic features that define the control with minimal work required F Properties Selections 3 Selection lign 1 Right SelectionlD 2 ies FontiD 0 H NL Selection amp ngle 13360 SelectionOffsetX E _ 0 60 SelectionOffsetY m _ 0 00 SelectionRadius mi 0 80 SelectionCaption Start I Highlight Selection Highlight Color Version 4 0 0 237 Part Five Monitors SelectionAlign Sets the justification of the selection s caption currently specified by SelectionID SelectionAngle Determines the angle zero is north positive clockwise of the selection currently specified by SelectionID If AutoAngle zTRUE this property is ignored SelectionCaption Determines the text displayed for the selection specified by SelectionID The number of selections displayed on the control is set by the Selections property Color Determines the color of the SelectionCaption and its associated line currently specified by SelectionID FontID Determines which font is used in the caption for the selection currently specified by SelectionID Selections Determines the number of selections displayed on the control This property must be set before all other selection properties The S
173. dows displayed are visibly updated not just the active window Version 4 0 0 128 Part Five Monitors Opening Saving Closing Channel Monitor Windows Ll Channel Monitor SIMULATED File View Options Configuration Window Help g O New Ctrl N oy Ctrl 0 B Close E Else Ctrl S Save As z Page Setup amp Print Ctrl P Print Preview B 1 Print Prev Print Setup m Opening Channel Monitor Documents To open a saved Channel Monitor Document within the Channel Monitor Main Window choose Open Monitor from the File menu or click the mouse on the Open Monitor icon on the toolbar g Immediately after this you are presented with the Standard Windows File Open Dialog Box in which you can open a previously saved Channel Monitor Document by 1 Double clicking on the Saved Monitor s Name with the left mouse button 2 Click on the Saved Monitor s Name and then click the OK button with the mouse button Version 4 0 0 129 Part Five Monitors f Open a Lookin J MONITORS 4 ek Ey I Name Date modif Type Size ad This folder is empty Recent Places P Desktop aidan mallon LU Computer Network Files of type Channel Monitor Files mem v Cancel Open as read only Saving Channel Monitor Documents To save a Channel Monitor Document within the Channel Monitor Main Window first ensure the Window to be saved is the
174. e No Buffers z 3 Write To Disk Time secs 1000 Min Logging Rate If the minimum logging rate is 100ms and the Write To Disk Time is 1 Second then the recommended minimum number of buffers would be 3 1 1000 100 30 Logger Directory The Logger Directory button provides the means by which loggers can be created in a specific user defined directory The default switch saves the specific logger and log file in the default Orchestrator directory namely lt drive gt Orchestrator LOGGED_DATA The user defined switch provides the means of specifying an alternative user defined directory which MUST be held on the main Orchestrator server The browse button provides the means to browsing the local drive DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SELECT A NETWORK DRIVE USE UNC FORMAT AX server X share V INSTEAD Note that when configuring from a client the directory is the name as it applies from the server e g the C drive is the C drive on the server and not the C drive on the client The Orchestrator service must have access to the file path This can be achieved by specifying the Orchestrator service to log on as a user in the Services applet in the Control Panel The logger directory can include channel values See Including Channel Values below Logger Database When Database is selected from the Storage Type drop down on the General tab the Logger Database properties become available Orchestrator can log to potentially all types
175. e numbers We Need Two sets of Tics for this example one for the longer set and one for the short set Set the Value in Tics to be two We will now configure the first set of tics these are the larger ones configure the fields as follows Style Rectangular Float Offset 0 Labels ON OFF Checked Labels Postion 2 20 Inner 1 70 Outer 2 00 Width 0 00 Start Value 1 Stop Value 10 Delta 1 Click Apply You Will See the Large tics appear with the Labels i e Numbers on the outer rim of the Gauge Now Let us configure the second set of tics Configure the fields as follows Style Rectangular Float Offset 0 Labels ON OFF NOT Checked LABELS POSTION 2 20 Inner 1 90 Outer 2 00 Width 0 00 Version 4 0 0 198 Part Five Monitors Start Value 1 Stop Value 10 Delta 0 2 Click Apply Step 6 We Will Now configure the needle Select the Needles Tab and configure the fields as follows Needles 1 Mouse Control None Style 1 Triangle Value 1 Length 2 00 Width 0 36 Color Dark Blue Click Apply The Gauge is almost finished we just have to add a Hub that is the circular part at the end of the needle Step 7 To configure the hub select the hub tab and configure the fields as follows Hubs 1 HubID 0 ScalelDzO Radius 0 181 Color Black Click Apply That s the Gauge Drawn Now to make it functional we must add a channel to it First we must configure a Channel for the Gauge Select Calculator from
176. e and a trend configuration file If Replay Database Selection is made the user is prompted for a database log and a trend configuration file If Replay Last is selected the last layout trends is presented Version 4 0 0 378 Part Seven Replays Trends Window The trends window is split into several areas which are described in the following sections You may refer to the figure below for the names and positions of the different parts of the Trends Window Log File Bar ogge Name LOGGER 1 File Name 070228 115517 odi Start Time 28 02 2007 11 55 17 Stop Time 28 02 2007 12 23 17 Test Room 3 Reustance Test andet Tas Le 1 Header Test Bar Lre 3 E Cursor Time Date 5 28 02 2007 11 57 18 013 Test End C Cursor gged Tex Cursor Channel 30 s 7703 Logged Text Values 106 10006 4 sam S am aa gt A 200 2 Hl x r AX 7 AA aA A FAN ix AT VI M ad a ea Ct M A OAL Gay TAY Trend Area FAN PA eX X pex A PR te Wi Ww an MA OU Ju Wi A r To VA Pa 150 p 20 PA FA 290 t Cursor 3 PA 4 A LI A A X A v4 1 jJ 1 i l 2 X M 4 V w b vV V Vv om Trends X Axis 1155 30 i 126600 1 57 00 15 52 30 Logged Te 1 ogged Text Z Areg i j z B 3 f E w E Calot hannal Tag Description its I c Sane Wave DSIN IC1 4ficodC 1 20 20 18 Legend 3 C3 010 Zero 1o Ten Courter Menu Area d C5 0100 Zeto to Hundred Counts Each of the constituent part
177. e asked to save any unsaved modified Alarm Monitor Documents If you don t save a new Alarm Monitor Window it will not be re opened the next time you launch the Alarm Monitor Application Version 4 0 0 155 Part Five Monitors Exiting the Alarm Monitor Application To close the Alarm Monitor Application either click the X button on the Application Window title bar or choose Exit from the File menu If there are any non saved Alarm Monitor Windows in your workspace or if you have made any alterations to an Alarm Monitor Window you will be issued with save requests for them The layout of the Alarm Monitor Main Windows will be maintained and when launched again will revert to the last configuration Printing Information Printing the Active Alarm Monitor Alarm results can be printed on the systems printer if required Choose Print from the File menu or click the Print tool button A print Dialog Box will appear Print NR Printer Name HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Where 192 168 1 167 Comment Print to file Print range Copies C AI Number of copies C Pages from 1 to Selection Help From this box under the grouping of Print Range select ALL if all channels are to be printed or Pages entering the start and stop page numbers if only a block of alarms are to be printed It is normally acceptable to select the lower print
178. e file It is not necessary for the database to exist before enabling the logger The logger can automatically create the database but if a database already exists the logger will add a new tables to the database Some databases may have security restrictions on them If this is the case it may be necessary to provide authentication information The test connection button will check that the logger can connect to the Database For Microsoft Access the Provider should be set to Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider On the advanced tab access permissions for the Database can be granted Note it is not necessary to have Microsoft Access installed on the machine where the data is being logged The logger can create and log to an Access database even if Access is not present Logging to a SQL Server Database From the General tab of the logger configuration select Database from the storage type drop down list On the advanced tab the Database properties should now be configurable The connection string can be edited manually by changing the text in the user defined text box below The logger can automatically create the connection string by clicking the select button and selecting the properties you require Target Version 4 0 0 325 Part Six Loggers Is the connection string to the target database on which the logger will replicate tables The connection string can be changed using the select button Replication Replication is only avai
179. e following table if a data source has more than one channel type file then use the minimum access right of all the channel type files within the data source Configuration File Channel Type Files Minimum Access Result RW RW User can read or change configuration and monitor or set channel values RW R The user can only read the configuration can monitor or set values of channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read and Write access to and can only monitor channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read access to RW The user cannot read the configuration can monitor or set values of channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read and Write access to can only monitor channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read access to and cannot see channel types whose corresponding files s he has No access to RW User can only read configuration and monitor or set values for all channel types User can only read configuration can monitor or set values of channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read and Write access to and can only monitor channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read access to The user cannot read the configuration can monitor or set values of channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read and Write access to can only monitor channel types whose corresponding files s he has Read access to and cannot see channel types whose
180. e header text at the top of the trend window Header Logo When header text is switched on it is possible to add a logo to the header bar When header Logo is check the header logo properties can be configured at the bottom of the Trends Options dialog These options are described in the Advanced Options section below Logged Text If the logger is configured as a Text Logger then switching on this option shows any logged text and allows the user to enter logged text Time Based Options These options are specific to Time Based Trends Time Scroll Bar The scroll bar allowing horizontal panning can be de selected Initial Time Frame Selecting a suitable Time Frame from the drop down list defines the width of the x axis If OFF is chosen and the logger that created the file is not active disabled the best time base frame suitable for the file will be chosen automatically The Time frame options are Version 4 0 0 381 Part Seven Replays 50 years 6 months 16 days 24 hours 60 mins 60 secs 25 years 2 months 8 days 16 hours 30 mins 30 secs 12 years 1 month 4 days 8 hours 15 mins 15 secs 8 years 2 days 4 hours 8 mins 8 secs 4 years 2 hours 4 mins 4 secs 2 years 2 mins 2 secs 1 year 1 sec If a logger is still adding scans to the log then a suitable time frame should be selected before the logged file is selected Absolute Time Elapsed Time The time axis annotation determines
181. e mark s style inner outer radii width and color Additionally user defined mark shapes may be incorporated into the control Fr Properties Captions Fonts Frame Selections GMS MarkColor MarkPicture MarlnnerRadius gt 0 50 Mark uterRadius E 0 80 Makwidh gt 0 40 MarkStyle jo None MarkUserDefined MarkColor Determines the knob mark s color Version 4 0 0 236 Part Five Monitors MarkInnerRadius MarkOuterRadius Determines the inner and outer radii of the knob s mark The scale of these properties is based on the knob s size For example an inner radius of 0 0 and an outer radius of 1 0 yields a mark from the knob s center to its outer edge MarkPicture Determines the graphic to be displayed as the mark on the control s knob MarkStyle Determines the style of the knob s mark MarkWidth Determines the width of the knob s mark This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 MarkUserDefined Determines the shape of a user defined knob or mark This property only applies when KnobStyle 4 for knobs or when MarkStyle 4 for marks This property defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs comma delimited The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the center of the knob and the pointer of the knob or tip of the mark is typically
182. e original logged data file can be exported or just a selection If All Channels is selected then the Channel blocks will show all the channels to be converted If all channels are not required chose Selected Channels from the drop down list Initially all the channels in the logged data file will be shown in their blocks To edit each block point to it and click the mouse An Enter Selected Log Channels dialog box will appear Version 4 0 0 359 Part Seven Replays Replay Channels ALL CHANNELS Configure Channel Lists Q1 8 j i j Channel lists can also be used for export click the drop down and choose a predefined channel list which will contain a list of channels for use in the export Click Configure Channel Lists to configure create a list for export Trend images can be used for export to excel spreadsheets if associated with a channel list name For example in the image below two trend buttons Trendi and Trend2 can be seen To incorporate a trend image for export a naming convention with channel lists must be used This is the name of the two trends required separated by an ampersand amp Replay Channels Daily Choke amp Daily Hates Configure Channel Lists Trendi Trend In the example above two trends called Daily_Choke ort and Daily Rates ort are stored in the Trends directory The channel list is named to specifiy both these trends separated by an a
183. e the shape of the percentage gauge let us make it tank shaped Select the Frame tab and configure the fields as follows Frame Style User Defined Color Black Frame Coordinates Top 0 05 Bottom 20 95 Right 20 95 Left 0 05 User Defined 0 200 200 0 800 0 1000 200 1000 800 800 1000 200 1000 0 800 Step 3 We will now configure the Portions select the portions tab and configure the fields as follows Portions 1 PortionID 0 PortionColor Bright Green Digital Style Fixed DigitalFormat 0 1f PortionDigitalColor Red Step 4 We will now configure the orientation and direction of the percentage gauge we want this to fill from the bottom up so select the Misc Tab and configure the fields as follows Direction Backward Orientation Vertical Version 4 0 0 231 Part Five Monitors Display Mode Linear PercentMode Percent MouseControl Snap To Start Angle 0 Note we will be using this percentage gauge with the channel as used with the other examples therefore the max value will be 10 Min 0 Max 10 Step 5 We will now configure the Outline and Background Color of the percentage gauge select the Background Tab and configure the fields as follows BevelWidth 2 BoderWidth 2 Bevellnner None BevelOuter Lowered Step 6 Now that the Percentage Gauge has been configured we must assign it a data channel use the channel from the previous examples by right clicking on the percentage
184. e the system is restarted the values which were previously in each channel will be restored to the appropriate channel number By Tag Channel values can be saved and restored to channels using the channel tag as the reference instead of the channel number In this way channels can be rearranged within the modules and as long as the channel tags remain the same the correct channel values will be restored to the appropriate channel number Saving the Configuration When a configuration has been completed it must be saved to retain any changes made To save either 1 Click on the Save icon The Data Exchange configuration will be saved to the current Orchestrator System configuration No File Name will be requested 2 Select Save from the File menu 3 Select Exit from the file menu If any changes have been made a dialog box will ask if you want to save the configuration before exiting the window NB Any changes to the Data Exchange Channel Configuration will not be incorporated into the Orchestrator System until it is next enabled or the processor is reconfigured Copy and Paste Two of the icons on the Configure Data Exchange toolbar are Copy and Paste From the Data Exchange Configuration Window it is possible to copy one channels configuration to another Point to the channel to be copied it will be highlighted click on the Copy icon the configuration will be copied to the clipboard Now point to the channel that the confi
185. e value we want to alter Select Change Value from the menu that appears You are then presented with a dialog box allowing you to enter the new value for the channel Modify Analog Variable Value OK Enter Value i Cancel Help Change the value and click the OK button The value will change on the next scan of the system Acknowledging an Alarm Ensure the monitor is not locked in the Monitor Menu Lock Monitor should not be checked Right click the mouse on the channel object which represents the channel whose value we want to alter Click on the Acknowledge Alarm option If in the Display options of the Channel Properties dialog you have the ACK Alarm field checked ACK appears beside the channel value Configuring Communication Settings The network can be edited for the Configurable Monitor software Two attributes of the client can be configured These are Recovery Rate Update Rate Version 4 0 0 283 Part Five Monitors Recovery Rate This specifies how long the client will wait for the server to recover Update Rate This specifies the rate at which the client will request data from the server This can be done on a Server or Source basis Update Rate Option Description Server Update Rate set for ALL sources on one particular server Source Update Rate set for a particular source on a particular server To Configure Orchestrator Communication Settings 1 Choose the Communicatio
186. e work you have done so far To enter in a link to the Alarm Monitor Document you created in Step 1 do the following 1 Enter a suitable name for the Link you are about to make to the Alarm Monitor File i e MachineName for example 2 Once you have entered a suitable name for the link highlight the entire link the text you have just entered 3 While the text is highlighted from the Toolbar select the Create or Edit Hyperlink icon amp You are then presented with the Edit HyperLink Dialog allowing you to enter the URL to jump to when you click on the link i e wb wd O a m Optional 4 Enter your domain address i e Version 4 0 0 167 Part Five Monitors http Awww yourcompany com msactivedocuments MachineName mal d po Eh Your Internet Address The directory and file you created Click OK Step 4 1 Save your work 2 When you have saved your work select preview from the tabs on the bottom left hand side of the screen 3 Click on your link and the Alarm Monitor Document will open embedded within Microsoft FrontPage 98 You can now repeat the process to enter in as many Links as you require To allow the page to be accessed from the Internet simply enter a link to the htm file you have just created on your webpage i e your company webpage Opening an ActiveX Document and run it across the LAN An easy way to open an Alarm Monitor ActiveX Document via your web browser is from the File
187. ect Status pay eer OK iStopped m Production Running Cancel Help Choose the required button and then select the OK button to confirm the change The digital output will be set on the next scan Acknowledging Channel In Alarm When a channel goes into alarm the Alarm Message for that channel will be shown on the status line of the Orchestrator main control Window This message will be latched on Even if the Alarm only lasts one scan the message will remain until acknowledged Even though the alarm annotation AHI or ALO for the channel entry in the monitors page clears as soon as the alarm clears To acknowledge an Alarm and hence remove the Alarm Message from the Orchestrator Window select the appropriate channel in the Channel Monitor Window There are then 3 ways to acknowledge the Channel in Alarm they are 1 Press the keys CTRL and A together 2 Choose Acknowledge Alarm from the Options menu 3 Click with the mouse on the Acknowledge Alarm icon within the toolbar y The message will disappear off the Orchestrator Window If the Channel is still in an Alarm state when it is acknowledged the message will still be cleared off the Orchestrator Window In the Channel Monitor Version 4 0 0 134 Part Five Monitors Window the indicator ACK will be added to the channel information When the channel next goes into a non alarm state the ACK indicator will be removed Version 4 0 0 135 Part Five M
188. ect a logger point to the icon representing 4 LOGGER 1 the logger required and release the left mouse button over it or Go to the Start Menu then Programs and release the mouse over the Orchestrator icon Once Orchestrator launches you can select the Loggers menu You can select the Logger you wish to run from this list or From the Logger menu select the first option in the list Control Loggers The resulting dialog box shows the current status of all available loggers Version 4 0 0 294 Part Six Loggers r PRODUCT NAME Logger Control Name Status Activity Scan No LOGGER 1 Enabled Logaing 1213 LOGGER 2 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 3 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 4 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 5 Disabled Not Started LOGGER_6 Disabled Not Started LOGGER Disabled Not Started LOGGER 8 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 3 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 10 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 11 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 12 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 13 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 14 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 15 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 16 Disabled Not Started aco cacao cacao ao mG Double Click On Logger To Configure CONTROL PANEL Cycle Force Close Help From this dialog box point to the logger to configure and double click the mouse button The result from either method of selecting a logger to configure is the same a Logger Configuration Dialog box Once
189. ection Name Select the printer you want to use From the drop down box choose from one of the available printers on your system If none are available contact your system administrator or set up a new printer using the control panel applet See the Operating instructions provided with your computer operating system Orientation Choose Portrait for a long printer orientation or Landscape for a wide printer orientation Paper Size Select the size of paper that the document is to be printed on Paper Source Some printers offer multiple trays for different paper sources Specify the tray here Network Choose this button to connect to a network location assigning it a new drive letter Saving a Trend Configuration When a Trend has been configured satisfactorily the settings can be saved The saved configurations can be used again on different logged files if necessary Use one of the following methods to save the configurations File Save As Choose from the File menu File Save As A File Save As dialog box will appear The following options allow you to specify the name and the location of the file you are about to save Version 4 0 0 401 Part Seven Replays Save in J TRENDS v 4 ex Ear Name Date modif Type Size demotrend Save as type Trend Files ort x Cancel File name Type a new filename to save a document with a different name A filename can contain up to 253 characters
190. ecurity 446 Appendix B Security Orchestrator Security There are several methods in Orchestrator for preventing certain users from accessing part or all of the Orchestrator system configuration monitoring data sources changing channel values or changing the state of the system enabling disabling or reconfiguring the system It is recommended that only your Orchestrator SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR configure protection on your Orchestrator system as a mistake can have disastrous consequences Prerequisites Orchestrator security can only be implemented on an Orchestrator server which has been installed on an NTFS disk partition The reader should be familiar with setting up user accounts using the Windows User Manager facility and setting user permissions on files and directories using the Windows Explorer For details on either of these utilities see your Microsoft Windows documentation User accounts should be set up for each user who will monitor or configure the Orchestrator system Rights for these users will be set on certain files in the Orchestrator CURRENT_CONFIG directory in order to allow or prevent access to certain parts of the system A detailed knowledge of the Orchestrator directory structure would be preferable Files discussed in this manual SHOULD NOT BE EDITED OR RENAMED To do so may render the Orchestrator system inoperable and require technical assistance from your vendor in order to fix File Location In order
191. ed per time basis only check Date of Text Logs to have the date associated with the data Excel Worksheet XLS files Version 4 0 0 311 Part Six Loggers Text logs from the data log file will be exported into a worksheet called TEXTLOGS The default includes the time beside the text log Date Time of Text Logs Check this box to specify the date and time of the text log Long Date Format on Header Sheet If this check box is checked the date will have long date formatting performed E G Monday August 01 2004 11 25 39 If the box is not checked the short format will be used The date has the form MM DD YY E G 08 27 04 15 45 23 Data Logs Sheet To include actual logged data check the Data Logs Sheet check box the following options in this section include additional ways to format the data for export Column Headers Column Headers alone display the channel number and prefix of the logged channel Check Header Tags to display the tag of the channel and not the channel number check Header Units to include the units on the next line Date Time Column Time Base Three time base options are available The time selected appears in the spreadsheets first column of each scan The choices are Elapsed Time Differential Time and Absolute Time Date If this check box is checked the date column will be included in the exported data logs Date Long Date Format if this check box is checked dates will have the long format Long
192. ed server The list can be hierarchical or flat depending on the servers browse settings r Select an Item Access Path DK Item Name Random n Cancel eee URS Filter E Item Properties SIMULATED Secs USER ANALOG CHANNELS Sine Wave USER DIGITAL CHANNELS 22 CALCULATED CHANNELS HISTORY CHANNELS SYSTEM ERROR CHANNELS DATA EXCHANGE Assign Chans 1 sec Pulse 2 sec Pulse 3 sec Pulse 4 sec Pulse 1st Switch 2nd Switch 3rd Switch Access Path Enter the access path of the OPC Data Item This is the access path that the server should associate with this item By convention if this is left blank the server should select the access path Version 4 0 0 431 Part Ten Data Exchange DDE If the user selects the DDE option button the Application Topic and Item fields are displayed as below Type Application Topic Item Read Quality The user must complete these fields were Application identifies the DDE server application Topic the group of data points of interest and Item the actual data point of interest Windows Buttons Eight buttons are at the bottom of the Configure Data Exchange Channel Window Their use is explained c c o 2 When a channel has been successfully configured click the OK button to accept and move back to the previous window Cancel d Clicking on the Cancel button will nullify any changes made The configuration of that channel will remain t
193. ed to pan through a graph Normal windows techniques should be used Examining Real Time Data If a Trend is being displayed with an active live data log i e scans are still being added the ORCHESTRATOR Trends facility can still be used to examine the scans already stored on disk When a suitable Time Base Frame has been selected the graph with the configured lines will be shown up to the last scan on disk As each new scan is recorded the lines will be extended When the lines reach the end of the Window the time base is panned forward automatically so that the most recent data fills approximately the first half of the screen The new data is shown to the right as it is collected The value boxes will show the last recorded values of each of the channels included in the Trend If a Logger Stop Time is reached or the logger is manually disabled the graph will remain to allow interrogation of the data If the logger is configured for cyclic operation the graph will remain on the Trend Window after the end of a cycle It will be replaced automatically with a display when the cycle starts again Enter a Text Log If the logged data chosen is configured as a Text Logger See Part Six of this manual for details of configuring a text logger this dialog allows you to enter a text log into a time based Trend Enter a Text Log at the Current Time Real Time Data Files only To enter a text log at the current time ensure the Cursor is cleared S
194. ed window Help menu commands The Help menu offers the following commands which provide you assistance with this application Help Topics Offers you an index to topics on which you can get help About Displays the version number of this application Version 4 0 0 147 Part Five Monitors Alarm Monitor Overview Terminology Alarm Monitor Main Window The Alarm Monitor Main Window manages a workspace of child Alarm Monitor Windows Alarm Monitor Window An Alarm Monitor Window displays all alarms that are being derived from a given Server It is associated with a Alarm Monitor Document i e An Alarm Monitor Window is actually a Document File Alarm Monitor Document Stores persistent information about the monitor i e how and what it displays Introduction The Alarm Monitor application in provides real time indications of channels that are in alarm or have previously exceeded their configured alarm limits The Alarm Monitor can display all alarm occurrences since the system was enabled All alarms can be acknowledged and the common alarm cancelled The Alarm Monitor has a client server architecture which allows it to monitor alarms from remote system servers Windows Sound files can be associated with Alarm Monitor Windows so that the user can be provided with audio as well as visual feedback The Alarm Monitor can only show alarms if the Alarm System is enabled See Alarm System Configuration To invoke the Alarm M
195. ee Clearing the Cursor earlier in this section Then click the right mouse button over the Trend Area and select Enter Text Log option on the menu which follows Click on the Log at Current Time to log text at the current system time and then click the OK button to enter the log The current time is calculated as soon as the OK button is clicked Enter Text Log at the Cursor Position Place the Cursor in the area of the trend where the Text Log is to be entered Then click the right mouse button over the Trend Area and choose Enter Text Log command from the edit menu In the dialog which follows the time field in the dialog is set to the time at which the cursor is set Enter the text as before and click the OK button Version 4 0 0 395 Part Seven Replays EXE Tea log z y Text Logging 7j Hep O Manual LogatTime 15 10 2009 12 06 45 Log at Current Time Position within Graph Area O bottom to 1002z top 50 If the Logged Text option is enabled in the Trends Options dialog see earlier in this section for details then the logged text appears vertically at the bottom of the Trend Area Placing the Cursor over a text log shows the text log in the value bar where the text is more clearly visible Instead of typing a text log the user can select a message from the list of predefined messages These are defined when the logger is being configured see Part Six of this man
196. eft hand side of the application Preview allows you to preview the work you have done so far To enter in a link to the Configurable Monitor Document you created in Step 1 do the following 1 Enter a suitable name for the Link you are about to make to the Configurable Monitor File i e ConfigMonDoc1 for example 2 Once you have entered a suitable name for the link highlight the entire link the text you have just entered 3 While the text is highlighted from the Toolbar select the Create or Edit Hyperlink icon 4 You are then presented with the Edit HyperLink Dialog allowing you to enter the URL to jump to when you click on the link i e ua fet GS r Optional 4 Enter your domain address i e http www yourcompany com msactivedocuments ConfigMonDoc1 orm Your Internet Address The directory and file you created Click OK Version 4 0 0 288 Part Five Monitors Step 4 1 Save your work 2 When you have saved your work select preview from the tabs on the bottom left hand side of the screen 3 Click on your link and the Configurable Monitor Document will open embedded within Microsoft FrontPage98 You can now repeat the process to enter in as many Links as you require To allow the page to be accessed from the Internet simply enter a link to the htm file you have just created on your webpage i e your company webpage Opening an ActiveX Document and run it across the
197. either numeric or alphanumeric values With its data aware features the Numeric LED is an ideal element for technical interfaces Time Codes hh mm ss IRIG BEEEEE Bank Clock YCR Clock Je 1 r i L General r Properties Digs 5 Decimalsize 4 _OffColor Decimals 1 MalicsOffset g OnColor DecimalPosition 0 Segment pssels LeadingZeros LeadingOneDigit 3 M LeadingPlusMinus FixedDecimal Width Separation DisplayMode O Numeric w Spacing pixels 5 5 ic 0 i Marsi hid ells Horizontal Vertical Digits Determines the total number of figures displayed in the control Decimal Position Determines how many decimal places the displayed value will have if FixedDecimal is TRUE Version 4 0 0 222 Part Five Monitors Decimals Determines the number of digits which display decimal values in the control Decimal Size Determines the size in pixels of the decimal point if it is displayed Italic Offset Determines the slant of the digital display which simulates an italic font Off On Colour Determines the colors used in the On and Off portions of the control Leading Zeros Determines whether or not the display is filled with leading zeros Leading Plus Minus Determines whether or not the display has the plus minus symbols Leading One Digit Determines whether or not the digital display has a leading one
198. elds as follows Style Rectangular Bandlnner 20 40 BandOuter 20 60 BandStart 5 BandStop 7 BandColor Yellow Set the BandID to 3 and configure the fields as follows Style Rectangular Bandlnner 20 40 BandOuter 20 60 BandStart 7 BandStop 10 BandColor Red Step 4 Next we will configure the tics that is the numeric labeling on the gauge Select the tic tab and configure the fields as follows Tics 21 ScalelD 0 TicID 20 FontlD 0 Label on Label Position 20 20 StartValue 1 StopValue 10 DeltaValue 1 Inner 0 4 Outer 20 6 Width 20 0 Color Black Step 5 Now we will configure the Pointers select the pointers tab and configure the fields as follows Pointers 1 PointerlD 0 ScalelD 0 Style Pointer Type Value Mouse Control Relative Inner 0 45 Outer 0 85 Width 0 04 Value 1 StartPosition 1 StopPosition 10 Step 6 The Gauge has now been configured now we must assign a channel to it right click on the gauge and select data source properties form the popup menu Assign the Channel that we used in the previous example Use the Knob we made in a previous example to change the values and see these changes reflected on the gauge Version 4 0 0 221 Part Five Monitors Numeric LED s The Numeric LED control provides a highly customizable digital display Its dynamic property pages provide full control of the control s sizes colors and bitmaps It may be used to display
199. elected by TiclID moves with the control s knob Color Determines the color for the tic set currently selected by TiclD Delta Value Determines the interval value between tic marks for the tic set currently selected by TiclD Version 4 0 0 204 Part Five Monitors FontiD Determines which font is used for the labels of the tic set currently selected by TicID TiclD When multiple tic sets exist TicID is used to index the tic sets to which the other tic properties apply The total number of tic sets is determined by the Tics property and TicID has valid values from 0 to Tics 1 Inner Outer Radius Determines the inner and outer radii of the tic set currently selected by TicID These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Tic Label Enables or disables labels at each tic mark for the tic set currently selected by TicID The position of the tic labels is defined by the TicLabelRadius property Tic Label Radius Determines the radius at which TiclD displays the labels for the tic set currently selected This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Tic Label Rotated Determines whether the labels for the tic set currently selected by TiclD are oriented with respect to the control or the tic mark Both orientations are shown in the figure below This feature is useful when trying to display a floating instrument an instrument whe
200. electionID property is used to choose the selection to which the selection properties apply SelectionID When multiple selections exist SelectionID is used to index the selection to which the other selection properties apply The total number of selections is determined by the Selections property and SelectionID has valid values from 0 to Selections 1 SelectionOffset X Y Defines an x y pair that is used to determine the length of the offset when AutoOffset FALSE of the current selection defined by SelectionID If the LineDisplayz TRUE then there is an x y pair that is defined by SelectionAngle and SelectionRadius This point is shown below as a red dot The control uses SelectionOffsetX and SelectionOffsetY to define an additional x y pair relative to the first pair shown as a blue dot These two points define the line that is drawn as the offset These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 Selection Radius Determines the radius from the center of the selector at which the labels are displayed for the current selection specified by SelectionID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Additionally the SelectionOffsetX and SelectionOffsetY properties if AutoOffset FALSE may be used to modify the label location in order to increase readability or for purely cosmetic reasons Highlight Determines whether the selection s
201. ells that has the same number of columns as the array has For example to transfer C1 C2 and C3 into 3 cells 1 Select 3 columns on 1 row 2 Enter Orchdde channel c1 3 3 Press CTRL SHIFT ENTER instead of ENTER after entering the formula All 3 values should now update Note DDE arrays do not work if the elements are referenced twice e g if you also entered Orchdde channel ci1 in another cell in the same spreadsheet It is recommended to start with a new spreadsheet and get all the values in There is a limit of 255 values in one array but multiple arrays can be retrieved NOTE A syntax problem has been encountered with Microsoft Excel v5 0 using network DDE from Orchestrator and the following describes a procedure for working around the problem The syntax for connecting to channel C3 would be server ndde orcchannel c3 but this returns the message Error in formula To overcome this enter without the as server ndde orcchannel c3 and the cell will then display N A From the EDIT menu select Links and highlight the above link Choose Change source and add the to the end of NDDE and choose OK Click OK to close the Edit links box Version 4 0 0 411 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Microsoft Access Database Dynamic links can be created to link data into Microsoft Access reports and forms For example you can link a value or values into a report so that each time you print the report the current value s is i
202. ents and alarms and can be monitored and logged like any other Orchestrator Channel Version Error Reference source not found 65 Part Four Configuring Processors Alarm System Description When each channel is configured within Orchestrator fields are available within the configuration window of that channel type to define alarm and warning limits for that particular channel Once the system is enabled the alarm status of each channel will be shown along side its entry on its respective monitor window If any channel included in a logger configuration goes into an alarm state then the log record will be annotated with the alarm status The Alarm System if enabled allows the alarms to be reported to an Alarm Monitor An Alarm status line at the bottom of the Orchestrator Window will display the last four channels to go into alarm The user can via the Alarm Monitor Window acknowledge these alarms and also see what time the alarm occurred and its duration When configuring channel alarm levels in the various configuration windows the user has the option of checking a Drive Common Alarm box If this is selected and the Alarm System is enabled then an output from a Device digital output module can be configured to go high whenever any of those channels exceed their alarm levels The output can be used to drive an alarm bell or warning lamp to advise operators that an alarm has occurred The Alarm System can also be configured to record
203. er option is available If this is chosen enter the delimiting character in the text box that appears alongside the list Value Wiath Results are stored in the ORCHESTRATOR Log Files with full floating point precision The actual width of the number passed can be modified In the Value Width text box enter or edit the total number of digits including the decimal point required If the value when converted is greater than the width defined the value will be converted to Scientific notation Value Precision In this box enter the number of digits after the decimal point Delimiter Three options and a User Defined alternative are available in this drop down list The delimiter separates each field in a row The correct delimiter is required for the spreadsheet package to import the data correctly The choices are Comma Space Tab User Most modern spreadsheets including Excel and Lotus use the Comma separator As an alternative to the fixed choices a User option is available If this is chosen enter the delimiting character in the text box that appears alongside the list Version 4 0 0 366 Part Seven Replays Exporting Data When all configurations have been completed choose the Export button A Select Data Export Output File dialog box will be presented r li Select Data Export Output File Save in E Computer e e Egy i Name Type s Total Size Free Space z ud om Hard Disk Drives 3 Local Disk C
204. erpretation of precision and the default when precision is omitted as shown in the table below How Precision Values Affect Type Type Meaning The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to be printed If the number of digits in the argument is less than precision the output value is padded on the left with zeros The value is not d i u O X X truncated when the number of digits exceeds precision The precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point The last digit is rounded e E f The precision value specifies the number of digits after the decimal point If a decimal point appears at least one digit appears before it The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits g G The precision specifies the maximum number of significant digits S The precision specifies the maximum number of characters to be printed Characters in excess of precision are not used Version 4 0 0 Default Default precision is 1 Default precision is 6 if precision is O or the period appears without a number following it no decimal point is used Default precision is 6 if precision is O or if the period appears without a number following it no decimal point is used Six significant digits are output with any trailing zeros truncated All characters are used 341 Part Six Loggers Reloading Logger Configuration To reload the initial con
205. es the text orientation for the X tic labels Choices are Horizontal VerticalLeft and VerticalRight Offset Determines the spacing between the X axis and the tic labels It is based on a unitless scale where 0 is no offset and a offset of 1 is equal to the height of the drawing region defined by AreaBottom AreaLeft AreaRight and AreaTop TicColor Determines the color used for the tic marks and tic labels for the X Axis of the control Xspan The XSpan property sets the viewable extents of the X Axis When you are using the X Axis to display Time setting XSpan 1 is equivalent to setting it to 24 hours For instance if you want to display 5 seconds of data on the viewable area you would set XSpan 0 00005787037037037 1 24 60 60 5 XSpan sets the width extents of the plot when the plot is configured horizontally and the height extents when it is configured vertically Last X Holds the value of the last X value When XTicMode is set to Time Date you will usually want to set LastX to the current time This is done automatically for you Major Tics Determines the desired number of major tic marks for the X Axis of the control The control will force the tic delta to be within a specific power of ten and will space the tics at the closest natural interval multiples of 1 2 or 5 depending on XSpan Minor Tics Determines the number of minor tic marks drawn between major tic marks Time amp Date Formats As you zoom in
206. esent in the Alarm Monitor Window Version 4 0 0 160 Part Five Monitors Click the OK button to create a new alarm window or update the current window s properties Version 4 0 0 161 Part Five Monitors Alarm Handling Alarms are latched on by the system until the user acknowledges the alarm The following sections describe how the monitor informs the user that there are unacknowledged alarms and how to acknowledge them Alarm Annunciation The Alarm Monitor has the ability to warn the user both visually and audibly As described earlier it is possible to have the active Alarm Monitor window always visible on the screen providing visual indication of alarm occurrences To activate the audible alarm annunciation the appropriate options must be configured for each Monitor window using the Monitors Options dialog box The audible indicator sounds whilst any alarm is unacknowledged in the active Alarm Monitor window The Audible indication of an alarm occurs even if the Alarm Monitor window or the Alarm Monitor Application is minimized In addition if the application is not in the foreground or is minimized then the alarm monitor title bar as well as its icon in the desktop task bar will flash continuously until all alarms in the monitor have been masked or acknowledged Once again this feature is not supported when the alarm monitor document is embedded in a third party application such as Internet Explorer or Microsoft Binde
207. est and provide accurate information about the time and the values of each line on the graph at that instance When the Cursor has been activated a vertical line will appear across the graph In the Date and Time box will appear the date and exact time at the position of the hair line In the Channel Value boxes will be shown the values of the respective channels at that point in time The mouse and keyboard cursor keys can be used Version 4 0 0 391 Part Seven Replays Using The Mouse To activate the cursor point the mouse to the point of interest and double click To reposition the hair line move the mouse cursor to the new position and double click the mouse Once a Cursor is present it an be Stepped one scan at a time using the right and left keyboard cursor keys Using Keyboard To activate the Cursor press the right keyboard cursor key The hair line will appear at the start of the line Use the right and left cursor keys to position the cursor To remove the Cursor press the ESC key or double click on the right mouse button Clearing the Cursor To remove the Cursor press the ESC key or click the right mouse button over the Trend Area and click Clear Cursor from the menu Selecting an Area of a Trend To select an area of a trend for exporting See Data Export later in this section or for Zooming see Zooming later in this section drag the mouse cursor over the area of the trend you wish to select A dashed box appears surrou
208. etermines the Index of the LED currently Being configured LEDStylelD Determines the style of the currently selected LED Value Determines the Value of the Current LED MouseControl Determines Whether Mouse Control is to be used or not Mode Select the Mode of the LED Direction Selects the Direction on which the LED lights up Version 4 0 0 255 Part Five Orientation Selects the Orientation of the LED AutoSize Selects the Way in which the LEDs are Auto sized LEDWidth Determines the Width of a single LED LEDHeight Determines the Height of a single LED LEDSeperation Determines the space between each LED MaxDecay Determines the Max Decay DecayRate Determines the Decay Rate of the LED Version 4 0 0 256 Monitors Part Five Monitors Drawing and LED Example As with the toggle there aren t many fields to be configured Draw the default LED and play around with the fields to get a feel for them Version 4 0 0 257 Part Five Monitors Navigation Buttons Description A Navigation button is an on off Toggle used to launch other monitors from the one you are currently using Off g Note See the Toggles Configuration Fields for Details on the Visual Display Properties as they are identical Navigation Properties To bring up this dialog right click on the button and choose Navigation Properties Below is an explanation of the fields Version 4 0 0 258
209. etting will give you a stepped looking plot VariableFill Determines whether or not the data is represented by a shaded area bounded by the X axis and the curve Data will fill from the zero Y Value Version 4 0 0 265 Part Five Monitors VariableVisible Determines if the variable currently selected by VariablelD is displayed on the control LastX Holds the value of the last X value for the variable data set currently selected by VariablelD LineWidth Determines the thickness in pixels of the line used for the variable data set currently selected by VariablelD Color Determines the color of the pen used for the variable currently selected by VariablelD LineStyle Determines the style of the line used to connect the data points for the variable data set currently selected by VariablelD Symbol Determines the graphical representation of each data point for the variable data set currently selected by VariablelD VariableSymbolUserDefinedShape Determines the shape of the symbol used to represent the variable data set currently selected by VariablelD In general it defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs drawn in a 1000 to 1000 square region VariableSymbolSize may be used to adjust the symbol s size Version 4 0 0 266 Part Five Monitors X Axis ne Properties Library Background Captions Fonts enera Stamps Tracks TrackBands Variables XT
210. evels can be configured independent of each other All the values entered are in engineering units If a channel reading exceeds the High Alarm limit then an alarm will be triggered as it will if the channel goes below the Low Alarm limit When monitoring channels if the high or low alarm is triggered then the fact will be annotated alongside the other channel information in the Monitor Window Enable Alarm Checking Check either the Low Alarm Checking or High Alarm Checking or both check boxes to enable the facility Alarm Limit The value at which the channel will flag an alarm Warning and Limit Version 4 0 0 60 Part Three Delay Configuring Channels If required a warning can be displayed when a channel reaches a limit close to the alarm limit For low alarm checking the alarm limit must be less than the warning limit For high alarm checking the warning limit must be less than the alarm limit Specify the number of seconds the channel must be in the alarm zone before an alarm will be flagged within the system Hysteresis Priority Hysteresis can prevent noisy channels from reporting multiple alarms when the average reading is close to the alarm or warning threshold The Hysteresis value is relative to the alarm or warning limit For example if a channel s high alarm is set to 80 degrees C Hysteresis is enabled and a Hysteresis value of 5 degrees C is specified the system will respond as follows Whe
211. f KnobSnap TRUE For example a control where the knob scale ranges from 0 to 10 and KnobSnaplncrement 2 will only allow Knob Values of 0 2 4 6 8 and 10 KnobStyle Determines the style of the knob KnobUserDefined Mark User Defined Determines the shape of a user defined knob or mark This property only applies when KnobStyle 4 for knobs or when MarkStyle 4 for marks This property defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs comma delimited The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the center of the knob and the pointer of the knob or tip of the mark is typically defined as 0 1000 KnobValue Determines the value of the knob whose range is defined by the ScaleMinValue and ScaleMaxValue properties MouseControl Determines the type of mouse input to the control Mark Each knob may be adorned with a single mark Properties are provided to modify the mark s style inner outer radii width and color Additionally user defined mark shapes may be incorporated into the control MarkColor Determines the knob mark s color MarklnnerRadius MarkOuterRadius Determines the inner and outer radii of the knob s mark The scale of these properties is based on the knob s size For example an inner radius of 0 0 and an outer radius of 1 0 yields a mark from the knob s center to its outer edge MarkPicture Determines the graphic to be displayed as the mark on the co
212. f the different components It allows you to design and share your own configurations for any of the Plug in Controls For instance if you are creating monitors for industrial automation and you have a pressure meter that you use frequently you now have the ability to design the configuration using the Angular Gauge Control and save the configuration The next time you need to use this gauge you can drop a new Angular Gauge component on your monitor and with the click of the mouse have all those properties including bitmaps loaded into the component The Library Property Page within the controls property pages includes a tree which lists the current configurations available for the user The user can browse through this list and select any of the configurations to automatically load all the properties for that particular configuration with a single click of the mouse The user then needs to click the Load button to force the properties into memory and the component is configured to that Library configuration The user can also save and modify their own configurations import someone else s configurations or export their configurations Version 4 0 0 185 Part Five Monitors Loading Configurations Right Click on the control and choose Visual Display Properties GO THE LIBRARY TABBED PROPERTY PAGE Using the tree on the left hand side browse through the different configurations and select the one you are interested in by double clicking
213. f your text object e g Channel 1 Alignment Specifies the alignment of text within the text object Options are Left Right or centred Font Name amp Font The Font button controls these The font button displays the font Size changing dialog b Colours Field s Determines the colour and thickness of the objects border Version 4 0 0 280 Part Five Monitors Determines the colour of the background within the object c Three D Settings If Three D is set to On then the Border Colour will be ignored Shape Properties Configuration Dialog Edit Shape Properties Border Thickness Colour Y Iv FillOn Colour Three D On Cancel Help n Shape properties are divided into 2 sections Field BDescription Border Thickness Specifies the thickness of the border 0 32 Drop down list of colours Fill On Checking this will enable Flood Fill on your selected object Three D On If the 3D option is on the border colour is ignored The 3D drawing in the configurable monitor will always use the colours dark grey and white to achieve it s effect Manipulating Shapes on Screen Shapes can be layered in different ways within the Configurable Monitor Use the mouse to select the Object on screen and then and select the Objects menu item The options are Option Description amp Move the selected object to t
214. figuration must be saved and the system must be disabled then re enabled in order for the Error Channels to be activated Generate Alarm on Error This Causes the System Error Channels to go into an Alarm State whenever an error occours Enable this check box if you wish alarms to be generated on System Errors Drive Common Alarm A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Alarm Priority Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of the System Error Channels alarm The Higher the Number the Higher the priority of the alarm Version Error Reference source not found 117 Part Four Configuring Processors Alarm Delay Enter the time in seconds between the channel value entering the Alarm State and the system flagging an alarm this can be useful if you wish to avoid alarms on channels which are constantly going in and out of alarm every few seconds Saving Configuration There are three ways to save the configuration once changes have been made these are Saving on Exit Simply Exit the Configuration Dialog and you will be prompted to save changes Select Yes from the Pop up dialog to discard changes simply click no Saving from File Menu Select file from the dialog menu then select sa
215. figuration which the logger had when it was first run either click on the D button on the toolbar or chose New from the File menu bar A logger can be used without saving the configuration but if the computer system is rebooted then the configuration will be lost Saving Logger Configuration To retain the configuration of a logger it must be saved to disk To save the configuration either click on the button on the toolbar or chose Save from the File menu bar no name is required A logger can be used without saving the configuration but if the computer system is rebooted then the configuration will be lost Logger Control The loggers can be controlled from two different locations within the Orchestrator Software Package Loggers can be controlled from within their own Logger Configuration Window or by choosing Control Loggers from the Loggers menu in the Orchestrator main Window The control functions available are the same in both Windows Logger Control Functions Enable Logger This function will start a logger operating If a start time or cycle time has been set then the logger will wait until that time is reached before logging data to disk If the Orchestrator system is not itself enabled then the logger will start operating but will not log any data until the system is enabled Disable Logger The logger will cease logging and the log file closed down The logger will be available to be re enabled at anytime NB If a
216. fined 0 1100 350 700 100 700 200 200 0 100 200 200 100 700 35 KnobColor Determines the color of the control s knob KnobOffsetX KnobOffsetY Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the knob s center These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located in the center of the instrument Knob Picture Determines the graphic to be displayed as the knob Unlike knobs which are defined using the KnobStyle property a knob defined by a picture does not rotate Rotating the knob s mark simulates the rotating effect Version 4 0 0 235 Part Five Monitors KnobRadius Determines the outer radius of the knob This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Knob Style Determines the style of the knob Knob User Defined Determines the shape of a user defined knob or mark This property only applies when KnobStyle 4 for knobs or when MarkStyle 4 for marks This property defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs comma delimited The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the center of the knob and the pointer of the knob or tip of the mark is typically defined as 0 1000 Mouse Control Determines the type of mouse input to the control Mark Each knob may be adorned with a single mark Properties are provided to modify th
217. fmon nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 orm F 5 File open icon gurable Monitor Monitor bm BD u e amp 8 6 amp fkwAscoodctm x ew Yee oe Lo LELI m ip l et so FF i amp e i Drawing and Configuring Channels To define a channel data area within a monitor screen take the following steps 1 Choose the Channel item from the Draw menu OR Version 4 0 0 173 Part Five Monitors Select the Channel drawing tool from the main toolbar zl 2 Drag the mouse onto the monitor window Position the mouse at the desired location for the channel object and release the mouse The channel object will be displayed on screen DEH X3 8f kwAncooawuws zfM zd To configure Channels the monitor must not be locked The user draws a channel object by selecting the channel drawing tool and dragging the mouse in the monitor window This operation will position and size the object Channel properties can be categorized into three sections Data Source Display Options and Visual Properties By double clicking on the channel object or selecting the properties command from the Edit menu the above channel properties can be edited Version 4 0 0 174 Part Five Monitors Configuring Data Source Properties r Edit Channel Properties Data Source Properties Visual Properties Display Options Data Conversion m Data Source Source Type PRODUCT NAME Channel
218. g the Maximize button Version 4 0 0 150 Part Five Monitors Often Windows get laid on top of each other obscuring other windows To locate and bring another Window to the front select Window from the menu bar and select the Window required from the drop down list Alternatively Windows can be Tiled or Cascaded from the same menu option Windows can be closed by clicking on the X button of the title bar Often all the contents of a Window cannot be displayed at once Scroll Bars are provided to facilitate moving the contents of the Window to display the information required You can alternatively resize the columns by pointing the mouse pointer at the rightmost corner of the column header and by holding down the left mouse button drag the column to the width you require The menu bar comprises drop down lists of options To select an option point to the heading on the menu bar and then choose the correct option from the drop down list The menus vary dependent on the Window being used The menu options for the Orchestrator Monitor Windows are discussed later in this section In some instances an alternative to using the menus is to choose options via the buttons on the Toolbar Each Window will have a different set of tool buttons Those used as part of the Orchestrator Monitor Window are described later in this section Column Identification The screenshot on the previous page shows various Alarm Monitor Windows As mentioned each wind
219. gauge and selecting Data Source Properties form the Pop Up box and select the channel from the list available Version 4 0 0 232 Part Five Monitors Selectors Description The Selector control is a knob style control that can be used to choose between discrete options It can be used as a replacement for option buttons and provides the user with an easy to use and intuitive mouse input True 8 a False Stop Yes a wi No Off Font Selector Printer Fax Machine MS Sans Serif Color 7 S stem falie Courier New Color E Dot Matrix e Arial Selector Standby EM Terminal Line Laser Version 4 0 0 233 Part Five Monitors Captions The control can be embellished with multiple captions to indicate the type of measurement being displayed units used or any other informative or decorative labeling These captions are in no way related to the captions defined for each selection Properties Zi Knob Mak Library Background Captions E Cap onD D Flag 0 Static FontiD 0 H C X Position Om foo Y Position ij o oo Caption Caption Determines the text displayed on the control for the caption currently selected by CaptionID The number of captions displayed is set by the Captions property Color Determines the text color for the caption currently selected by CaptionID Flag Determines if the caption currently selected by CaptionID is drawn i
220. gh State Description Enter up to 32 characters to describe a device channel in high state Event Checking Event checking is used if required to trigger a logger to record information on an event If this facility is required click on the drop down list box and select OFF HIGH STATE or LOW STATE appropriate Alarm State Alarm checking is available on all channels throughout the system To configure alarm checking on this channel select OFF HIGH STATE or LOW STATE as appropriate If a channel s status changes to an Alarm State an alarm will be triggered on that channel When monitoring channels if the alarm is triggered then the fact will be annotated alongside any other channel information Alarm Priority Enter the priority of the alarm triggered by this channel Common Alarm Channels can be configured to trigger a Common Alarm A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Alarm Delay Enter the number of seconds before the alarm is announced Alarm Message Enter up to 32 characters to describe the channel when it is in alarm state Version 4 0 0 416 Part Ten Data Exchange Configuring Analogue Channels The following fields can be configured for analog channels Engineering Units Description Control Input Minimum U Maximum 100 Descriptor Significant Change Alarm Error Checking E r D D
221. ght Determines the drawing region extents of the control excluding border area These properties are based on a unitless scale where 0 0 is the upper left corner and 1 1 is the lower right corner of the control They define the region used for the track s only so care must be taken to ensure enough space for any axis labeling or captions Version 4 0 0 271 Part Five Monitors Stamps Re Properties Tracks TreckBands Variables XAxis Library Background Captions Fonts General Stamp Mode lo Control Cont Stamp Symbol fi Circle Stamp FontlD 0 vex StampColor StampSymbolSize gt 0 01 StampS ymbolU serD efined Description The Strip Chart allows the user stamp the chart at different locations with either a Time stamp or a symbol stamp Stamping the Strip chart is done in value entry mode by right clicking the strip chart and choosing Stamp Time or Stamp Symbol Stamp Mode Determines whether the stamp is placed relative to a specific plot track or relative to the control itself If the stamps are placed with respect to the tracks then the display is dependent on the TrackDisplayMax and TrackDisplayMin Stamp FontID Determines which font is used for all text based stamps Stamp Symbol Determines the graphical representation used as a stamp StampColor Determines the color used for all stamps placed on the control StampSymbolSize Deter
222. gital or analogue including User Analogue channels can have their values changed manually from within the Channel Monitor Window To modify the value of a channel there are 5 alternate ways to do so NB It must be noted that to modify a Channels Value Analog or Digital the User performing the modification must have the right security access Security Access comes in the form of Read or Read Write Privileges that are assigned to the device or processor 1 Point to the channel and double click the left mouse button 2 Select the required channel and from the Options menu choose Modify 3 Select the channel and press the CTRL and M keys together 4 Select the channel and press the Enter Key on the keyboard 5 Click with the mouse on the Modify Channel icon within the toolbar i e 9 Whichever method is used a dialog box will be presented Version 4 0 0 133 Part Five Monitors Analog Channels If the channel chosen is an analogue output the dialog box will contain a text field r Modify Analog Channel Enter New Value Enter Value a Edit the value in that field and choose the OK button The channel value will be changed to the new value on the next scan Digital Channels If the selected channel is a digital output channel or a User digital channel the dialog box will contain two radio buttons The button of the current status will be selected initially r Modify Digital Channel Sa Sel
223. guration is to be copied to again it will be highlighted Select the Paste icon and the configuration will be pasted from the clipboard Shortcuts ie Toolbar Keys CTRL C CTRL V Version 4 0 0 426 Part Ten Data Exchange Configure Data Exchange Channel The configuration of Data Exchange Channels is divided into 7 sections plus a row of buttons at the bottom E Configure Data Exchange Processor Channel DX1 v Enable Channel Tag Tagi Description orc Tag Description Engineering Units Significant Change Event Checking Minimum Maximum Descriptor o E 00 o o o Alam Error Checking i Sommar j fo Low Alarm Checking v High Alarm Checking c n Drive Common Alarm Limit 500 warrin D Waring D Hysteresis ue Do n Pio 2 Delay fo _ A i Type Read Write OPC C DDE rite Option Node MESVIS160 Node r xl Sevier PRODUCT NAME OPCServer 1 Server Item Random10 Item AcesPah O Read Quality Access Cancel Copy Pa j Next Goto Help Enable Channel For a channel to be operative and therefore configurable the Enable Channel check box must be checked Tag A 12 characters alphanumeric field that can contain channel information or wiring schedule references Description A 32 channel alphanumeric field in which a description of the channel can be detailed Version 4 0 0 42
224. gured 1 16 At the start of every log file there is block of information recorded about each channel to be logged This information includes the tag description and units of each channel Also in this header is information necessary for the accurate replaying of the data at a later date The size of this block can be represented by File hdr 900 no blocks 4 no channels 216 Each log scan records not only the value of each of the logged channel but also their status and exact time of the scan The size of each scan is represented as scan sz 18 no_blocks 2 no_digitals 4 no_analogs 8 NB All Device channels are stored as Analogue Channels The complete file size can now be calculated as file sz file hdr no scans scan sz As an example let us assume we want to log the following information every minute for 24 hours DS1 32 Device Analog inputs DS65 72 Device Digital inputs P1 16 User Analogs C5 15 Calculator Values Analog Q1 8 User Digitals no blocks 5 no_analogs 32 8 16 10 66 no_digitals 8 no_chans 74 no_scans 1 60 24 1440 File hdr 900 5 4 74 216 16 904 Version 4 0 0 345 Part Six Loggers Sean se 18 5 2 16 4 66 8 620 file sz 16 904 1440 620 909 704 bytes Logged Data File Structure When loggers are enabled the files they create are named automatically and stored on the disk for easy management and re
225. hannel onto Track ID 2 there must be 3 tracks on the strip chart already You may however do this and then later edit the properties of the Strip Chart via the Visual Display Properties of the control to include the number of tracks you require 2 If you setup a channel to drive a track band the strip chart will not display the track band settings until the user has entered track bands onto the track Version 4 0 0 182 Part Five Monitors Source Type The Data Source Type is of Channel Type This will be selected by default Source Selection Allows either the Default Orchestrator server or User Defined data source to be selected If Default is selected the server button will be greyed out With User Defined the Server button is active To user define a server other than the Orchestrator default click the Server button and select the required source from the Select Server window as shown below Server Name The name of the server which contains the required Channel The server does not have to be currently attached to the monitor If the server can not send data back to this object then the object will display Disabled after the OK button has been clicked Select PRODUCT NAME Server MESVIS160 OK C Auto Browse Cancel sf Entire Network FH af Microsoft Terminal Services FH xt Microsoft Windows Network E xt Web Client Network ACCOUNTS i Bs ie Fs MESVIS160 IB MESXP139 IB MESXP150 Sou
226. he Browse the user can select from a range of Servers that are connected to their network See figure 1 2 above Alternatively the user can manually enter the name of a server in the Edit box provided Version 4 0 0 124 Part Five Monitors Source Name Provided within the Source Name List Box is a list of Data Sources that are resident on the Server you have chose from the Browse Button To select a Data Source point to it and click the mouse button it will be highlighted then choose the OK button Alternatively double click the mouse button whilst pointing to the Data Source required The new Channel Monitor Window will be introduced into the Channel Monitor Main Window Multiple Channel Monitor Windows can be opened to monitor the same data source For example several Channel Monitor Windows can be invoked to monitor Device Channels This allows different blocks of Device channels to be displayed in different windows Channel The Channel Edit Box provided within the Monitor Properties Dialog Box allows the user enter a channel number to start on i e Channel 100 for instance The Channel Monitor Window will open with the inputted Channel Identifier being highlighted and in view Users can enter a user defined channel by selecting the first Data Source USER DEFINED from the list and then can enter there own channel prefix If the Server or the Data Source being connected too is not recognized or the selected ser
227. he File Name Edit box of the Dialog Box Or alternatively you may use the name that it prompts you to use 2 Double clicking on a previously Saved Monitor s Name with the left mouse button indicates to the application that you want to overwrite a saved monitors file Bi Save A rmx Save in AMONITORS v Name Date modif Type Size AlarmM1 AlarmM2 amp AlarmM3 a Recent Places Desktop File name Save as type Alarm Monitor Files mal Closing Alarm Monitor Windows To close an Alarm Monitor Window within the Alarm Monitor Main Window first ensure the Window to be closed is the active Window Choose Close from the File menu or click the mouse on the X button on the title bar of the window to be closed You will then be prompted with a Save Dialog Box querying you on whether to save the active Alarm Monitor Document or close it without saving changes see Section Saving Alarm Monitor Windows NB The Alarm Monitor Application works on the basis of Workspaces The Workspace remembers each Alarm Monitor Windows position size and configurable details number of visible columns color settings etc To add an Alarm Monitor to the workspace you must save each new Alarm Monitor Window to an Alarm Monitor Document via the Save option in the menu or toolbar See Section Saving Alarm Monitor Windows Version 4 0 0 154 Part Five Monitors On Closing the Alarm Monitor Application you will b
228. he X Axis which allows the user to move the cursor along data This feature would typically be enabled if the user wanted to retrieve values for points plotted in the display area Handles Determines whether or not handles are displayed on the controls The vertical handles may be used to modify the minimum and maximum of a track s display These handles are bounded by the appropriate TrackMin and Version 4 0 0 270 Part Five Monitors TrackMax The horizontal handles may be used to modify the XSpan for the tracks Initially these handles display the area bounded by LastX and XSpan Grids Determines which grid lines will be displayed on the control Grid Color Determines the color used for the grid when it is displayed Enable Panning Determines whether or not the user may manually pan through the data in a track Panning is done by pressing the right mouse button and dragging the mouse through the data Enable Track Sizing Defines whether or not the user may change track size at run time If the left mouse button is used only the adjacent tracks are resized If the right mouse button is used all the tracks are affected WrapCursorColor Determines the color of the marker used to indicate the current data point when DisplayMode is set to WrapMode WrapCursorWidth Determines the width in pixels of the marker used to indicate the current data point when DisplayMode is set to WrapMode Area Top Bottom Left Ri
229. he font including colour and style for any of the name or status properties of this object Internal alignment properties can also be set within this group Object Value Here the user can set the font including colour and style for the actual numeric value of the object Border The border properties fill properties and 3 D properties for the object can be set in this group If the 3D option is on the border colour is ignored The 3D drawing in the configurable monitor will always use the colours dark grey and white to achieve it s effect For best results the monitor background colour has been set to a default of grey Version 4 0 0 177 Part Five Monitors Object Alarm Indication The alarm indication only applies to the value part of a channel object The alarm indicator is enabled whenever the channel has an alarm status valid whether it is high alarm or low alarm The indication option INVERSE changes the colour of the value display to be that of the background of the object changes the background to what the value had been and leaves them in that state until the alarm flag is reset The indication option FLASHING changes the colour of the value display to be that of the background of the object changes the background to what the value had been and continues to alternate these two at a steady rate until the alarm flag is reset When the operator chooses COLOUR CHANGE two further selections should be available The operator c
230. he name of the file corresponds to the channel type associated with it and is one of the following Channel Type Channel Type Filename Analog Input Al Digital Input DI Analog Output AO Digital Output DO Counter Input CI 450 Appendix B Security 451 Appendix B Security Protecting the System Configuration In order to protect a data source configuration you must set the permissions on the data source s configuration file For details on setting file permissions consult your Microsoft Windows documentation Read and Change Configurations By default all users can read and change configurations To allow a single user access to read and change a configuration grant that user read and write access to the data source s or logger s configuration file In the case of data sources the user must also have read and write access permission to all channel type files associated with the data source If the user has read and write access on a data source they can also reconfigure the data source after any configuration changes have been made so that the changes will be reflected in the system immediately This is done by selecting Reconfigure from the Control menu of the data source s configuration window Read Configurations Only To only allow a user to view a data source s configuration grant them Read access on the data source configuration file The user must have at least read access to all channe
231. he previous position in the z order Alignment This includes Left Right Top and Bottom alignment of objects Note z order The order in which objects are placed on top of each other in windows Version 4 0 0 281 Part Five Monitors Using the Channel Configuration Wizard The channel configuration wizard provides a quick easy and efficient way of configuring Orchestrator channels The wizard facility allows the user to configure options for one individual channel Every time the user clicks on the Add button a new channel object is created and automatically sized and positioned If we are dealing with six channels then the channel number is incremented by one with each Add operation The user can sequentially add channel s from a Source without having to configure individual channels each time You must be in Configure Mode to use the Channel Configuration Wizard Steps To Configure a Channel using the Channel Configuration Wizard 1 Choose the Channel Wizard item from the Monitor menu 2 The Channel Configuration wizard will appear 3 Configure your channel filling in the various options Server Display Options etc 4 Click Add to place the configured channel 5 Continue clicking Add until the desired number of channels has been configured 6 Click Close to acknowledge the configuration s Layout Commands Configurable monitor provides a range of icon driven layout commands to assist with object alignment and
232. he same The previous window will be displayed Copy d If the configuration of the current channel is to be repeated clicking on this button will copy the configuration to the Windows Clipboard Paste d When a configuration has been copied to the Clipboard it can be pasted into any other channel in this group by this button Clicking on Previous or Next buttons will accept the current channels configuration and move on to either the next or previous channel s Configuration Window Goto Selecting the Goto button will accept the current channel s configuration and move on to the channel entered in the resulting Goto Channel No dialog box Help If any help is required concerning any element of this window clicking on this button will select the Help utility Version 4 0 0 432 Part Ten Data Exchange Configuring Data Exchange for Remote Operation For any OPC client to access remote data through DCOM it is necessary to configure both the server and client machines for DCOM Through the rest of this document we will reference the RTE OPC Server as or OPC Server application This may be substituted for the OPC server of your choice The client and server machines must be running either Windows NT 4 0 with SP3 patch or later The dcomcnfg exe in the Windows Nsystem32 directory can be used to make the required changes This can be run from the Start Run menu command The client and server
233. he software Server and Client Keys are different The software will not operate if the wrong key is used If you are using a USB hardware key you need to install a driver for the USB dongle before running the Client setup You can either install the USB driver by inserting the USB key in the machine and following the setup after the following dialog is displayed Version 4 0 0 30 Part One Installation Procedure Installing Orchestrator Client The Orchestrator Client software can be installed on a partition formatted to NTFS or a standard FAT partition Before installing Orchestrator Client for the first time you will need to know the network name of the machine you wish to use as your Orchestrator RTE data server Consult your Network Administrator or the engineer who installed the Orchestrator Server software for this information It is essential you log on with Administrator privileges before installing Orchestrator client Press the Windows button and R A R Enter D Client Disk1 SETUP in the text box and click the OK button Where D is is your CD ROM Drive fun d e Typethe name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open DAClientDisklNSETUP exel Cancel Browse When installation starts you will be asked what Key you want to install with Click the Hardware key HASP HL Key button to install the HASP runti
234. he tic set currently selected by TicID These values are numbers between ScaleMinValue and ScaleMaxValue for the scale referenced by TicScalelD Version 4 0 0 196 Part Five Monitors TicStyle Determines the style of the tic set currently selected by TicID TicWidth Determines the width of the tic marks for the tic set currently selected by TicID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Drawing an Angular Gauge Example In this section we will go through the steps required to make a simple gauge like the one below 109 g Ze Amps 5 4 3 1 Step 1 ve After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the angular gauge a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the gauge is of the required size A gauge will appear this is the default setting for the angular gauge but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 Right click on the Gauge you have just drawn a popup dialog will appear choose visual display properties from the pop up menu Step 3 Firstly we will change the scale and direction of the gauge Select the Scales Tab in the configuration Menu and configure the fields as follows Value Limits Min 1 Max 10 Direction Backwards Start Angle 358 Stop Angle 92
235. hen the required Trend Window is active then use the F6 Function Key for horizontal trends and CTRL F6 Function Keys for vertical trends Using Toolbar Button To zoom the Central half of the screen one step choose the M button for horizontal trends and the ud button for vertical trends Zoom Right Bottom Use this command to Zoom the right half of a horizontal trend or the bottom half of a vertical trend by a factor of 2 Using Zoom Menu choose Right for horizontal trends or Bottom for vertical trends Using Fast Key When the required Trend Window is active then use the F6 Function Key for horizontal trends and CTRL F6 Function Key for vertical trends Using Toolbar Button To zoom the right half of the screen one step choose the 3 button for horizontal trends or the m button for vertical trends Zoom Out One Level Use this command to Zoom out one level Using Zoom Menu choose Zoom up One Level Using Fast Key When the required Trend Window is active then use the F8 Function Key for horizontal trends and CTRL 8 Function Keys for horizontal trends Using Toolbar Button To zoom up one level choose the t button for horizontal trends and the ES button for vertical trends Zoom Out to Top Level Use this command to Zoom out to original Time Frame Using Zoom Menu choose Zoom to Top Level Using Fast Key When the required Trend Window is active use the F9 Function Key for horizontal trends and the CTRL F9 Function Key for vertical trends
236. her Point to the channel to be copied it will be highlighted click on the Copy icon the configuration will be copied to the clipboard Now point to the channel that the configuration is to be copied to again it will be highlighted Select the Paste icon and the configuration will be pasted from the clipboard Shortcuts 3 b Toolbar Keys CTRL C CTRL V Version Error Reference source not found 74 Part Four Configuring Processors Configure Calculator Channel The Configure Calculated Channel is divided into 6 sections plus a row of buttons at the bottom Bg Configure Calculated Channel C mes p D mo Tag Ta Description C1 Description ssts S Engineering Units Significant Change f Event Checking Minimum Maximum Descriptor o 100 0 0 0 Alarm Error Checking B ou B Low Alarm Checking High Alarm Checking E o E o jo jo m o o 0 0 0 0 Formula ctime Functions Check Formula Cancel Copy Nest Goto Help Formula A full description on the use of formulae in the Calculator Processor is described in the next section Calculator Formulae This section deals with the mechanics of configuring the formula for a channel Channel Formula can be entered in two ways It can be typed directly into the formula text box When completed the syntax of the formula can be checked by choosing the Check Formula but
237. hilst C3 is TRUE Reset the calculation when a pulse appears on channel C2 i e at midnight Maintain the value on the calculator channel even if generator not running NB If the formula was only written as C3 greatest DS2 C2 C4 then the greatest calculation would only be evaluated when generator is operating If the unit was stationary at midnight the calculation would not be evaluated and therefore the greatest value would not be reset Making the condition C2 C3 C2 OR C3 ensures the greatest function is evaluated and reset at the correct time even if generator still The formula is repeated for each parameter and statistic required C5 C2 C3 greatest DS3 C2 C5 C6 C2 C3 greatest DS4 C2 C6 C7 C2 C3 least DS2 C2 C7 C8 C2 C3 least DS3 C2 C8 C9 C2 C3 least DS4 C2 C9 C10 C2 C3 mean DS2 C2 C10 C11 C2 C3 mean DS3 C2 C11 C12 C2 C3 mean DS4 C2 C12 Version Error Reference source not found 91 Part Four Configuring Processors Example 4 Control Algorithms This example shows how the Calculator formula can be used for control In this imaginary process The operator presses a start button to initiate a process The calculator checks certain parameters on the process to ensure it is safe to start the process cycle It is the calculator in this example that actually starts the process The operator effectively issues a request to start DS1 monitors a temperature of a cooling fl
238. his example will be logged to disk at the end of each shifts C12 c3 c5 rtimer 1 lt lt rtimer 2 lt lt rcount 1 0 Reset the timers and counter to zero at the start of a shift Version Error Reference source not found 89 Part Four Configuring Processors Example 2 Manually Entered Coefficients The scenario for this example is a laboratory Different fluids are used in a reactor vessel and the chemist needs to manually enter a coefficient equal to the viscosity of the fluid being used A Device Channel DS1 is monitoring the flow rate volume of the fluid being used The weight of the fluid used per minute is the result required The viscosity coefficient is needed to calculate the weight of the different fluids tested The Orchestrator Monitor Windows can be used to manually enter data in to the User Analogue Channels The calculator formulae may be as follows C1 V1 P1 Assign the viscosity coefficient from P1 to the calculator variable V1 C2 P1 v1 1 0 In case operator does not enter value set a value of 1 If P 0 make V 1 NB P1 means NOT TRUE i e is zero C3 z rate DS1 60 If the scan rate of the Device is set to 1 second the rate DS1 will be litres second Multiply by 60 will give litres per minute C4 c2 1 64 v1 C3 will assume the value of the weight of the fluid used per minute The volume per minute C2 is multiplied by a constant 1 64 and also by the manually inputted coefficient to p
239. hnical interfaces Version 4 0 0 189 Part Five Monitors Captions The gauge can be embellished with multiple captions to indicate the type of measurement being displayed units used or any other informative or decorative labeling nm Properties 5 Frames Hubs Needes Scales Tics Gms Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts Ges T Captions i1 EA CaptioniD 0 Flag 0 Static FontlD n Color X Position a ir a4 1 00 Y Position 4 Ex BERE LER Caption Amps cmoa o Caption Determines the text displayed on the control for the caption currently selected by CaptionID The number of captions displayed is set by the Captions property CaptionColour Determines the text color for the caption currently selected by CaptionID CaptionFlag Determines if the caption currently selected by CaptionID is drawn in the control s static or dynamic buffer CaptionFontID Determines which font is used for the caption currently selected by CaptionID CaptionID When multiple captions exist CaptionID is used to index the caption to which the other caption properties apply The total number of captions is determined by the Captions property and CaptionID has valid values from 0 to Captions 1 Version 4 0 0 190 Part Five Monitors Captions Determines the number of captions displayed on the control This property must be set before a
240. ic to be displayed as the pointer for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD The graphic is stretched to fit the pointer area as defined by Pointerlnner PointerOuter PointerStart PointerStop and PointerWidth Pointers Determines the number of pointers displayed on the control This property must be set before all other pointer properties The PointerID property is used to select the pointer to which pointer properties apply ScalelD Determines the scale on which the pointer currently selected by PointerlD is based The PointerStart and PointerStop properties must fall within the range defined by ScaleMax and ScaleMin Pointer Shape Determines the shape of a user defined pointer This property only applies when PointerStyle is set to User Defined and defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the upper left corner of the control Snap Enables or disables the control s ability to display any value within the range defined by ScaleMin and ScaleMax through PointerScalelD for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD For example if the scale ranges from 0 to 10 PointerSnap TRUE and PointerSnapIncrement 2 then the instrument can only display the values 0 2 4 6 8 and 10 Snap Increment Determines the allowable incremental change of the control s value if PointerSnap TRUE for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD F
241. icMade D Numeric real XSpann o0 Last 39140 52 iv Labels MajorTics 5 MinorTi ft im 23 inorT ics FontlD ES Align 2 Center v Seconds Format Minutes Format Hours Format Offset E fis Days Format Months Format ToColor Years Format Date Format Orientation 0 Horizontal XTicMode Determines what mode you want the X Axis to represent It can be set to Numeric Date Time or Local Date Time The Numeric setting is intended to be used when the X Axis represents something other than Time This setting is ideal in situations where you are counting incrementally Use the Time Date or Local Time Date mode whenever you are collecting data to be compared vs Time The Local Time Date setting will take any X value you send and convert it to Local Time based on your system You would normally save the data in Greenwich Mean Time GMT and then allow the control to convert the data to local time Using the Time Date setting will assume that the data is in the correct time units already and no conversion will take place This is normally the way that the control is used Labels Determines whether or not tic labels are displayed along the X Axis FontiD Determines which font is used for the X Axis labels Align Determines the text alignment for the X tic labels Choices are AlignLeft AlignRight and AlignCenter Version 4 0 0 267 Part Five Monitors Orientation Determin
242. icant Change To enable check the Significant Change check box This facility allows filtering of data on channels on which significant change is of interest Such changes can cause an event which can be logged The figure entered in the Value text box is the rate of change in engineering units which if the measured channel exceeds per scan either increasing or decreasing will cause the significant change event trigger Event Checking Event checking is used if required to trigger a logger to record information on an event Check the Event Checking check box if this facility is needed High Limit A value entered in this text box will define the level that if exceeded by the channel result will cause an event trigger Low Limit A value entered in this text box will define the level that if the channel result falls below will cause an event trigger Alarm Error Checking Drive Common A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Priority Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of this channels alarm Delay Enter the time in seconds between the channel value entering the alarm state and the system flagging an alarm Low and High Alarm Checking Alarm checking is available on all channels throughout the Orchestrator system Low Alarm and High Alarm l
243. ication View Options Window C New Ctrl N a gt Open Ctrl O Close fed Save Ctrl S Save As Opening Alarm Monitor Documents To open a saved Alarm Monitor Document within the Alarm Monitor Main Window choose Open from the File menu or click the mouse on the Open icon on the toolbar um Immediately after this you are presented with the Standard Windows File Open Dialog Box in which you can open a previously saved Alarm Monitor Document by Double clicking on the Saved Monitor s Name with the left mouse button Click on the Saved Monitor s Name and then click the OK button with the mouse button bs i Open c 2 gt Look in JE AMONITORS ek E2 Lr Name Date modif Type Size ES a Al M Recent Places a Mera AlarmM2 a AlarmM3 Desktop m i n Aidan Mallon uu Computer AK lt Network File name Open Files of type Alarm Monitor Files mal Cancel I Open as read only Version 4 0 0 153 Part Five Monitors Saving Alarm Monitor Documents To save an Alarm Monitor Document within the Alarm Monitor Main Window first ensure the Window to be saved is the active window Choose Save Monitor from the File menu or click the mouse on the Save Monitor icon within the toolbar Immediately after this you are presented with the Standard Windows File Close Dialog Box in which you can save the Alarm Monitor Document by 1 Enter a name for your monitor file in t
244. ify the name of an application which they wish to have launched and the name s of files which can be used as input for this application For example if you have a series of DIF files in a directory you can specify by using the Browse EXE button the name of an application like Microsoft Excel will can be launched to handle and display a series of DIF files specified by using the Parameters button Iv Logger Export C Export Data To File Command command Browse EXE Parameters l t Parameters N B If you specify any parameter files as input to an application and the application can not open one or more of these files for some reason then the application will present you with an error message Also it is possible to use name specifiers when passing parameter files as input to an Version 4 0 0 317 Part Six Loggers application 9 ol can be used to specify a data log file name that corresponds to the current logger and 9 ot can be used to specify a text log file Email log files The first time that you select the email checkbox and choose settings you will be presented with the following dialog r Default Windows NT login for mail User Name usemame Password Lee Domain MEASURESOFT Cancel You will need to enter the user name and password for each logger that you configure to mail an export file Once this has been completed correctly you can then configure the email proper
245. il Address To Receive Unlock Code Use Proxy Server Proxy Server 38 Part One Installation Procedure Enter an email address to receive the unlock code to the unlock code will appear in the key required dialog within a few seconds The email sent to the email address entered is for reference purposes If a proxy server is used in your organisation enter your email address and then check the User Proxy Server check box Enter the proxy server address together with your username and password You may need to contact your IT department to obtain the proxy server details If you do not have an internet connection or if you receive any problems contact the distributor named making sure you specify the product variant and the lock code Enter the unlock code If you enter an invalid unlock code you cannot proceed with the installation Accept the default directory location or use the Browse button to select your preferred directory location and name Version 4 0 0 39 Part One Installation Procedure PRODUCT NAME Client Setup PRODUCT NAME Client Location Setup will install PRODUCT NAME Client in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C PRODUCTNAME Browse lt Back Accept the default program folder name PRODUCT NAME Client Setup PRODUCT NAME Client Folder
246. il address entered is for reference purposes If a proxy server is used in your organisation enter your email address and then check the User Proxy Server check box Enter the proxy server address together with your username and password You may need to contact your IT department to obtain the proxy server details If you do not have an internet connection or if you receive any problems contact the distributor named making sure you specify the product variant and the lock code Enter the unlock code If you enter an invalid unlock code you cannot proceed with the installation Accept the default directory location or use the Browse button to select your preferred directory location and name Orchestrator Location Setup will install Orchestrator Server in the following folder To install ta this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder m Destination Folder C ORCHESTRATOR Cancel Select the Program group where you want the program icons to be stored Version 4 0 0 22 Part One Installation Procedure Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Existing Folders Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Microsoft SOL Server 2008 R2 Mozilla Firefox MYOB Accounting Plus 2008 MYOB ODBC Direct v8
247. ile in full screen mode mon nt exe c XOrchestrator monitors monitor1 mcm F Or mon nt exe c VOrchestrator monitors monitor1 mcm F Version 4 0 0 121 Part Five Monitors Channel Monitor Features The Channel Monitor Window The information held within the Channel Monitor Window is divided into separate rows and columns A row will give the real time information about a particular channel The Column indicates the separate fields that relate to the channel in question see Section Column Identification The Channel Monitor Window comprises a main application window and a number of child monitor windows The amount of Channel Monitor Windows that may be open in the Channel Monitor Main Window depends on the amount of available memory of your system Menu Bar Toolbar Channel Monitor CALCULATED CHANNELS File View Options Configuration Window Help GOD SRA mer gt On rr Channel Tag __ Desorption _Vae Units So Evert Status Nam Ack Alam C0001 Secs Number of Seco 75 168 01 Be co002 Sne Wave 059 Monitor EB coom 0 10 Zero to Ten Cou 801 Monitor Windows Window EB coo 05 Zero to Sx Coun 001 4 ALO This is alo Minimize Maximize Control Bars E cooo 0 50 Zero to Saty Cou 48 01 i and Exit Buttons n For Help press Fl MESVISI60 CALCULATED CHANNELS 10 26 24 te USER ANALOG CHANNELS Waiting For S PRODUCT SHIFT Target 1 Random Random 0 1 Random 0 10
248. ilserver domain com Port 25 Timeout 30 seconds V Server Requires Autorization Login Name logonname Password nnn Cancel Name The desired screen alias of the sender Version Error Reference source not found 112 Part Four Configuring Processors Email Account name of the sender Server The address of the senders mail host Timeout Defaulted to 30 seconds this is the time the annunciator system will wait for the host to respond Some hosts may require 60 seconds or more Server Authorisation User can provide login ID and password for mail account if required by server Test configuration The user can verify current configuration using the following dialog box r Send test message Message Cancel Message When the user clicks on the Options button a dialog will be displayed that allows the user configure a message to be sent to the pager The user can use any alpha numeric characters except in the case where a numeric pager is being used In this case only numeric characters should be used To make life easier for the user a number of mnemonics are provided which can be used to construct a message At runtime these mnemonics will be replaced with the appropriate values The mnemonics are as follows l or 96i Channel id N or n Channel number X or X Channel prefix P or p Channel priority T or Yt Channel tag D or d Chan
249. in the usual way User Digital Channel Description The User Digital channels are also internal channels Using the channel monitor window the status of the User Digital channels can be changed by selecting the channel and pressing the spacebar on the computer s keyboard to switch a User Digital channel ON or OFF User Digital Channels can also be used as flags in Calculator Algorithms Once configured User Digital Channels have the prefix Q and can be monitored logged and replayed in the usual way History Channel Description The History processor provides a short term history over a user defined time period for up to 33 Orchestrator Channels A block of 30 contiguous channels given the prefix H records the history of any Orchestrator channel The main use of these channels is to animate mini trends in the Visual Environment animation package History channels can also be used to provide a lag function in control algorithms Calculator Channel Description The Real Time Calculator Processor allows complex or simple real time calculations to be performed on data being collected by the Orchestrator System Calculator channels are analogue channels whose value is calculated from a user specified formula Any Orchestrator channel can be used as part of a calculation both digital or analogue input or output There are up to 10000 calculator channels available and have the prefix C Calculator Channels can be configured to cause ev
250. index to topics on which you can get help About Displays the version number of this application Version 4 0 0 170 Part Five Monitors Configurable Monitor The Configurable Monitor is a highly flexible software tool allowing Orchestrator s client and server users to design specific displays combining text rectangles ellipses polygons lines and channel data from a range of different sources and save these configurations for reuse The Configurable Monitor provides a means of graphically displaying and updating Orchestrator channel data Channel data displayed is user configurable The user can draw shapes on the monitor window Shapes include rectangles ellipses lines and text Configurable Monitor is Client Server based software and hence exhibits the benefits of such software The Configurable Monitor uses the Windows interface A channel configuration Wizard is provided This utility allows quick and easy configuration of multiple Orchestrator channels To invoke the Configurable Monitor from its icon double click the Configurable Monitor icon in the Orchestrator Program group Configurable Monitor To invoke configurable monitor from the Orchestrator main menu click the monitor option and then select configurable monitor from the drop down selection box MESVIS160 aidan mallon demo PRODUCT NAME File View Control Replays Devices Processors Loggers Help CHANNEL MONITOR d i 53 ALARM MONITOR d CONFIGURABLE MON
251. ing the appropriate OPC Server and clicking on the Properties button PRODUCT NAME OPC Server Properties eae General Location Security Endpoints Identity Which user account do you want to use to run this application The interactive user The launching user measuresoft aidan mallon Browse Password 99909900990099 Confirm password 9999099090909000 9 Leam more about setting these properties m Version 4 0 0 442 Appendix A Environment Variables Appendix A Environment variables Appendix A Details the use of Orchestrator Environment Variables Version 4 0 0 443 Appendix A Environment Variables Orchestrator Environment Variables The Orchestrator Setup Program adds several Environment Variables which the various programs in the suite use for successful operation The capabilities files also contain environment variables used by individual programs This appendix outlines the environment variables the programs which rely on the variables and their purpose Replays Environment Variables The entries in the REPCAP TXT file require some environment variables as follows LOGDIR The LOGDIR term defines the environment variable name of logger data directory and is typically ORC LOGGED DATA ROOT ROOT is the environment variable defining an automatically selected replay configuration file for example the root picture for Trends is defined by the TR
252. ion the remote client must also have its network DDE service enabled For example in Windows for Workgroups this is done by selecting the Network Icon within Control Panel and choosing Start up options The Enable Network DDE must be checked and then click OK twice to exit Close Windows and restart to allow network DDE to start Using Network DDE to Link to other Applications Using DDE across a network is similar to linking to local applications except that different Application Name and topics are used The Application name is as follows case sensitive server ndde where Server is the name of the Orchestrator computer server The shares installed require the following topic names OrcChannel Channel OrcLogger Logger OrcSys System When establishing links in some applications you may be prompted for your Client password Version 4 0 0 413 Part Ten Data Exchange Part Nine Channel configuration This section describes the Channel Configuration Utility Version 4 0 0 414 Part Ten Data Exchange Channel Configuration The generic Channel Configuration utility allows the user to configure device and processor channels by tag The user selects a tag from the Tag combo box see below This utility can be launched from the Configurable Monitor The list of tags is loaded from a file on the local machines Program Directory NXCURRENT CONFIG directory This file is user specific and is named User Channels txt where User
253. ions Default Properties From the Start bar choose Run Enter DCOMCNFG into the edit field and Click OK Expand Component Services Computers and My Computer Right click on My Computer and select properties Click the Default Properties tab Select the settings shown below E My Computer Properties Default Protocols COM Security MSDTC V Enable Distributed COM on this computer E Enable COM Intemet Services on this computer Default Distributed COM Communication Properties The Authentication Level specifies security at the packet level Default Authentication Level None z The impersonation level specifies whether applications can detemine who is calling them and whether the application can do operations using the client s identity Default Impersonation Level Identify Security for reference tracking can be provided f authentication is used and that the default impersonation level is not anonymous Provide additional security for reference tracking Leam more about setting these properties ok cmo j Version 4 0 0 434 Part Ten Data Exchange e Select the Default Properties tab e Set the Enable Distributed COM DCOM on this machine check box e Set Default Authentication Level to None e Set Default Impersonation Level to Identify e Clear the Provide additional security for reference tracking check box e Clic
254. iously mentioned was that we could Acknowledge Alarms via the context Menu This menu is displayed when the user right clicks on an Alarm Monitor Window Its basic purpose is to provide a shortcut to the functions offered by the Options Menu Once you right click on the window you can select from a number of Alarm Monitor options and manipulate the current window Set up an ActiveX Document and run it across the internet This topic will show you how to set up an HTML page that you may use to monitor Alarm Monitor files over the Internet The discussion is based around the Microsoft Package FrontPage 98 On your WEB SERVER create the directory MSActiveXDocuments as this will be the directory you will store the monitor files into You may choose any name for the directory but for example purposes use this one Step 1 1 Launch the Alarm Monitor Application 2 Create an Alarm Monitor Document and connect to a server 3 Save the document with a suitable name i e machinename mal to the WEB SERVERWMSActiveDocuments directory Step 2 1 Run Microsoft FrontPage 98 2 Cancel the GettingStarted Dialog that you are prompted with 3 From the Menu select Tools Show FrontPage Editor 4 You are now presented with the FrontPage Editor Step 3 You should note that you can edit the blank page in two modes Normal or HTML see the tabs positioned on the bottom left hand side of the application Preview allows you to preview th
255. iption of the channel can be detailed Low State Description A 32 character field in which to enter a description of the low state of the channel High State Description A 32 character field in which to enter a description of the high state of the channel Version 4 0 0 63 Part Four Configuring Processors Event checking Event checking is used if required to trigger a logger to record information on an event see Part 5 If this facility is required click on the drop down box and select DISABLED HIGH STATE or LOW STATE as appropriate Alarm Error Checking Drive Common A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Priority Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of this channels alarm Delay Enter the time in seconds between the channel value entering the alarm state and the system flagging an alarm Alarms Alarm State Alarm checking is available on all channels throughout the Orchestrator system To configure alarm checking on this channel click on the drop down box and select OFF HIGH STATE or LOW STATE as appropriate If a channel s status changes to an Alarm State an alarm will be triggered on that channel When monitoring channels if the alarm is triggered then the fact will be annotated alongside the other channel info
256. ir first operand to their second operand The result of the expression has a value of 1 if the test condition is TRUE and 0 if it is FALSE gt Greater than e g DS8 gt 3 45 lt Less than e g DS3 lt DS6 gt Greater than or equals e g DS3 gt P3 lt Less than or equals e g DS4 lt P4 Equal to e g DS5 27 l Not equal to e g DS23 0 Approximately equal to e g DS6 23 5 Note relational tests are normally performed on floating point numbers Due to rounding errors that occur during floating point arithmetic it is often not practical to use the is exactly equal to If an action is required when a temperature being monitored on a Device Channel reaches 35 degrees C DO NOT use As the temperature rises the Orchestrator System may never read exactly 35 00 It may see 34 9994 or 35 010 but to the computer that is not 35 00 In these instances use the approximately equals operator Example DS5 35 00 Jj In the example above the operator will round its two operands to the nearest integer before the test The condition will be regarded as TRUE whilst DS5 is between 34 5 and 35 49999 Version Error Reference source not found 79 Part Four Configuring Processors Assignment Operator The assignment operator is It assigns the second operand to the first E g P5 2 DS2 The Calculator can only assign values to User Analog P Channels User Digital Q Channels Device Output channels digit
257. is available under the View Menu or by pressing the icon B in the toolbar To return to normal screen size you need to press the escape key The Logger Wizard The logger Wizard allows the user to enable a logger and specify the channels to be logged from within Trends To launch the Wizard go to the Edit Menu and select Logger Wizard or use Ctrl W or click the icon x from the icon bar There are three steps to using the Logger Wizard Step 1 of 3 The first thing you need to do is to specify the name of the ORCHESTRATOR server Use the Browse for Server button to locate the server Then click the Next gt button when ready Step 2 of 3 You can view the status of a logger The Logger status will either be Disabled or Enabled You may select a disabled or a currently enabled logger Click the Next gt button when ready Step 3 of 3 You will see the channel range buttons which are explained in the Standard Logger section of the manual If the logger had been configured with channels previously then these will be displayed You can use the clear button to remove any existing channels The name of the logger can be changed if required Click the Finish button when ready The logger will be activated and a new Trend configuration will appear This Trend configuration will have all the channels you selected for logging displayed on it The time frame across the bottom of the Trend will be set to one minute Data Export Using Trends
258. is box in order to be able to see a value line for the selected channel on the trend Line Colour The colour of the line can be chosen from the drop down list As each line is added to the graph a new colour will be offered for each line Line Width From the drop down list select the thickness of the line The thinnest line is the default Line Style To enable lines to be identified more easily the style of the line can be chosen from a continuous line dotted dashed or combination of dotted and dashed Plot Errors As Blank Select this check box if you wish to have all channels in error not to be added to the trend on screen Markers On If the Markers On check box is clicked on a Marker is drawn at each point on the line Marker Type From the drop down list select the type of Marker required Marker Color The colour of the Marker can be chosen from the drop down list Display in Valuebar If the Display in Valuebar check box is checked a value box for the line will be added to the value bar If the Cursor is on the value box will show the value of the channel at the cursor position If the selected log file is a real time log file live log file then when the Cursor is not on the value display will show the current value of the channel Note When the Line On and Markers On check boxes are both set to off no data for the line is visible in graph form Therefore a warning will be displayed Log By Tag The Standard Logger
259. is the name of the currently logged on user This file defines which channels a user has access to and is in the following text format lt ServerName gt lt TagName gt Channel Tag Control Ip Server MESVIS160 Value 0 00 The Server field displays the server which the System channel resides on The Value field displays the current value of the channel When the tag for a channel has been selected the application searches the associated server for the channel and determines whether it is a processor or device channel It also determines if the channel is an analog or digital channel If the channel is not found on the server an error message is displayed and the selection is cancelled Configuring Digital Channels The following fields can be configured for digital channels v Enable Channel Description One Second Pulse Low State Description OFF High State Description ON Event Checking LOW STATE v Alarm Error Checking r p p Alarms Alarm State LOW STATE v Alarm Priority 1 255 f0 Alarm Delay secs 0 Drive Common Alarm Alarm Message Version 4 0 0 415 Part Ten Data Exchange Enable Channel Click this check box on to enable the channel Description Enter up to 16 characters to describe a processor channel Enter up to 32 characters to describe a device channel Low State Description Enter up to 32 characters to describe a device channel in low state Hi
260. isplayed on the control This property must be set before all other tic properties The TiclD property is used to select the tic set to which tic properties apply ScalelD Determines the scale on which the tic set currently selected by TicID is based The TicStartValue and TicStopValue properties must fall within the range defined by ScaleMaxValue and ScaleMinValue Shape Determines the shape of a user defined tic set This property only applies when TicStyle is set to User Defined and defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the upper left corner of the area defined by the tic size parameters TicWidth etc Start Stop Property Determines the values at which the tic marks start and stop for the tic set currently selected by TicID These values are numbers between ScaleMin and ScaleMax for the scale referenced by TicScalelD Style Determines the style of the tic set currently selected by TicID Width Determines the width of the tic marks for the tic set currently selected by TicID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Note See Generic Configuration Fields for information on fonts background and digital Version 4 0 0 219 Part Five Monitors Drawing a Linear Gauge Example We will now go through an example of drawing a linear gauge similar to the one below Ste
261. it is possible to identify a section of a log file and export the data of that portion of the logged file to another file in a format compatible with industry standard spreadsheet packages To select the area of interest move the mouse pointer into the graph area of the Window and to the start of the area to export Hold the mouse button down and drag to the end of the area A dotted rectangular box will be displayed enclosing the area that is required to export From the File Menu gt choose the Export Data command Using the tool bar select the 4 button Version 4 0 0 397 Part Seven Replays A Data Export Dialog Box will appear For the full details in completing the Data Export dialog box please refer to the section on Data Export at the start of this part of the User Guide Printing A Trend To Print a Trend ensure the Trend Window to be printed is active If not point the mouse anywhere in the required window and click If the Trend Window is not visible from the Window Menu choose the correct window from the list at the bottom of the Window menu list Each Trend Window bears the name of the configuration filename used in that window The following facilities are used to set up the task to print a Trend to the printer Page Setup command File menu From the File Menu choose Page Setup to set the page orientation margins and size of the trend to be printed Print command File menu From the File Menu choose Print to print
262. italx zl foso PotionDigtav foso DigitalPosition foso Portions Determines the number of portions displayed on the control This property must be set before all other portion properties The PortionID property is used to select the portion to which other portion properties apply Portion Color Determines the color of the portion currently selected by PortionlD Portion Digital Color Determines the color of the numeric value of the portion currently selected by PortionID Portion Digital X Portion Digital Y Determines the color of the numeric value of the portion currently selected by PortionID PortionID When multiple portions exist PortionID is used to index the portion to which the other portion properties apply The total number of portions is determined by the Portions property and PortionID has valid values from 0 to Portions 1 Portion Percent Determines the percent value of the portion currently selected by PortionID Version 4 0 0 229 Part Five Monitors PortionPicture Determines the graphic to be displayed in the portion currently selected by PortionID Portion Value Determines the numeric value associated with the portion currently selected by PortionID The size of each portion is determined by the PortionValue and the PercentMode that is currently selected When PercentMode is set to 0 Simple or 1 Percent portion sizes are determined by setting Po
263. ither by installing the RTE OPC server or running the supplied registry file RemoteOPCServer reg Once this is done the required steps are to Default COM Settings From the Start bar choose Run Enter DCOMCNFG into the edit field and Click OK Expand Component Services and Computers Right Click on My Computer and select Properties Version 4 0 0 440 Part Ten Data Exchange My Computer Properties e E EN Default Protocols COM Security General Options 7 Enable Distributed COM on this computer Enable COM Intemet Services on this computer Default Distributed COM Communication Properties The Authentication Level specifies security at the packet level The impersonation level specifies whether applications can determine who is calling them and whether the application can do operations using the client s identity Default Impersonation Level Identity Security for reference tracking can be provided if authentication is used and that the default impersonation level is not anonymous Provide additional security for reference tracking Leam more about setting these properties ok j Cw Apy From the Default Properties Tab set the Default Authentication Level to None Set the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Note The Orchestrator Service must be configured to run as a user on the client system To configure the Orchestrator Service t
264. ity of all the operators Highest Parenthesis Logical NOT Powers Multiply Divide Addition Subtraction lt lt gt gt Relational amp Logical AND OR Conditional Assignment Lowest lt lt gt gt Compound Example 44 5 2 2 4 5 2 2 For the first expression in the example above the system will calculate the result as 24 whereas the second expression will yield a result of 36 Where two or more operators have the same priority then the expressions are evaluated left to right Example 4 5 2 yields 10 5 2 4 yields 10 Function Calls A Function Call consists of a function name followed by an expression list in parenthesis An expression list is a list of parameters each separated by a comma The function uses each parameter to produce the function call result Example pulse hour min sec Each function produces only one result so a function call is an expression that can be used as an operand and used as part of more complex formula Functions can be used within either function calls as an item or in the parameter list Example greatest DS1 pulse 06 0 0 The function call greatest x y returns the result of the largest value that Orchestrator channel attains X is the Orchestrator Channel when r is TRUE O the value is reset and the greatest value is the current value The call pulse h m s returns a value of TRUE 1 for the scan when the computer
265. k KnobMultiTurn NOT Checked KnobSnap NOT Checked Style Complex KnobRadius 0 65 Step 5 Now we will configure the Mark on the Knob i e the small red mark on the knob Set the configuration fields as follows Color Red Inner Radius 0 5 Outer Radius 0 8 Width 0 4 Style Triangle That s the knob configured now to make it functional we must assign a channel to it Step 6 Configure a User Analog channel right click the control select data source properties and assign it the channel you just created Set the monitor on value entry mode and use the mouse to turn it If you like you could set up the above knob along with the gauge in the previous example and assign the same channel to them This will demonstrate the functionality of both of the controls Version 4 0 0 209 Part Five Monitors Linear Gauges LGauge is a multi purpose highly customizable linear gauge that can be configured as a slider for input or as a meter for output Its dynamic property pages provide a powerful tool for designing gauges with full control of scales pointers fonts operation bands and tics With its data aware and mouse input features LGauge is an ideal display element for technical interfaces Multiple Scales 0 50 100150200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Ped omeno Scale Range Example e O 005115 2 253 35 4 45 5 2 6 y 10 Ask Bid 16 000 16 375 10 23 a a 8
266. k the Apply button Default Security e Select the COM Security tab 2 General Options Default Properties Default Protocols COM Security MSDTC Access Permissions You may edit who is allowed default access to applications You may also set limits on applications that determine their own permissions Caution Modifying access permissions can affect the ability of applications to start connect function and or run securely Launch and Activation Permissions You may edit who is allowed by default to launch applications or activate objects You may also set limits on applications that determine their own permissions Caution Modifying launch and activation permissions can affect the ability of applications to start connect function and or run securely Edit Limits Edit Defaut Leam more about setting these properties Version 4 0 0 435 Part Ten Data Exchange Access Permissions Edit the Default Access Permission Add both the SYSTEM account and the required users groups to the list of users groups who are Allowed Access Click Edit Limits By Default the Everyone group has already been added Ensure that the Everyone group has remote access checked Once DCOM has been configured you can remove the Everyone group and define a smaller subset of users if required Launch and Activation Permissions Edit the Default Launch Permission Add bo
267. kbook Code Bl x EZ File Edit View Insert Format Debug Run Tools Add Ins Window Help le xS ga Hyaa a ew C Sy 01 Project VBAProject xi Private Sub Workbook Openi pplication RTD ThrottleInterval 1000 To set the throttle interval higher through the registry set the following registry key Itis a DWORD and is in milliseconds HKEY CURRENT USER Software Microsoft Office 10 0 Excel Options RTDThrottleInterval Version 4 0 0 408 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Dynamic Data Exchange Dynamic Data Exchange DDE is the traditional protocol to transfer data between Windows applications The DDE protocol is a set of messages and guidelines It sends messages between applications that share data and uses window messages to exchange data between applications Applications can use the DDE protocol for one time data transfers and for continuous exchanges in which applications send updates to one another as new data becomes available The Orchestrator system has a set of pre defined DDE links Starting and Stopping DDE To enable or disable the DDE server within Orchestrator from the main Orchestrator application window choose Control menu from the drop down list and select DDE The following dialog box will be displayed PRODUCT NAME DDE PRODUCT NAME DDE Status Disabled Startup The Start and Stop buttons are used to start and stop the DDE link The Start up button allows the
268. l type files associated with the data source A user with read access only to a data source cannot reconfigure the data source No Access to Configuration By denying access totally to a user on a data source configuration that data source is hidden from the user completely in both Orchestrator Main Menu and Configurable Monitor N B If a user has no access to a data source configuration file the user will not be able to read or write the data source s configuration nor will they be able to monitor the values from the data source It is not possible to hide a data source configuration but still allow monitoring of the data source Protecting the System Monitoring In order to prevent a user from monitoring or changing channel values you must set the permissions on the Channel Type file s for the data source Monitoring and Setting Channel Values To allow the user to monitor and change values for a data source first of all grant the user at least Read access to the data source s configuration file Then grant the user read and write access for each channel type file you want the user to be able to monitor and set values for For example if there exists a device on the system called DEVICE1 and it has a device number of 1 and has the following channel types Devicel Analog Input Channels Devicel Digital Input Channels Devicel Analog Output Channels Devicel Digital Output Channels 452 Appendix B Security a
269. lable on SQL Server m Logger Database Default User Defined Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPI Persist Security Info Select v Replicate via Merge Push Subscription Target Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPlI Persist Security Info Drop Merge Publications and Subscriptions After o Cycle To connect to an SQL Server database click the provider tab and select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server as shown below C Data Link Properties Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Native Client The Data Link properties tab will now look like the image below Version 4 0 0 326 Part Six Loggers r Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced a Specify the following to connect to SQL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name
270. lays Data Export Logged data files stored by any ORCHESTRATOR loggers can be converted into file formats suitable for importing into industry standard spreadsheets such as Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1 2 3 The ORCHESTRATOR Data Export facility allows the user to carry out such conversions When the Data Export facility is selected the user is prompted as follows Q MESVIS160 aidan mallon demo PRODUCT NAME File View Control Monitors Devices Processors Loggers Help CE amp m ALARM NOTEPAD LOG FILE SYNCRONISATION DATA EXPORT d Replay File Selection TRENDS gt Replay Database Selection Replay Log Files If the Replay File selection is chosen the following file dialog is displayed DATA EXPORT Select Log File Look in LOGGED DATA e amp t Be Size Aidan Mallon A Computer A Files of type Data Log Files ODL Cancel Description File name v Version 4 0 0 354 Part Seven Replays The directories box will show the logged data directory open and a list of all the logger sub directories Each sub directory will bear the logger name that created the directory Select the appropriate directory by either pointing to it and double clicking the mouse or select the directory and press OK r DATA EXPORT Select Log File mom Look in LOGGER 1 rr Ed Name Date modif Type Size Files of type Da
271. left of the dialog the user can by positioning the mouse pointer over the palette and holding the left mouse button down select a new color Clicking on the OK button returns you to the Color Setup Dialog Box Version 4 0 0 127 Part Five Monitors Organizing Windows Within the Channel Monitor Main Window Channel Monitor Windows can be organized to suit the users requirements E Channel Monitor SIMULATED File View Options Configuration Help nnw nme e Cascade De Im Desorption T4 or zomaly Tile Vertically Random 1 Random 0 Random5 Random 0 amp rrengelcons Random10 Random er T 1 SIMULATED Random100 Random 0 Random1000 Random 0 1000 DISABLED DISARI FN IMESVISI60 SIMULATED 11 22 18 Initially when a new Channel Monitor Window is created it will lay over the top of any other window within the Channel Monitor Main Window Channel Monitor Windows can be brought to the front by either pointing to any exposed part of the required window or clicking or by choosing Window from the menu bar and then selecting the appropriate channel group window From the Window menu option windows can be arranged in a Cascade or Tile layout By creating a new window and then minimizing it the Channel Monitor Main Window can comprise of one or more icons representing each channel monitor window Choosing the Arrange Icon option from the Window menu will organize any icons uniformly in the window All Channel Monitor Win
272. les X Axis TracklD o ex BandColor TrackBands fo Ex BandPicture TrackBandlD fo E TrackBandStart _ 0 00 TrackBandStop _ 0 00 TrackID When multiple tracks exist TracklD is used to index the track to which the other track properties apply The total number of tracks is determined by the Tracks property and TracklD has valid values from 0 to Tracks 1 TrackBands Determines the total number of Track Bands displayed on the control for each Track This property must be set before all other TrackBand properties The TrackBandID property is used to select which TrackBand you apply the TrackBand properties to i e TrackBandColor TrackBandStart TrackBandStop or TrackBandPicture The TrackID will determine which Track the TrackBands are assigned to If you have more than one Track each Track will have its own TrackBands settings TrackBandID Determines the current TrackBand to apply TrackBand property changes to It is the index to the TrackBand TrackBandStart TrackBandStop Determines the range of the TrackBand Scaling units are in Track units based on TrackMin and TrackMax BandColor Determines the color of the current TrackBandlD BandPicture Sets the picture for the current TrackBandlD Version 4 0 0 264 Part Five Monitors Variables Channels Determines the number of variables maintained by the control This property must be set before all other variable properties The V
273. ll other caption properties The CaptionID property is used to select the caption to which caption properties apply Caption X Caption Y Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the caption currently selected by the CaptionID property These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located at the center of the control Hubs Hubs are decorative caps over the axis of rotation of a given needle Properties are used to modify the hub s style radius and associated scale ne Properties gt Library Background Annulars Captions Digtal Fonts Fames H ubs Needles Scales Tics GMS Hubs 1 HublD Hiis ScaelD D H Cor Radius GJE es bh Color Determines the color for the hub currently selected by HubID HubID When multiple hubs exist HubID is used to index the hub to which the other hub properties apply The total number of hubs is determined by the Hubs property and HubID has valid values from 0 to Hubs 1 Version 4 0 0 191 Part Five Monitors HubRadius Determines the radius of the hub currently selected by HubID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Hubs Determines the number of hubs displayed on the control This property must be set before all other hub properties The HubID property is used to select the hub to which hu
274. lly configured your MAPI or SMTP settings an email should be sent each time your logger cycles or stops logging Version 4 0 0 313 Part Six Loggers Exporting Data Exporting to Microsoft Excel During configuration of a file for export to Excel choose a Delimiter as a Comma and the End Line separator as CR LF The File Type should be defined as Data Exchange Format DIF Within the Excel Spreadsheet package to import the file Choose the File Open command and in the List Files of Type drop down list choose Data Interchange Format DIF Choose the correct file and it will import correctly into the spreadsheet Exporting to Other Spreadsheet Applications During configuration of a file for export to other spreadsheet applications like Lotus 1 2 3 choose a Delimiter as a Comma and the End Line separator as CR LF The File Type should be defined as Spreadsheet PRN Printing Logged Data The Data Export utility can be used to prepare logged data to be printed using the Notepad Program within Windows Configure the data for Export in the way described in this chapter Choose either Comma or Tab as the Delimiter The End Line separator should be defined as CR LF The File Type in the Select Data Export Output File should be set as Text File TXT The resulting file can be opened in Notepad and then printed Selecting Data Export File To export a file all that needs to be done is to specify the path and name of the file
275. loggers have been configured the name of the logger in both the menu list and the Logger Control Dialog box will change to the current configuration name of the logger A general description of each of the Standard Logger Configuration tabs is as follows General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced General Allows for specification of start stop times and mode of logging for each logger Channels Allows the channels which need to be logged to be selected Events Allows selection of channels to act as triggers for logging Text Allows text automatically to be added to the log file s Export Allows for log files to be converted into spreadsheet and text file for viewing and analysis Advanced Allows for specification of the way data is written to disk and provides a disk space checking function Version 4 0 0 295 Part Six Loggers The General Tab General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Logger Name Enter a name for the logger that describes the information being collected Up to 25 alphanumeric characters can be used in the name The name selected cannot be the same as any already chosen for other loggers The name must not be blank and must follow Microsoft Windows file naming conventions Autostart If the Autostart check box is checked this logger will start collecting data automatically when the Orchestrator System is started Logger Type Three differe
276. lue it will simply be truncated to the space available simply showing zero if that is all that can be displayed Whenever the number is too large to fit in the chosen field the display will show OVERFLOW or O F depending on the size of the field Data Conversion r Edit Channel Properties Data Source Properties Visual Properties Display Options Data Conversion Iv Digital To Analog Analog Scaling Statistical Process Control Ranae Start At o c Stop At eo E c Step Value Rate Of Change 100 ms Introduction This property page allows a channel condition non zero to be converted to simulate a shape It allows for Digital to Analog conversion Analog Scaling and Statistical Process Control SPS The displayed value on the control for the channel being monitored will depend on the parameters of the conversion Version 4 0 0 179 Part Five Monitors An example of the uses for this conversion is if we wanted an Angular Gauge to go from 0 to 60 when a certain Digital Channel goes into high state We simply select the channel to be monitored to be the Digital Channel in question then set the data conversion to be Digital To Analog and enter in the parameters for the conversion see bitmap above for example Digital to Analog Range Start At The conversion value to start at Stop At The conversion value to stop at Step Value n The step value to increment the conversion process Rate
277. m Monitor Configurable Monitor Refer to the Part 5 of the manual for details on monitors Replay Menu Data export Trends Log File Synchronisation Refer to the Part 6 of the manual for details on replays Devices Menu Allows the user to configure Orchestrator device drivers Refer to the appropriate Manual for you device driver Processors Menu Allows the user to configure the Orchestrator Processors Refer to part 4 of the user guide for details of processor configuration and operation Version 4 0 0 51 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Loggers Menu Allows the user to configure the Orchestrator Loggers Refer to part 6 for details of logger configuration Version 4 0 0 52 Part Three Configuring Channels Part Three Channel configuration Part Three describes in detail how to configure Channels in Orchestrator Version 4 0 0 53 Part Three Configuring Channels Channel Configuration a Configure USER ANALOG CHANNELS MESVIS160 m File Edit View Control Help M S wsgafB e ve Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration Ep CHANNELL TEMPA L3 a p2 CHANNEL2 TEMPB FLE CHANNEL3 TEMPC ips CHANNELS TEMPD P6 DISABLED a p7 DISABLED ups DISABLED 3 P9 DISABLED P10 DISABLED apu DISABLED a p12 DISABLED EEE DISABLED HP DISABLED ipis DISABLED F P16 DISABLED For Help press Fi s System Disabled No Errors Zi Ja Channel Configuration wi
278. m minutes and s seconds Provides a pulse on a repeated basis every h hours m minutes and s seconds after the last pulse When r 1 TRUE the timer is reset and the next pulse is produced after a further h m s time Provides a pulse when x changes state from zero to non zero or non zero to zero FALSE to TRUE or TRUE to FALSE Any change of state Provides a pulse when x changes state from zero to non zero FALSE to TRUE e g A channel going of an alarm state Provides a pulse when x changes state from non zero to zero TRUE to FALSE e g A channel going out of an alarm state The lesser of x and y The greater of x and y If x y then logical 1 else 0 If x gt y then logical 1 else 0 The least value that x has attained When r becomes non zero reset greatest to current value of x The range between the greatest value of x and the least value of x When r becomes non zero reset to current value of range dx dt change of z against time Integral of x with respect to time When r is non zero reset integral to v i e Li Ioa xdt logarithmic average of x with a gain of y E e Fu y x 1 yr Statistical mean of x When r is non zero reset mean Standard deviation of x When r is non zero reset deviation Version Error Reference source not found 84 Part Four Steam Table Functions The Steam Table Functions are a List of functions that calculate the thermodynamic and transp
279. machines must then be configured as per the following pages Note that this document describes only one method by which a remote client can use DCOM to connect to a OPC server If a server machine is already configured to run DCOM there may be no configuration necessary on the server machine However this document assumes DCOM has never been previously used on the server machine zT id Typethe name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you r Open dcomcnfg Cancel Browse Likewise if the client application is a true DCOM client then all that may be necessary on the client machine is to install the OPC server and the client application will allow users to specify a remote server However this document assumes a simple COM client application where the RTE OPC Server machine name must be hard coded on the client machine Version 4 0 0 433 Part Ten Data Exchange Server Machine The server machine is assumed to already have the Orchestrator OPC Server registered installed After this the main changes required are to configure the system and security to allow remote users to connect The method described in the following pages does this by allowing all COM servers to be used by the specified remote users If it is necessary to have tighter control of COM DCOM security permissions contact your security administrator for alternative configuration opt
280. me If you are using the Sentinel Superpro key click the Hardware Key Sentinel SuperPro Key button If you will be using a software key then click the Software key button and installation of the software will continue If you are using a software key you can skip the sentinel and HASP Driver installion section below and proceed to the Orchestrator client installation section Select Components Select the component you want to install Please select the component that you want to install B Hardware Key HASP HL Key d Z Hardware Key Sentinel SuperPro Key r2 Software Key lt Back Wen Cancel Version 4 0 0 31 Part One Installation Procedure HASP Runtime Driver Installation Hardware Key only If you are using a USB key do not plug the key into the machine until the HASP runtime driver phase has been completed see below After you click the HASP HL Key button a command line installation will run as shown in the image below wait for it to complete Sentinel HASP Run time Enviro Once the installtion is complete it will Show you a message as below simply click OK to continue to the installtion of the ORCHESTRATOR client inn n ar La 2 9 099 V TRY TEETH TN Cenc ed VEHI Y You can now connect your USB Hardware Key it will be automaticlly recognised and installed Version 4 0 0 32 Part One Installation Procedure Sentinel Protection System installation Hardware key only If
281. menu select Open and then browse to the Computer that contains the mal file you wish to open When you choose open the Alarm Monitor File will open embedded into your web browser Not that you can open a mal file across the network using the Alarm Monitor Application or any other ActiveX Document Server Applications i e Microsoft FrontPage 98 and Microsoft Binder for example Version 4 0 0 168 Part Five Monitors Alarm Monitor Menu Commands File Menu Commands The File menu offers the following commands New Open Close Monitor Save Save As Page Setup Print Print Preview Print Setup Exit Creates a New Alarm Monitor Window Document Opens an existing Alarm Monitoring Window document Closes an opened Alarm Monitoring Window Document Saves an opened Alarm Monitoring Window document using the same file name Saves the active Alarm Monitor document with a new file name Changes the printed page settings Prints an Alarm Monitoring document Displays the Alarm Monitoring document on the screen as it would appear printed Selects a printer and printer connection Exits Alarm Monitor Application View Menu Commands The View menu offers the following commands Toolbar Status Bar Always On Top Gridlines Full Screen Shows or hides the toolbar Shows or hides the status bar Shows the Alarm Monitor on top of all other windows Offers the ability to turn the Gridlines on or off Toggles full
282. milar to Monday October 13 1997 10 19 19 Version 4 0 0 269 Part Five Monitors General Rhe Properties Tracks Track Bands Variables j Library Background Captions Fonts Stamps MaxBufferSize 200 Cursor Made o Disabled amp DisplayMode lo Pan v Handles lo none Orientation fo Horizontal Grids 3 both v GridColor Area Top gt l 0 10 v Enable Panning Bottom J Joes V Enable Track Sizing Left E 0 10 WrapCursorColor Right ight oss WrapCursorwidth Bo MaxBufferSize Determines the total size of the holding array buffer for the data In other words if you set the MaxBufferSize to 1000 the Strip Chart control will allocate enough memory for 1000 data points MaxBufferSize uses a FIFO First in First Out memory structure DisplayMode Determines how the Strip Chart displays the data set Setting the DisplayMode to Pan will scroll the data continuously across the screen like a standard Strip Chart The Wrap setting allows the data to remain static on the screen while a line moves across the plot area and everything behind the line is repainted with the new data Orientation Determines whether the control is displayed horizontally or vertically Cursor Mode Determines the movement or placement of the cursor line on the control When the CursorMode is set to CursorEnabled or CursorSnap a line will appear along t
283. mines the size of the symbol used in the stamp Version 4 0 0 272 Part Five Monitors StampSymbolUserDefined Determines the shape of the symbol used as a stamp In general it defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs drawn in a 1000 to 1000 square region StampSymbolSize may be used to adjust the symbol s size Drawing a Strip Chart Example In this section we will go through the steps required to make a simple strip chart like the one below Strip Chart Example EE LL ee 2 Step 1 m After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the strip chart a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the strip chart is of the required size A strip chart will appear this is the default setting for the strip chart gauge but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 Right click on the strip chart you have just drawn a popup dialog will appear choose Visual Display Properties from the pop up menu Version 4 0 0 273 Part Five Step 3 First we set up the Tracks of the strip Chart Select the Tracks tab and configure the fields as follows Tracks 2 Now set up each track as follows Monitors TracklD TrackColor Max Min Display Display Majo
284. mon alarm output Alarm Printer If a printer is to be dedicated as an Alarm Printer check the Enable Alarm Printing check box and select the printer port that is to be used from the drop down list Parallel ports are designated LPT1 LPT2 etc Serial ports are designated COM1 COM2 etc If the user selects the other option from the printer drop down list the Select Alarm Printer Name dialog will be invoked This dialog allows the user to enter another name for the printer port Parallel Printers Click on the Settings button to specify the Transmission Retry Time The Transmission Retry Time is the time for which the Print Manager will wait for a printer to set itself up to print the next section of information A Printer Not Ready message will appear if the printer is not ready within the time specified Serial Printers Click on the Settings button of the Alarm System Configuration Window to set up the serial communication information required for the PC to communicate with the printer The first dialog box that is displayed asks for the port name select the appropriate port designation Click on the Settings button in the Ports dialog box By using the Drop Down Lists for each section select the correct settings for the printer configuration to be used Note USB and TCP printer ports are not supported Version Error Reference source not found 95 Part Four Configuring Processors r COMI Properties
285. mpersand i e Daily Choke amp Daily Rates This channel list specifies the channels required for export If the trend files did not exist the trend buttons would not appear Click Trendi to open the first trend Daily Choke ort it will zoom to the start and stop time indicated in the Start and Stop time section Click the export image button to export the image of the trend accept the default name of the image Exported images are stored in the Exported Images directory by default amp Trends Daily Choke ort ea File Edit View Pan In the excel spreadsheet template add the following keywords C EDGEX EXPORTED_IMAGES chanlist_1 jpg C EDGEX EXPORTED_IMAGES chanlist_2 jpg This will automate the trends to place them in the position required when automating the export Replay Periods Multiple Time Periods Only The replay periods section allows selection of the time periods specified in the log in order to configure the channels and data intervals required for those periods Replay Periods Inital Main Flow Cleanup Flow In order to configure the channels for export for each of the individual time periods click the name of the period in the Replay Periods section The following dialog will appear Version 4 0 0 360 Part Seven Replays Select Replay Period Dd Start Time 15 10 2009 Jv 12 05 03 Inital Stop Time 15 10 2009 iv 12 06 10 Replay Channels
286. munications Links Dialog select the Set Recovery Rates Tab button You are immediately brought to the Recovery Rates Screen that provides you with information on the recovery rates of each server you are connected to mcum Edit Communication Settings SQ Set Update Rates Set Recovery Rates Set Recovery Rate Click on a Server and enter the relevant recovery rate for that Server into the minutes seconds and mili seconds boxes provided Servers In Use i Recovery Rate MESVIS160 15000 Server Names and Recovery i i Rates L Set Recovery Rate i i Server MESVIS160 M Sources ALL CHANNELS 0 5 99 0 gt 59 10 gt 999 Recovery Rate I Recovery Rate 300 Seos 5 Ms E N Section Cancel Help Select the server you require and then the following data should be present 1 In the Set Recovery Rate Section the server name and the update rate should be displayed in minutes seconds and milliseconds on the bottom of the dialog for manipulation To alter the Recovery Rate for the server in question 1 Click on the List box where it displays the name of the server you wish to change 2 In the Set Recovery Rate section enter the new Recovery rate values into the minutes seconds and milliseconds boxes Mins Secs Ms 3 You can repeat the process 1 and 2 above to select different servers and alter their recovery rate 4 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to quit Version 4 0
287. n Different Configurable monitor Windows Command Help Menu Commands The Help menu offers the following commands which provide you assistance with this application Lists all on line topics available Using Help Displays instructions about how to use the on line help Displays program information version number copyright etc Version 4 0 0 292 Part Six Loggers Part Six Logging utilities Part Six provides details on the Logging Utilities available within Orchestrator Version 4 0 0 293 Part Six Loggers Logger Configuration Up to 64 loggers are available in the Orchestrator Software package During the installation of the software package a lesser number may have been chosen A logger stores information on the hard disk about selected channels for analysis after recording has finished Each logger is configured and enabled independently allowing the user to define which channels are logged and the way in which the logger operates This section deals with the configuration and use of the loggers See Part Seven Replaying Logged Data for ways in which the logged data can be used and replayed Selecting a Logger Loggers can be selected for configuration in several ways Go to the Start Menu then Programs Orchestrator Loggers Each logger is identified by an icon bearing the name LOGGER 1 LOGGER 2 LOGGER N up to the nth number of loggers selected during the installation of the software package To sel
288. n Settings item from the Monitor menu 2 The following dialog will then appear Monitor PRODUCT NAME Communications Servers in use Update Rate ms Set Recovery Rate Set Update Rate Sources Cancel Help For servers to appear in this dialog al least one channel object must be configured and mapped to a server 3 The network can then be configured as desired By clicking on the desired button the dialog for that communication setting will appear See below for related topics Setting Communications Rates The recovery rate specifies how long the client will wait for the server to recover i e the server has gone down The update rate specifies how often Configurable monitor will retrieve values form the server Setting the Recovery Rate Choose Communications settings from the Monitor menu Carry out the following operations 1 At the Monitor Communications dialog select the server you want to set the recovery rate for Highlighting the appropriate server using the mouse or keyboard can do this Version 4 0 0 284 Part Five Monitors 2 Click on the Set Recovery Rate Button 3 The Set Recovery Rate Server Name dialog appears Set Recovery Rate MESVIS160 Recovery Rate Mins 15 Secs jo Ms Cancel Help 4 Enter your recovery rate in minutes seconds and milliseconds 5 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to quit Setting the Update Rate The upd
289. n the channel reading goes above the high alarm limit of 80 it will trigger the alarm The alarm will not be reset until the channel reading falls below 75 the high limit Hysteresis value Check the box if this feature is needed Enter the value of the dead band in the text box Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of this alarm Drive Common Alarm A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Alarm Message Version 4 0 0 An Alarm Message can be defined to be displayed on the Status line of the Orchestrator Main Window when a channel goes into an alarm state Enter the message up to 32 characters 61 Part Three Configuring Channels Windows Buttons Eight buttons are at the bottom of the Configure Channel Window Their use is explained below OK When a channel has been successfully configured click the OK button to accept and move back to the previous window Cancel i Clicking on the Cancel button will nullify any changes made The configuration of that channel will remain the same The previous window will be displayed Copy If the configuration of the current channel is to be repeated clicking on this button will copy the configuration to the Windows Clipboard Paste i When a configuration has been copied
290. n the control s static or dynamic buffer FontiD Determines which font is used for the caption currently selected by CaptionID CaptionID When multiple captions exist CaptionID is used to index the caption to which the other caption properties apply The total number of captions is determined by the Captions property and CaptionID has valid values from 0 to Captions 1 Version 4 0 0 234 Part Five Monitors Captions Determines the number of captions displayed on the control This property must be set before all other caption properties The CaptionID property is used to select the caption to which caption properties apply Caption X Y Position Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the caption currently selected by the CaptionID property These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located at the center of the control Knob There are several styles of knobs that may be used in the selector switch control Properties are provided to modify the knob s style inner outer radii width and color Additionally user defined shapes may be specified g Properties Library Background Auto Captions Fonts Frame Selections GMS KnobColor KnobPicture MouseControl 2 Snap To KnobRadius 4 mj 0 65 KnobDffsex 4 L 0 00 Knob ffsetv m gt 0 00 KnobStyle 2 Complex KnobUserDe
291. nciation Destination This field shows the destination string if applicable The field cannot be modified directly If a users wishes to modify destination then they must click the Select button which will display a dialog box that will allow all specific parameters to be modified Source The source fields specifies which channels will drive the alarm annunciation Two sources are provided Channel Range and Priority If Channel Range is selected from the drop down list then clicking the range button will display a dialog box that will allow the user to select an appropriate channel range Channel ranges can only be a contiguous channel block If the user wishes annunciations to be sent by multiple blocks then multiple annunciatiors must be configured If Priority is selected from the drop down list then clicking the range button will display a dialog box that will allow the user to select an appropriate priority range Version Error Reference source not found 103 Part Four Configuring Processors Alarm System Annunciator Options amc m General Alarms Wamings Masking Watchdog IV Alarm Annunciation Annuciate on alarm Annunciate each alam Options v Repeat Alarm Until Acknowledged Repeat Rate o seconds V Annunciate alarm clear Annunciate each clear Options V Annunciate alam ack Annunciate each ack Options Alarm Annunciation The first alarm in an alarm gro
292. ncluded A link must be created in the design view of either Form or Report Create the report or form as normal creating a text box to contain the linked data Select the Properties dialog box for this text box A typical Properties box is shown below r Text Box Temperature Temperature v Format Data Event Other Al NONE oo vow ese ad mo IV Temperature Control Source s DDE Orchdde Channel c3 Tb Format see ears e en DecdmalPlaces s Auto InputMask sss Default Value sss ME Hok roce No IE MOG saa No Control IME Sentence Mode None Validation Rule s Validstian Tovt In the Control Source property field enter the DDE function the syntax of which is DDE application Topic Item The field names are enclosed within speech marks As an example to create a link to Orchestrator calculator channel C3 the statement would be entered as follows DDE Orchdde Channel C3 Version 4 0 0 412 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange DDE across Networks N B Netbeui must be installed on the machine in order for Network DDE to operate on Windows NT N B Network DDE is not supported on Windows 95 or Windows 98 Orchestrator includes a set of NetDDE shares which allow DDE links over network to a remote Client Orchestrator must be prepared for DDE service as described at the beginning of this section In addit
293. nd count to the position of the logger s name in the menu starting from 0 449 Appendix B Security Hel 0 gt Control Loggers Ctrl L 1 LOGGER 1 2 gt LOGGER 2 3 LOGGER 3 4 gt LOGGER 4 5 gt LOGGER 5 6 5 LOGGER 6 7 LOGGER 7 8 gt LOGGER 8 9 LOGGER 9 10 gt LOGGER 10 11 LOGGER 11 12 gt LOGGER 12 13 gt LOGGER 13 14 9 LOGGER 14 15 gt LOGGER 15 16 LOGGER 16 In the above Orchestrator Main Menu Loggers menu the logger named Engine Control room is number 2 and therefore its configuration file is called standard 2 Likewise the logger named Power Use in number 11 its configuration file is called standard 11 The full path from the Orchestrator root directory to the Power Use loggers configuration file is therefore CURRENT CONFIGNLOGGERS standard 11 Channel File Types Each data source in Orchestrator has one or more channel types associated with it There are five possible channel types in all Analog Input Digital Input Analog Output Digital Output Counter Input A processor typically has one channel type of the output variety associated with it A device can have anything from one to all five channel types associated with it Loggers don t have any Channel Type Files associated with them as they are not a data source The Channel Type File s associated with a data source are located in the data source s configuration sub directory T
294. nd specify the repeat interval and optionally align time Detailed description on repeat interval and align time settings is explained in Alarm Logging section Pager Destination Settings The following settings may be specified for each pager configured in the system Pager Settings Properties I Pager Settings Properties Pager Settings Pager Settings AlphaNumeric C Numeric AlphaNumeric CI Com Port cOM1 z Com Port cOM1 z Pager Number 9 08651566 Test Pager Number 93 03651566 Test configuration configuration PIN 123 Send Delay 10 Seconds Timeout 30 Seconds Cancel Apply Help Cancel Apply Help Pager Type The user may choose to send pages to either an alphanumeric pager or to a simpler numeric pager If Numeric is chosen then the PIN field will not appear as it is not required for numeric pagers Instead two fields Send delay and Timeout appear Com Port This field specifies the modem port to be used for sending information to the pager Pager Number This field allows the user to specify the number of the pager to which the text message will be sent Some systems as in the one above may require special characters in order to open a phone If these are required then they should appear before the actual pager number PIN If an AlphaNumeric pager has been selected then the user must specify an appropriate PIN This will be used by the paging service pr
295. nd you want the user to be able to monitor and set values of all channels then grant the user read and write access to the ai di ao and do files in the DEVICE1_1 configuration directory Monitoring Channels Only By their nature all input channel types are read only and therefore their values are not set within the Orchestrator system Output channels however can also have their channel values altered by the user using the Orchestrator Configurable Monitor To allow a user to monitor an output channel s value but prevent them from altering that value grant the user read access only on the Channel Type s corresponding Channel Type File For example if there exists a device on the system called DEVICE1 and it has a device number of 1 and has the following channel types Devicel Analog Input Channels Devicel Digital Input Channels Devicel Analog Output Channels Devicel Digital Output Channels and you want the user to be able to monitor and set values of the digital output channel type but only monitor the analog output channel type then grant the user read and write access to the do file but only read access on the ao ai and di channel type files in the DEVICE1_1 configuration directory No Access to Channel Types You can hide a particular channel type completely from the user for monitoring purposes To do this set the users access permissions on the channel type file to No Ac
296. nding the area of the trend selected Clearing the selection To clear the selection click the right mouse button over the trend area and select the Clear Selection option in the menu which appears Zooming in on a trend Zooming In One step at a Time The time scale is divided into three areas You can select an area and zoom by a factor of 2 The Time Base will have changed e g from 60 mins to 30 mins The zoom can be repeated many times until the time base is equal to one log period Selecting Zoom Left zooms the left half of the screen Zoom Right the right hand half of the screen and Zoom Centre the central half of the screen See the previous picture The time base frame width and the date of the logged data is shown to the left of the time axis Zoom Left Top Use this command to Zoom the left half of a horizontal trend or the top half of a vertical trend by a factor of 2 Using Zoom Menu choose Left for horizontal trends or Top for vertical trends Using Fast Key to Zoom Left Top When the required Trend Window is active use the F5 Function Key for horizontal trends and CTRL F5 Function Key for vertical trends Using Toolbar Button To zoom the left half of the screen one step choose the F button for horizontal trends and r for vertical trends Zoom Centre Use this command to Zoom the central part of the window by a factor of 2 Using Zoom Menu choose Centre Version 4 0 0 392 Part Seven Replays Using Fast Key W
297. ndow will show which channels have been configured Channels not yet configured will bear the tag description of DISABLED Channels that have been configured will be shown with a tag description and a channel description To configure a channel point to and double click the mouse button on the channel to be configured Alternatively select a channel click on the Configure Channel button ALT C or press Return A Configure Channel Dialog box will be displayed Version 4 0 0 54 Part Three Configuring Channels Advanced Channel Configuration AutoEnable Before any Channels can be incorporated into the overall Orchestrator System the Advanced Configuration bar must be selected and the AutoEnable User Analogs box checked Now when the Orchestrator system is enabled from the Main Menu the User Analog channels will automatically be enabled also 3 Configure USER ANALOG CHANNELS MESVIS160 File Edit View Control Help El d dl TERR Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration User Analogs Mins jo Secs fio Ms o iv AutoSave ByTag For Help press F1 System Disabled No Errors Auto Save To Enable this utility check the AutoSave flag All values in all channels are saved to disk when the system is disabled The next time the system is restarted the values which were previously in each channel will be restored to the appropriate channel number By Tag Channel values can be saved and restored
298. ne m man ashen mam remet Arn I do not accept the terms in the license agreement InstallShield Click the Complete radio button and click Next J Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 InstallShield Wizard x Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Choose which program features you want to install Recommended for advanced users InstallShield Version 4 0 0 34 Part One Installation Procedure Click Yes JE Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 InstallShield Wizard x Windows Firewall detected Important Note The setup program will install Sentinel Protection Server and Sentinel Keys Server on this system To allow accessing the Sentinel keys attached to this system by cients on the network your firewall settings will be modified This will not affect the existing security settings of this system Do you want to modify these settings right now Tip To modify these settings in future refer to the steps provided in the Help provided with this software InstallShield ee ce jJ Version 4 0 0 35 Part One Installation Procedure NOTE The Installation Wizard indicates it has completed as shown below If you are using a USB Dongle you can now connect it to a free USB port on your computer The USB driver will be automatically located once the Sentinel
299. nel Click Uninstall to remove the product from the system Accepting this prompt will permanently delete the application and related components from your system no other warnings will be given Pr InstallShield Wizard MN Orchestrator Server Maintenance Please select a maintenance operation from the those provided Reinstall This option will reinstall Orchestrator Server onto your System Uninstall This option will remove Orchestrator Server from your System Cancel M mer The utility removes all components based on an installation log created when the program was installed The user will be prompted before the utility removes any files that may be shared with other applications It will attempt to remove the following items Version 4 0 0 27 Part One Installation Procedure Shared Program files Standard Program files Folder items Program Folders Program Directories Program Registry entries InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on Server Manual Removal of User Files THE UNINSTALL UTILITY WILL NOT REMOVE FILES OR DIRECTORIES THAT THE INSTALL UTILITY DID NOT CREATE As part of normal Orchestrator operation users create configuration and data files The configuration files include custom configurations of Trends Configurable Monitors and saved Orchestrator configurations
300. nel protection system If you are using a HASP HL Key you must install the HASP runtime software Click the Hardware Key HASP HL Key button in the following dialog to install the HASP runtime software Click the Hardware Key Sentinel SuperPro Key button in the following dialog to install the sentinel protection system If you will be using a software key then click the Software Key button in the following dialog and installation of the software will continue If you are using a software key you can skip the Sentinel protection system installation section below and proceed to the Orchestrator Server Installation section If you wish to install the evaluation version of the software which does not require an unlock code or the Sentinel Protection software installed click the Demo Version button Select Components Select the component you want to install Please select the component that you want to install E d Hardware Key HASP HL Key Hardware Key Sentinel SuperPro Key w Software Key Version 4 0 0 14 Part One Installation Procedure HASP Runtime Driver Installation Hardware Key only If you are using a USB key do not plug the key into the machine until the HASP runtime driver phase has been completed see below After you click the HASP HL Key button a command line installation will run as shown in the image below wait for it to complete Sentinel HASP Run time Enviro Once the installtion
301. nel description C or c Alarm condition A or a Alarm date E or e Alarm time M or m Alarm message V or v Channel value Version Error Reference source not found 113 Part Four Configuring Processors Test Message r Send test message Message Test messagg Send Cancel Entering text and pressing Send button user can test current annunciator configuration to check for errors Program provides feedback which helps to localize configuration or communication errors Do not interrupt test process because it will cause resources locking r r Sending status Sending status PagerMobile TAP Semaphore resource recieved PagerMobile TAP Semaphore resource recieved Sending status PagerMobile TAP Error Could not get the attention of the modem When test completes full text feedback is available in edit box Sending status The most common error messages Waiting for semaphore resource nnnnn If test process is stopped at this message for 10 or more seconds it means that resource nnnnn is locked by another process or previous interrupted attempt Possible way to solve this error is to restart program Version Error Reference source not found 114 Part Four Configuring Processors Could not get the attention of the modem Program can t receive response from modem check cable or power
302. ngular ONColor Grey OffColour White Step 3 We will now configure the general options select the general tab and configure the fields as follows Min Value 0 Max Value 10 Value 0 Orientation Vertical Direction Backward Step 4 Now we will configure the knob select the knob tab and configure the fields as follows Version 4 0 0 249 Part Five Monitors MouseControl Snap To Style Rectangular Width 0 02 InnerValue 0 20 OuterValue 0 80 Color Red Step 5 Now we will configure the tics for the slider select the tics tabs and do the following We need to sets of tics so set the Tics Field to be 2 let us configure the first field Set the TicID field to be 0 and configure the fields as follows Style Rectangular Label On Position 0 90 Inner 0 40 Outer 0 80 Width 0 000 Startvalue 0 StopValue 100 DeltaValue 10 Now set the TiclD to be 1 and configure the fields as follows Style Rectangular Label Off Position 20 90 Inner 20 40 Outer 20 60 Width 20 000 Startvalue 0 StopValue 100 DeltaValue 2 Step 6 Now that the slider is configured we must assign a channel to it Configure an analogue channel and a ssign it to the slider by right clicking on the slider and selecting data source properties Version 4 0 0 250 Part Five Monitors Toggle Description The Toggle Switch control is a TRUE FALSE YES NO or ON OFF indicator It displays either captions or pict
303. nnel you have configured Next click on the spin control the lies horizontal to the VariablelD edit box you will notice the VariablelD edit box changing from 0 to 1 Setup this channel to be C2 also Click the Apply button and the OK button The Strip Chart will now reflect the values of the calculator channel s you have assigned it to Version 4 0 0 276 Part Five Monitors Generic Configuration Fields Description These Configuration Fields are ones that are to be found throughout the various different controls and are referenced in the relevant sections under notes Background p Properties On GMs Border Properties Bevelwidth 2 a Bevellnner D Noe Borderw idth 2 zl BevelOuter 2 Lowered X Dutline Properties Enabled T Color Bevellnner BevelOuter Determines the inner or outer shadow styles of the control BevelWidth Determines the shadow sizes of the inner and outer bevels of the control BorderWidth Determines the border size between the inner and outer bevels of the control Outline Determines whether or not to display an outline around the control s face OutlineColor Determines the color of the outline frame and OutlineTitle surrounding the control when Outline TRUE Version 4 0 0 277 Part Five Monitors Fonts Properties Property Name Font Font Style Size Batang Regular Y 2 25 M Effects T BatangChe E St
304. ns in the menu list The intensity of both the tool buttons legend and the Menu options will vary dependent on the stage of configuration A Menu or Tool option whose legend is dark will be accessible and usable The legend on tools or menu options that have a lighter intensity will not be usable at this time Trend Options The layout and the features of the Trend Window can be modified to the users requirements To do so from the Edit menu choose the Trend Options command or else click on the toolbar button From either option the result will be a Trend Options Dialog box This tabbed dialog is broken down into four pages Each page allows the user to configure a particular group of options By clicking on the Apply button you can see any changes take effect immediately without closing the dialog Trend Options Page Trend Type Two different types of graph can be configured in the Trends application Click on the appropriate radio button to choose the type of Trend required Time Based The first type is a Time Based graph which means that all lines will be plotted against time This is the default Trend type Channel Based The second type of graph is Channel Based This means that lines are plotted against each other This is known as an X Y graph where multiple Y channels can be plotted against one X channel Trend Orientation Two different types of graph orientation can be configured in the Trends application Click on
305. nt types of logging are available for each logger The dialog box will change depending on which type is chosen From the drop down list choose the type required Storage Type Two types of storage are supposed in Orchestrator odl files and databases Odl files can only be opened using replays such as Trends or Data Export Period Logger If the Period mode is selected logging will occur at a fixed rate irrespective of the status of the data being logged Edit the Logging Rate text boxes to determine the rate of logging Period Event Logger Period Event Logging allows the logger to record information to disk at a periodic rate similar to the Period Logger mode If an event occurs then the logger can respond and log at a different rate until the event subsides Logger Type PERIOD EVENT Number of Logs Logging Rate Pre Event fo min jo sec 250 ms During Event SINGLE v When this mode is selected the logger type section of the dialog box changes to the above In the text boxes adjacent to the Pre Event label enter the rate in minutes seconds and milliseconds that the logger is required to store information whilst there is no EVENT Version 4 0 0 296 Part Six Loggers When an EVENT occurs the logger can be configured to respond in one of two ways If SINGLE is chosen from the drop down list under the title During Event then when an EVENT occurs the logger will cause a single record to be logged and then rever
306. nter either an expression including channel prefix and number e g P1 For databases the expression can include the basic and arithmetic operators The expression can include references to logged channels If channels are logged by tag ensure the references are to the tags Some databases can support advanced operations such as bitwise and comparison operators and conversion trigonometric and logarithmic functions Refer to the SQL syntax of the database Tag Description and Units For user defined expression the expression is handled as an analog channel The tag description and units of the analog expression can be configured Scale Options Value Type The value type can be set to Version 4 0 0 387 Part Seven Replays NORMAL Value is displayed directly from file or database SUM Value is displayed as a cumulative sum from start of replayed data COUNT Value is displayed as a count of valid scans LOG Value is displayed on log scale Minimum Enter the lowest channel value you want to display on the trend Maximum Enter the highest channel value you want to display on the trend Axis On If this check box is unchecked no axis will be displayed for this line If it is checked an axis in the same colour as the line will be drawn on the graph Axis Position The axis position can be chosen from the drop down list On Graph The Axes of the channels will be spaced equidistant across the graph Left Top of Graph The
307. nter up to 32 characters of description information Units Enter up to 4 characters of units information A column may be imported more than once at a time For performance it is recommended that columns be imported sequentially When done click on the OK button The entry will be added to the list Click on the Import button to continue configuration Version 4 0 0 349 Part Six Loggers A dialog will be launched which asks for further import details The following information is required Time In Column Click this check box on if the scan time is contained in a column in the ASCII file Column Number Enter the column number of the scan time if it is contained in a column in the ASCII file Time Type If the scan time is contained in a column in the ASCII file select the type of time this column contains Differential or Elapsed Time Interval Per Scan If the scan time is not contained in a column in the ASCII file enter the number of seconds between each scan Start Time Enter the start time for the new log file Click on the Current Time button to set the Start Time to the current time Logger Directory Enter the directory where the output log file should be created Then click on the Import button to select the required ASCII file The import task is launched as soon as the ASCII file has been successfully selected An Import In Progress will be displayed If you wish to stop the operation click on the
308. nto the DATA worksheet of an XLS workbook To specifiy where to place the starting point of the data insert the keyword START into the template files corresponding DATA worksheet To insert images place they keyword _PICTURE followed by the path to the image For example in the image below the template contains the PICTURE and START keywords some formatting as also been applied to the document Version 4 0 0 364 Part Seven Replays _PICT URE C PRODUCT NAME REPLAY_OPTIONS TEMPLATES LOGO jpg JOB NAME LOGGED DATA JOB NAME LOGGED DATA TIME Sine Wave 0 10 0 6 0 60 0 100 1secPulse 2sec Pulse 3 sec Pulse 15 08 56 0 00 2 03 4 03 52 03 72 03 OFF OFF ON 15 23 56 0 00 2 03 4 03 52 03 72 03 OFF OFF ON 15 36 56 0 00 3 03 5 03 53 03 33 03 ON OFF ON Version 4 0 0 365 Part Seven Replays Open Destination Data Export will attempt to open the exported file with an associated application For example if you export the file in Data Interchange format DIF Data Export will launch Microsoft Excel to open the exported file If no application is associated with the file type then no application will be launched If you need to associate an application with a file type search for File Associations in Windows Help End Line Similar to the Delimiter there is choices for the end of line separator The choices are CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed CR LF User As an alternative to the fixed choices a Us
309. ntre phone to communicate to Number should be written in callong form eg 9 869991111 outside line area code number Password This field allows the user to specify optional password for SMS processing centre Test configuration The user can test current configuration pressing this button Version Error Reference source not found 108 Part Four Configuring Processors This is a list of known SMSC Numbers NOT all networks have been tested Some SMSCs notably the Austrian ones require additional numbers to be added to make a complete access phone number often the user s pager number It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that they verify with their own service provider that the access telephone number and settings required for each network SMSC that they want to use are correct Additionally some networks require a password to be entered that is dependant upon a subscription to the service before the service can be accessed Provider Number Modem Port Notes Settings A1 Austria 43 669 14 7 e 1 AirPage Austria 43 688 3232111 7 e 1 AirTouch USA 1 800 3260038 7 e 1 Ameritech USA 1 312 5149243 7 e 1 ATT Wireless PCS 1 888 7583036 7 e 1 USA Bellsouth 1 800 8682835 7 e 1 BT Cellnet UK 44 860 980480 8 n 1 BT EasyReach UK 44 0901 1130000 7 e 1 BT Pager UK 44 0345 581354 7 e 1 Callme A
310. ntroduction Orchestrator is Real Time Data Acquisition software for Microsoft Windows It is designed as mission critical software running on a mission critical operating system Optimised to use the powerful real time multi tasking features of Windows Orchestrator provides integrated data acquisition monitoring data logging mimic development and report generation The product comprises of a user configurable real time engine that collects and processes the measured data and configurable object orientated graphics engine that can be used to design graphical user interfaces and real time display The real time engine interfaces to external data collection devices from which it imports the data to a real time memory resident database Here it processes and redirects this data to other tasks such as alarm monitors data loggers real time calculators trend displays and mimics Main Features Fully User Configurable True Real time Operation Up to 64 Independent Data Loggers In Built Prioritised Alarm Processing and Logging Real Time Calculator Multi Document Interface MDI Channel Monitor Displays Scaleable Object Orientated Graphic Display System MDI Based Real Time Trends of Measured Data User Configurable Menus and Displays Expandable from 8 to 10 000 Channels Software Architecture The software architecture of Orchestrator exploits the modular multi tasking structure of Windows The architecture can be broken down into inpu
311. ntrol Window r PRODUCT NAME Logger Control Name Status Activity Scan No LOGGEF_1 Enabled Logging 10 LOGGER_2 Disabled Not Started D LOGGER 3 Disabled Not Started LOGGER 4 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER_5 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER_6 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER 8 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER_9 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER_10 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER 11 Disabled Not Started D LOGGER_12 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER 13 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER 14 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER 15 Disabled Not Started 0 LOGGER 16 Disabled Not Started 0 Double Click On amp Logger To Configure CONTROL PANEL Cycle Force Close Help The Logger Window will show the current name of all the loggers their status current activity and the number of scans logged to disk To control a logger from this window point select a logger from the list it will be highlighted The buttons on the right of the Window will if selected operate on the chosen logger The intensity of the legend on the buttons will depend on the current status of the logger If the legend is dark then the option is available If light it is not available whilst the logger is in the current status Version 4 0 0 344 Part Six Loggers Log Files Logged Data File Size To calculate the size of a logged data file you need to know the following The number of blocks or groups of Channels Confi
312. ntrol s knob MarkStyle Determines the style of the knob s mark Version 4 0 0 202 Part Five Monitors MarkUserDefined Determines the shape of a user defined knob or mark This property only applies when KnobStyle 4 for knobs or when MarkStyle 4 for marks This property defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs comma delimited The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the center of the knob and the pointer of the knob or tip of the mark is typically defined as 0 1000 MarkWidth Determines the width of the knob s mark This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Scale Scale is used to define the extent of the units displayed on the knob the location of the knob center and the knob s start and stop angles Properties Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts Frame Knob Tes Gms Value Limits Direction Min 0 Forward Max 110 C Backward Origin Position Angle x gt Jfooo Stat _ 20 v3 _ Hoo Stop ifi40 ScaleDirection Determines the direction of increasing values from ScaleMinValue to ScaleMaxValue ScaleMaxValue ScaleMin Value Determines the maximum and minimum values available in the scale If ScaleDirection is set to forward clockwise then ScaleMin Value is located at ScaleStartAngle and ScaleMaxValue is located at S
313. nu 454 Appendix B General Rules for Implementing Security In order to successfully implement security on your Orchestrator system you should consult the following rules and guidelines RW R N N A Read and Write Access Read access only No Access Orchestrator system Not applicable This combination will cause unexpected results if used with your The order of importance of access rights Examples or minimum maximum file type access rights In the above scenario the minimum access right of all the channel type files within the data source is RW and the maximum access right of all the channel type files within the data source is RW In the above scenario the minimum access right of all the channel type files within the data source is R and the maximum access right of all the channel type files within the data source is RW In the above scenario the minimum access right of all the channel type files within the data source is N and the maximum access right of all the channel type files within the data source is R Importance Access Rights Maximum RW R Minimum N Channel Type File Access Rights ai RW di RW ao RW do RW Channel Type File Access Rights ai RW di R ao RW do RW Channel Type File Access Rights ai N di R ao R do R 455 Appendix B Access Rights Scenarios Security In th
314. o start as a user click Start Control Panel Administrative Tools and open the Services applet From the list of Services find and double click on the Orchestrator service Click the Log On tab and click This Account Specify a user account that has sufficient rights to access the OPC Server PC Register OPC Proxy The OPC Proxy DLL OPCProxy dll must be registered on the client machine This DLL contains the information needed to send data between any OPC client and server The proxy is registered using the RegSvr32 exe utility Copy the OPC Proxy DLL to the Windows Nsystem32 directory and from the command prompt in that directory run RegSvr32 OPCProxy dll Version 4 0 0 441 Part Ten Data Exchange Trouble Shooting Problem Each time an OPC Client connects to an OPC Server a new instance of the server is launched Thus resulting in multiple OPC Servers if more than one client is launched Solution This can occur if the OPC Server is being launched as The Launching User A solution to this would be to set the Identity property of the OPC Server to be that of a specific user In the example below the RTE OPC Server is being launched as the user DomainNameNSmithJ This means that everytime a client connects to this OPC Server the system will check to see if the server is already launched and if so it will connect the new client to this instance of the server This option can be configured by using dcomcnfg exe select
315. of Databases provided that the Windows drivers for the database type have been installed Configuring a logger to work with Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft Excel and Oracle have been tested and documented below Logging to a Microsoft Access Database From the General tab of the logger configuration select Database from the storage type drop down list On the advanced tab the Database properties should now be configurable By default the logger will log to an Access mdb Database file The connection string can be edited manually by changing the text in the user defined text box below The logger can automatically create the connection string by clicking the select button and selecting the properties you require Logger Database C Default User Defined Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 Jet OLEDB Enaine Type 5 Data Select When the select button is pressed the following dialog will open Version 4 0 0 324 Part Six Loggers r Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced a Specify the following to connect to Access data 1 Select or enter a database name IAMELOGGED DATA LOGGER 1 2 Enter information to log on to the database User name Admin v Blank password Allow saving password Test Connection Type the name of the database file manually into the database text box or click the El button and browse to the location of the databas
316. ogged data The name can be up to 25 characters and must obey operating system path name conventions The Logger Name should describe the equipment or test as this will help you to identify the correct file when using the Alarm Listing replay utility The name can be changed as often as is necessary e g after each test Delete Logs Alarm logs can be stored permanently on disk by leaving this box unchecked If the Delete Log check box is checked then a period of time can be specified for which you want to keep this information available Each time a new Alarm Log File is created or the system enabled then all Alarm files that exceed their specified period are automatically deleted If CYCLE mode is selected the time specified applies to the end of the cycle It is recommended that this feature is used whenever possible as it will help prevent the hard disk from becoming full To specify the length of time select the appropriate time from the Older Than drop down list box Predefined times of Ve HR 8 HOURS 2 WEEKS HOUR 12 HOURS MONTH 2 HOURS DAY 2 MONTHS 4 HOURS WEEK 3 MONTHS are available If a suitable time period is not shown select the TIME option additional boxes will appear asking for a specified time period in the form of MM DD HH MM Enter the time period in the month day hours and minutes fields as required Note Logs cannot be deleted from Excel Worksheets Cycle Mode If this option is not
317. om the File menu choose Print Preview to display the active Trend as it would appear when printed When you choose this command the main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which a page will be displayed in its printed format The print preview toolbar offers you options to zoom in and out of trends and initiate a print job Note The dashed lines illustrated on a page during Print Preview denote the current page margins Print Preview toolbar The print preview toolbar offers you the following options Print Bring up the print dialog box to start a print job One Page Two Page Preview one or two printed pages at a time Zoom In Take a closer look at the printed page Zoom Out Take a larger look at the printed page Close Return from print preview to the editing window Print Set up command File menu Use this command to select a printer and a printer connection Version 4 0 0 400 Part Seven Replays Fr Print Setup Printer Name HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 4050 Series PCL 5 Where 192 168 1 167 Comment Paper Orientation Size A4 v Portrait Source Automatically Select Landscape Help Network Cancel This command presents a Print Set up dialog box where you specify the printer and its connection Print Set up dialog box The following options allow you to select the destination printer and its conn
318. om the drop down menu e g Calculator A configuration dialogue box will appear for the particular processor Configure amp Control Loggers To configure and control loggers from the main Orchestrator Window choose the appropriate logger or Control Logger option from the Loggers menu Configure and Use Replays Data Export and Trend replays can be accessed from the main Orchestrator Window Choose the appropriate option from the Replay menu Configure and Use Monitors The Monitor Windows are all available via the main Orchestrator Window Choose the appropriate function from the Monitors menu Controlling Orchestrator When the components of the Orchestrator system have been configured the system needs to be controlled from the main Orchestrator Menu Window Version 4 0 0 44 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Enable Orchestrator To enable Orchestrator and to start the interchange of information between the physical devices the processors the monitors and the logging tasks choose the gt tool button or select Enable from the Control menu Shortcut Keys CTRL E Disable Orchestrator To disable the Orchestrator system choose the al tool button Shortcut Keys CTRL D Reconfigure Orchestrator On enabling the system the software reads the configuration of all the Orchestrator modules from the hard disk It then configures processors and devices to operate in that defined way Whilst the system is enable
319. ommended CD ROM Drive Parallel or USB port SVGA 1024 768 256 colour graphics Recommended Requirements 1 gigahertz GHz or faster 32 bit x86 or 64 bit x64 processor 1 GB of RAM 32 bit or 2 GB RAM 64 bit Windows 7 500 Mb free disk space CD ROM Drive Free USB port SVGA 1024 768 256 colour graphics Network and Orchestrator Server Preparation All standard network hardware and software for both Server and Client machines must be installed and tested before attempting to install Orchestrator Client The following Client installation procedures assume that all standard network hardware and software is fully installed and operational Refer to your Windows documentation for information on installing and configuring networks Orchestrator Real Time Engine RTE Server must be installed configured and tested on the appropriate Orchestrator data server machine s BEFORE attempting to install software on the Client machine s The Orchestrator RTE Server installation creates a network share of its install directory by default the directory share name created is Orchestrator This allows Orchestrator clients on the network permission to access Orchestrator configuration and data files on the server The Orchestrator Server directory share must be available to allow client operation To confirm that the Orchestrator RTE Server software has created the correct directory share Version 4 0 0 29 Part One Ins
320. ommended hardware requirements needed to run the Orchestrator Data Acquisition Software Minimum Requirements x86 based microprocessor 486 66 or higher 128 Mb of RAM Windows 2000 Minimum 60 Mb free disk space for system files Further free space required for logged data 250 Mb Recommended CD ROM Drive Parallel or USB port SVGA 1024 768 256 colour graphics Recommended Requirements 1 gigahertz GHz or faster 32 bit x86 or 64 bit x64 processor 1 GB of RAM 32 bit or 2 GB RAM 64 bit Windows 7 500 Mb free disk space CD ROM Drive Free USB port SVGA 1024 768 256 colour graphics Installing Orchestrator Server The Orchestrator Server software can be installed on a partition formatted to NTFS or a standard FAT partition Before installing the Orchestrator software you need to know the number of data loggers you will require It is essential you log on with Administrator privileges before installing the Orchestrator Server Press the Windows button and R A8 R r zT Run e Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open D Server Disk1 Setup exe X Cancel Browse Version 4 0 0 13 Part One Installation Procedure When installation starts you will be prompted to install select which type of installation you require If you are using a Sentinel SuperPro hardware key you must install the senti
321. on it Click on the Load button on the right hand side of the property page The properties for this configuration now appear within the other property pages You may modify these properties and even change the configuration or save the newly modified configuration as something else Saving Configurations III O O1 ra Right Click on the control and choose Visual Display Properties Set up all your properties to configure the control to meet your needs Go the Library tabbed property page If you would like to create a new directory in your tree to save your configuration right click on the directory you wish to create a new subdirectory and select New Type in the directory name Click on the directory you wish to place the new configuration Place your cursor in the text box labeled Configuration Name and type in the name of the configuration you wish to create Click on the Store button Version 4 0 0 186 Part Five Monitors Importing Configurations ES Open _ Lookin J TEMP e amp ek Ee Name Date modif Type Size Client amp Datascan_7000 DISKO File name compass Files of type Configuration Files gms Cancel Open as read only mem Frames Hubs Needles Scales Tics GMS Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts H Comers Configuration Name H E Weather me LarryClock a H j Not H E General Meters c
322. onding pointer PointerDigitalColour Determines the color of the digital display if PointerDigitalz TRUE for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD PointerDigitalDecimals Determines how many decimal places are displayed in the digital display if PointerDigital T RUE for the pointer currently selected by PointerID PointerDigitalFontID Determines which font is used in the digital display if PointerDigital T RUE for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD Pointer Digital X Digital Y Determines the vertical and horizontal positions of the digital display if PointerDigitalz T RUE for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 and 1 0 where 0 0 is located at the top left corner of the control Scales Scales are used to define the extent of the units displayed by the gauge the location of the gauge center and the gauge s start and stop positions Multiple scales are supported ScaleDirection Determines the direction of increasing values from ScaleMinValue to ScaleMaxValue for the scale currently selected by ScalelD Version 4 0 0 216 Part Five Monitors Properties Library Background Bands Captions Digital Fonts Pointers l GMs Scales fi ScaleDirection 1 Backward ScalelD fo Orientation fi Vertical ScaleMax 100 ScalePositionStart foo ScaleMin 0 ScaleP
323. onfigure option is taken the user is presented with the following monitor display to generate a new monitor maximize the monitor 1 window and configure as required To edit an existing monitor configuration either use the file open option or click the file open icon and select the required monitor configuration file Command Line Another option to launch the Configurable Monitor Application is via the command prompt This feature allows the user to specify the Server to connect to and whether to display the Configurable Monitor in Full Screen Mode The command line parameters to pass are To indicate Server name gt U S lt ServerName gt To indicate file name gt FileName For full screen mode gt F Note The brackets used in this example are not used when passing command line arguments and the inverted commas are optional Examples 1 This specifies a Server Name cfmon_nt exe S ServerName or cfmon nt exe S ServerName 2 This opens the file normally Version 4 0 0 172 Part Five Monitors cfmon nt exe c Orchestrator cmonitors monitor1 orm Or cfmon nt exe c Orchestrator cmonitors monitor1 orm 3 This starts the application with a new monitor document The monitor will be in full screen mode cfmon nt exe S ServerName F Or cfmon nt exe S ServerName F 4 This opens the file in full screen mode cfmon nt exe c Orchestrator monitors monitor1 orm F or c
324. onfigure either double click on the Calculator icon in the Orchestrator programme group or select Processors and then Calculated Channels from the Orchestrator menu bar Calculator The Calculator Channels Configuration window will show which channels have been configured Channels not yet configured will bear the tag description of DISABLED Channels that have been configured will be shown with a tag description and a channel description a Configure CALCULATED CHANNELS MESVIS160 t es File Edit View Control Help ERG wae 2 Y NP Channel Configuration Advanced Configuration a C1 TAG CTIMEQ a EB c3 DISABLED EB C4 DISABLED EB C5 DISABLED B C6 DISABLED BBC DISABLED EB cs DISABLED EB Co DISABLED E C10 DISABLED Ec DISABLED c2 DISABLED amp a3 DISABLED EB c14 DISABLED Eas DISABLED FACA DISARI FD a For Help press Fl System Disabled No Errors To configure a channel point to and double click the mouse button on the channel to be configured Alternatively select a channel click on the Configure Channel button ALT C or press Return A Configure User Channel Dialog box will be displayed Advanced Calculator Configuration AutoEnable Calculator Before any Calculator Channel can be incorporated into the overall Orchestrator System the Advanced Calculator Configuration bar must be selected and the Auto Enable Calculator box checked Version Error Reference source not found 71
325. onfigure the Alarm System either select Alarm System from the Processor drop down menu on the main menu or double click on the Alarm System icon in the Program Group A Alarm System The Alarm System Configuration Window will be displayed g M Ay Configure ALARM SYSTEM MESVIS160 File View Control Help Be Alarm Configuration Annunciation Configuration Advanced Configuration V Enable Common Alarm Output Channel a v Enable Alarm Printing Printer Location Local Remote Printer Name 192 168 1 167 Settings Print Format Short Long MV Enable Alarm Logging Logger Name ALARMS Log Format Short C Long Start Mode APPEND LOGS YY MM DD HH MM IV ipele Mode Align Time a a a a a eecteseceecessencensescesee Cycle Every DAY DAY Log For For Help press F1 System Disabled No Errors The Configure Alarm System Window is divided into Three sections with a fourth section accessed by clicking on the Advanced Alarm Configuration button Version Error Reference source not found 94 Part Four Configuring Processors Alarm Configuration Common Alarm Output If a Common Alarm is required checking the Enable Common Alarm Output check box enables this When checked access will be available to the Channel Text box Type in the Device Channel digital output channel number that is to be the com
326. onitor double click on the Alarm Monitor icon from within Explorer or alternatively choose ALARM MONITOR Configure from the Monitors Menu MESVIS160 aidan mallon demo PRODUCT NAME File View Control Replays Devices Processors Loggers Hel play gg p e a CHANNEL MONITOR i ALARM MONITOR d Monitor Selection CONFIGURABLE MONITOR gt Monitor Last a Alarm Monitor The user is then presented with the options to either Monitor Selection run an existing monitor configuration Monitor Last revert to the last saved workspace or Configure generate a new configuration or modify an existing configuration Monitor Selection If the monitor option is taken the user is presented with a standard Windows file selection menu the required configuration file should be highlighted and the OK button clicked Version 4 0 0 148 Part Five Monitors Monitor Last If the Monitor Last option is taken the persistent details from the last session of running the configurable monitor will be opened i e the last workspace The persistent details are in relation to window layouts monitors opened toolbar layouts etc Configure If the configure option is taken the user is presented with the Edit New Monitor Properties Property Page to generate a new monitor When the Alarm Monitor Application is launched i e Monitor Last or Configure Mode the user is presented with a New Monitor Properties Di
327. onitors Common Alarm The Common Alarm similar to the Alarm Message is latched on when a channel with that facility enabled goes into an alarm state To cancel the common alarm choose the output channel that is configured as the common alarm choose Cancel Common Alarm from the Options menu or click on the Cancel Common alarm icon from within the toolbar e Navigating Channel Monitor Windows Using the scroll bars in the active Window will allow individual channels to be selected To find a particular channel first make the Window that will contain that channel the active Window by clicking on any part of it From the View menu choose Channel or alternatively click on the Goto Channel icon within the toolbar A Dialogue box will be presented r Modify Analog Channel Enter New Value Enter Value 12 Cancel ir Help Enter the channel number no prefix is necessary and choose the OK button The selected channel will be shown highlighted Properties Setup The properties dialog has already been addressed in the section Create A New Channel Monitor Window It can be found via the Configuration Menu and choosing Properties Doing this provides the user with full manipulation over the color content of the Channel Monitor Window and also the number of visible columns the Channel Monitor Window holds The option is also available to alter the Server and or Data Source your Channel Monitor Windo
328. ons Vertical Grid On Check this box on to turn on vertical grid lines in the graph area Number of Lines If Vertical grid lines are chosen a text box is available in which the number of lines required can be entered The first vertical grid line will be placed at the start of the graph 0 on X axis the remainder will be spaced equidistant across the graph Horizontal Grid Check this box on to turn on horizontal grid lines in the graph area Number of Lines If Horizontal grid lines are chosen a text box is available in which the number of lines required can be entered The first horizontal grid line will be placed at the top of the graph Full scale on Y axis the remainder will be spaced equal distant across the graph Colour Options Page Background Colours The background colour of the graph area and all other areas of the trend windows can be defined and a different colour can be chosen for the printer Screen Colour To change the background colour of the screen click on the Select button A Colour Dialog Box will be shown Choose a colour from the palette and then select the OK button to confirm selection and return to the Trends Option Dialog box Printer Colour To change the background colour of a trend printout click on the Select button A Colour Dialog Box will be shown Chose a colour from the palette and then select the OK button to confirm selection and return to the Trends Option Dialog box Colour Dialog
329. ool button a dialogue box will appear From the options select the Font Font Style and the Size of the font Font Microsoft Sans Senf Microsoft Uighur O Microsoft YaHei O Microsoft Yi Bati O MingLiU O MingLiU HKSCS O MingLiU HKSCS E4B 7 m Effects r Sample i Strikeout nS 7 Underine 7 Color B Black X Script Version 4 0 0 143 Part Five Monitors Full Screen Mode An option provided by the Channel Monitor application is to toggle whether the Channel Monitor Window takes up the whole screen or part of the screen To switch to Full Screen mode choose Full Screen from the View Menu To switch back to normal mode hit the escape key The Context Menu This menu is displayed when the user right clicks on an Channel Monitor Window Its basic purpose is to provide a shortcut to the functions offered by the Channel Monitor Application Once you right click on the window you can select from a number of Channel Monitor options and manipulate the current window Set up an ActiveX Document and run it across the internet This topic will show you how to set up an HTML page that you may use to monitor Channel Monitor files over the Internet The discussion is based around the Microsoft Package FrontPage 98 On your WEB SERVER create the directory MSActiveXDocuments as this will be the directory you will store the monitor files into You may choose any name for
330. oose either Comma or Tab as the Delimiter The End Line separator should be defined as CR LF The File Type in the Select Data Export Output File should be set as Text File TXT The resulting file can be opened in Notepad and then printed Version 4 0 0 368 Part Seven Replays Data Import The Data Import application will Import an ACSII text file with columns of data and create a System Data Log ODL file from the data Prior to import the ASCII file must be described by the user This description can then be saved as an Import Configuration File ORI which can be reused A text header can be also imported Importing An ASCII File It is important to give a good description of the ASCII file to be imported so that the data is interpreted correctly The user must also describe how the data should be formatted in the output log file The following information is required Source Information A unique channel number is used to identify individual columns of data Each channel may represent a data point from a device or processor A prefix and source name is used to identify the processor or device Prefix Enter up to two alphabetical characters for the source prefix of the data to be imported Start Chan No Data is stored in ranges in a data log file Enter a channel number between 1 and 10 000 for the start of the range Source Name Enter up to 25 characters for a name to describe the data being imported Header Information
331. op the Service click on the General Tab and click the stop button then on the start button Note Microsoft Excel must be installed on the machine where the data is being logged Note Logging to an Excel Spreadsheet is not suitable for a situation where large numbers of channels are to be logged It is recommended that no more than 100 channels are logged to an Excel spreadsheet Note The Logger puts the date and time into one field by default Excel will only show the date a sample was taken at To view the date and time follow the steps below e Ensure the logger is disabled e Open the spreadsheet and select the data worksheet e Highlight the DT Column Version 4 0 0 330 Part Six Loggers Bg Microsoft Excel ExcelSpreadsheet 3 LI feo Gh File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Oe RARSRY Sma Sio 4 Me Ch e Ug E f DT aes l F L Sa D 10 1 sec Pullst Switch 2nd Switch 27 02 2007 0 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 27 02 2007 M 4 gt MLOGGERS LOGGER 1 00000001 CHANNEL Ready Sum 743672 5411 Ez DERI 4 Econ Ea ENT BEI 10 iin EES 16 D 2 2 a M d b d d d d ad d and ad f ad ad ad 1 cOccccccccccccccoc A From the format menu select cells From the category list
332. or example a control where the pointer scale is 0 to 10 and PointerSnapIncrement 2 will only display values of 0 2 4 6 8 and 10 Pointer Start Stop Determines the start and stop values if PointerType is set to Range for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD These values are numbers between ScaleMin and ScaleMax for the scale referenced by PointerScalelD PointerStyle Determines the style of the pointer currently selected by PointerlD PointerType Determines the type of the pointer currently selected by PointerlD In some cases the value setting is used If needed however ranges may be shown by setting this property to range and using PointerStart and PointerStop to define the area Version 4 0 0 215 Part Five Monitors Pointer Value Sets or returns the value if PointerType is set to Value of the pointer currently selected by PointerlD The PointerValue is a number between ScaleMin and ScaleMax as defined by PointerScalelD Pointer Width Determines the width if PointerType is set to Value of the pointer currently selected by PointerID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 PointerDigital Enables or disables the digital display of the value for the pointer currently selected by PointerlD PointerDigitalAttach Determines whether or not the digital display of the value for the pointer currently selected by PointerID moves with its corresp
333. original color is altered to HighlightColor when it is selected Version 4 0 0 238 Part Five Monitors Highlight Color Determines the color of the currently designated selection s line and caption Version 4 0 0 239 Part Five Monitors Auto r Properties Knob Library Background MV Autadlign Autodngle AutodngleConfine AutoStartAngle I _ 210 000 AutoStopAngle 330 008 jw AutoOffset AutoDffsetDistance iho AutoOffsetStyle 1 Horizontal X V LineDisplay AutoR adius en 0 80 LinelnnerRadius 0 40 LineThickness gt 1 AutoAlign Determines whether the selection caption alignment is controlled manually or automatically If AutoAlignz TRUE then the control will automatically right justify all selections on the left of the control left justify all selections on the right of the control and center all selections at the top and bottom of the control If however AutoAlign FALSE the user must enter the desired justification for each individual selection using the SelectionAlign property Autoangle Determines whether the selection angles are controlled manually or automatically If AutoAngle TRUE then the control will evenly space the selected number of Selections between the angular extremes of the control as defined by the AutoStartAngle and AutoStopAngle properties If however AutoAngle FALSE the user must enter the desi
334. ormation linked If the system status needs to be signalled to a remote application then the topic Sys and the item STATUS Application Topic Name Orchdde Orchestrator Channel Logger Name Orchdde Logger Name Orchdde STATUS The following are examples of dynamically linking Orchestrator information Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access NB Orchestrator RTE software allows the Orchestrator System to be a DDE server It cannot be configured as a DDE client Enter appropriate channel or logger name Version 4 0 0 410 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets In Excel a DDE link to Orchestrator is achieved by using a remote reference formula which has the syntax Application Topic Item The delimiter following the Application is the pipe character and following the Topic is the exclamation mark As an example to create a link to Orchestrator calculator channel C3 the formula would be entered as follows Orchdde Channel C3 Two files are provided on disk 1 of the set up disks giving DDE examples for Excel The files are ORCXLEX XLS and ORCXLEX DOC Excel supports arrays of values Array formulae are entered as follows Orchdde Channel C1 3 Array formulae must be entered using the CTRL SHIFT ENTER instead of ENTER Transferring arrays of values into Excel is much faster than single values To transfer arrays of values you must enter the formula into a range of c
335. ort Configuring Processors properties of steam and water They are available only if the WinSteam 3 0 libraries have been purchased from Techware Engineering Applications Inc Information about these functions can be found at http www techwareeng com All files purchased from Techware must be placed and registered in Root BIN Steam Function StmPT Pressure Unitset Temperature StmTP Temperature Unitset Pressure StmPTC Pressure Temperature Unitset Specific Heat StmPTG Pressure Temperature Unitset Isentropic Expansion Coefficient StmPTH Pressure Temperature Unitset Specific Enthalpy StmPTK Pressure Temperature Unitset Thermal Conductivity StmPTM Pressure Temperature Unitset Viscosity StmPTS Pressure Temperature Unitset Specific Entropy StmPTV Pressure Temperature Unitset Specific Volume StmPTW Pressure Temperature Unitset Sonic Velocity StmPQC Pressure Quality Unitset Specific Heat StmPQG Pressure Quality Unitset Isentropic Expansion Coefficient StmPQH Pressure Quality Unitset Specific Enthalpy StmPQK Pressure Quality Unitset Thermal Conductivity StmPQM Pressure Quality Unitset Viscosity StmPQS Pressure Quality Unitset Specific Entropy StmPQV Pressure Quality Unitset Specific Volume StmPQW Pressure Quality Unitset Sonic Velocity StmPSC Pressure Entropy
336. ositionStop BE f0 95 Cancel Apply ScalelD When multiple scales exist ScalelD is used to index the scale to which the other scale properties apply The total number of scales is determined by the Scales property and ScalelD has valid values from 0 to Scales 1 ScaleMax ScaleMin Determines the maximum and minimum values available in the scale If ScaleDirection is set to Forward then ScaleMin is located at ScalePositionStart and ScaleMax is located at ScalePositionStop The converse is true if ScaleDirection is set to Backward ScalePositionStart ScalePositionStop Determines the extents of the control When ScaleDirection is set to Forward the ScalePositionStart corresponds to ScaleMin and when ScaleDirection is set to Backward the ScalePositionStart corresponds to ScaleMax Typical values for this property are between 0 0 and 1 0 Scales Determines the number of scales used to define the control This property must be set before all other scale properties The ScalelD property is used to select the scale to which scale properties apply Tics Version 4 0 0 217 Part Five Monitors Tics are used to mark intervals on the gauge s face Properties are used to set the tic s style start stop values interval inner outer positions width color label positions and associated scale E Properties 4 li Auto Tic Tics 2 Scaleip H f0 Enabled TiclD 0 FontiD TicCount MajorTics 6
337. ovider when initial contact is made Send Delay This field allows specify delay value in seconds between sending command and start of calling sequence Timeout This field allows specify timeout value in seconds between pager centre answer and message input It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that they verify with their own service provider that the access telephone number and settings required for each network Test configuration The user can test current configuration pressing this button 106 Version Error Reference source not found Part Four Configuring Processors Version Error Reference source not found 107 Part Four Configuring Processors SMS Destination Settings The following settings may be specified for each SMS configured in the system SMS Settings Properties SMS Settings Com Part Com m Port Setings 960081 SMS eg 9600 n8 1 PAGER e g 2400 e 7 1 Message Centre 353 56 8357583 Test Phone Pager Number 19 86399111 1l soa din Password S Com Port This field specifies the Comport to be used for sending information to the mobile phone Phone Number This field allows the user to specify the number of the mobile phone to which the text message will be sent Number should be written in international form eg 353 86 8375786 country code area code number SMSC Number This field allows the user to specify the number of the SMS processing ce
338. ow holds information about the Alarms that are present on the server that the window is associated with The number of visible columns display fields that the user has per monitoring window is user defined i e there are a maximum of 10 columns available but the user can select deselect columns at will The columns available are Column Description of the Column Channel ID The channel id of the channel in alarm Priority The priority of the alarm Tag The tag assigned to the channel in alarm Description The description assigned to the channel in alarm Condition The condition of this alarm occurrence It will be either LO Hl or ERR indicating that this occurrence crossed either the Low or High alarm limit or that the channel is in Error Alarm State This field displays one of the following OK ALM ACK WRN or MSK dependant on the current Alarm State of the channel in alarm If OK is shown then the channel is now within the limits but has previously been in an alarm status If ALM is shown then the channel is currently in an alarm state If ACK is shown then the channel is in alarm state but has been acknowledged If WRN is displayed the channel is in warning and if MSK is displayed the channel is masked Value The value OR status of the channel in alarm Alarm Time Date The time date the channel crossed the alarm threshold Clear Ack Time Date The time date when the channel re
339. ows Explorer can be used to manage the logged data files if required Version 4 0 0 346 Part Six Loggers Database Logs When loggers are enabled the logs they create are named automatically and stored in the database for easy management and retrieval The databases and tables are created automatically as required A fixed LOGGERS table is used to store the names start and stop times and sequence number of each log created in the database The sequence number is a numerically ascending sequence of the log If a logger is set to append on startup and append on cycle with a fixed channel set a sequence number of zero is used for the first log created and the following tables are created lt LOGGER NAME PREFIX DATA lt LOGGER NAME PREFIX TEXT LOGGER NAME PREFIX CHANNELS If a logger is set to create on startup or create on cycle a starting sequence number of one is used for the first log created and the following tables are created LOGGER NAME PREFIX SEQUENCE DATA LOGGER NAME PREFIX SEQUENCE TEXT LOGGER NAME PREFIX SEQUENCE CHANNELS The DATA table is the main table used for store channel values and text logs The TEXT table is used to store predefine text logs The CHANNELS table is used to store the configuration of each channel For Oracle the database to use can set by setting the prefix to DATABASE NAME gt lt TABLE PREFIX gt Version 4 0 0 347 Part Six Loggers Data Impor
340. p 1 g After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the linear gauge a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the gauge is of the required size A gauge will appear this is the default setting for the gauge but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 Firstly We Will Configure the scale for the Gauge to do this right click on the shape and select the scales tab configure the fields as follows Direction Forward Orientation Horizontal Scale Min 0 Scale Max 10 ScalePositionStart 0 07 ScalePostionStop 0 93 Step 3 Now we will configure the Bands that is the colored sections on the gauge We need four bands one for red yellow and green respectively and one for the Black bar along the top First we will configure the Black Bar set the bands field to be equal to 4 and the BandID to be one Configure the rest of the fields as follows Style Rectangular Bandlnner 20 35 BandOuter 20 45 BandStart 1 BandStop 10 BandColor Black Click Apply We will now configure the other Bands Change the BandID to 1 and configure the fields as follows Style Rectangular BandInner 0 40 BandOuter 0 60 BandStart 1 BandStop 5 BandColor Green Version 4 0 0 220 Part Five Monitors Set the BandID to 2 and configure the fi
341. pe Type Priority m Server Server Name MESVIS160 Browse Selection Criteria Alarm Type Select which alarm types that you want to display By default four types of alarm will be selected the exception being masked alarms Version 4 0 0 157 Part Five Sort Criteria Monitors Select the way in which alarms will be sorted within the window by clicking on the appropriate radio button The sort options are as follows Sort by priority Sorts alarms according to their priority field Sort by type Sorts alarms according to their type in the order of ALM OK ACK WRN MSK Sort by type within priority Sorts alarms according to their priority Alarms of the same priority are sorted according to their type Sort by priority within type Sorts alarms according to their type as before Alarms of the same type are sorted according to their priority Priority Alarm Monitor Windows can be configured to show alarm occurrences of every alarm or a selection of Alarm priorities The Alarm priority of the channel is configured in the channel configuration window Priorities range from 0 to 255 the former being the highest priority If a Selection of Alarm priorities is required click the mouse on the Selection option and type in the text box the range of priorities to be displayed in this new window Server Name Enter the name of the Orchestrator server that you want to monitor alarms from Cli
342. pically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located at the center of the instrument NeedlelID When multiple needles exist NeedlelD is used to index the needle to which the other needle properties apply The total number of needles is determined by the Needles property and NeedlelD has valid values from 0 to Needles 1 NeedleLength NeedleWidth Determines the length and width of the needle currently selected by NeedlelD These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Needle Mouse Control Determines the type of mouse input to the needle currently selected by NeedlelD Needle Determines the number of needles displayed on the control This property must be set before needle properties are entered The NeedlelD property is used to select the needle to which needle properties apply NeedleScalelD Determines the scale on which the needle currently selected by NeedlelD is based The ScaleOriginX and ScaleOriginY properties determine the origin of the needle The ScaleMaxValue and ScaleMinValue properties define the valid operating range for the needle s value NeedleShape Determines the shape of a user defined needle and only applies when NeedleStyle is set to User Defined In general this string defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs The needle shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the center of the instrument an
343. point to the heading on the menu bar and then choose the correct option from the drop down list The menus vary dependent on the Window being used The menu options for the Orchestrator Monitor Windows are discussed later in this section In some instances an alternative to using the menus is to choose options via the buttons on the Toolbar Each Window will have a different set of tool buttons Those used as part of the Orchestrator Monitor Window are described later in this section Column Identification From the previous image of a typical Channel Monitor Window you can denote nine columns The values displayed by the monitor are as follows Column Analog Channel Digital Channel 1 Channel Id Channel Id 2 Tag Tag 3 Description Description 4 Value Digital Status On Off description 5 Units 6 SIG 7 Event Status EHI ELO Event Status EHI ELO 8 Alarm WHI WLO Alarm 9 Ack Ack Alarm AHI ALO AER Alarm Message The acronyms are expanded as follows SIG Significant change WLO Warning Low AHI Alarm High EHI Event High ALO Alarm Low ELO Event Low AER Alarm amp Channel is in Ack Alarm Acknowledged error WHI Warning High Version 4 0 0 123 Part Five Create a new Channel Monitor Window To add a new Channel Monitor Window choose NEW MONITOR from the File drop down menu list or providing a Channel Monitor Window is the acti
344. pper left corner of the area defined by the tic size parameters TicWidth etc TicStart Stop Determines the values at which the tic marks start and stop for the tic set currently selected by TiclID These values are numbers between Min and Max TicStyle Determines the style of the tic set currently selected by TicID TicWidth Determines the width of the tic marks for the tic set currently selected by TicID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Note See Generic Configuration Fields for Information On Background Digital and Fonts Version 4 0 0 248 Part Five Monitors Drawing a Slider Example We will now go through the steps to draw a slider similar to the one below 100000 30000 80000 70000 60000 50000 40000 30000 20000 10000 Step 1 El After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the Slider a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the Slider is of the required size A Slider will appear this is the default setting for the Slider but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 First we will configure the Bar Select the Bar tabs and configure the fields as follows Barlnner 0 04 BarOuter 0 36 BarStart 0 04 BarStop 0 95 BarShape Recta
345. quality of 75 dpi Assuming the printer is properly configured selecting the OK button will result in a hard copy of the selected Monitor pages being produced Print Previewing the Active Alarm Monitor To obtain a preview on the computer screen of the page as it will appear when it is printed choose Print Preview from the File Menu Use this command to display the active document as it would appear when printed When you choose this command the main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages will be displayed in their printed format The print preview toolbar offers you options to view either one or two pages at a time move back and forth through the document zoom in and out of pages and initiate a print job Version 4 0 0 156 Part Five Monitors Page Setup From the File Menu choose Page Setup to set the page orientation margins and the size of the trend to be printed Creating A New Alarm Monitor Window To create a new Monitor Window choose NEW from the File drop down menu list or providing the Alarm Monitor Main Window is the active Window press CTRL N Using the toolbar click on the New Window Di button A New Monitor Properties Dialog box will appear r Edit New Monitor Properties Selection Criteria Display Fields Color and Sound Intemet Server IV Active Acknowledged v Wamings Masked Priority AI Sort Criteria Priority Type Pronty Ty
346. r 4 Configure LOGGER_1 MESVIS160 l c3 sl Fille View Control Help Dala n General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced m Logged Channels Channels Avg Lag Channels Avg Lag T Avg Lag Channels Avg Lag mja iere rr I ion rir E For Help press Fl Enabled No Errors p p 64 different blocks of channels can be configured for each logger Each block could contain up to 1000 channels To configure a block of channels point to the block and click the mouse button If there is enough space on the button a block which contains a single channel will display the channel s tag identifier An Enter Log Channel Range Dialog box will appear Version 4 0 0 301 Part Six Loggers r Enter Log Channel Range Server MESVIS160 Sources SIMULATED USER ANALOG CHANNELS Hai USER DIGITAL CHANNELS ne CALCULATED CHANNELS HISTORY CHANNELS SYSTEM ERROR CHANNELS DATA EXCHANGE Double click on a source to view all tags amp descriptions Prefix C From 2 Io e Clear Souce Name CALCULATED CHANNELS Cancel The box will contain a list of the Orchestrator Channel Groups Choose the group from which the channels are required Edit the From and To text boxes within the dialog box to select the channels If a single channel is required in any block then the From and To entries will be the same To see a list of channels within a source double click the source
347. r Alarm Acknowledgement Alarms once displayed in an alarm monitor window will remain visible until the alarm occurrence is acknowledged and the channel has returned to its normal state This allows the user to be aware of all alarm occurrences no matter what the time duration of the occurrence or the time it occurred The user can acknowledge alarms on an individual or page basis When an alarm occurrence is acknowledged it will be removed from the display providing it is not still in an alarm state If the channel is still in an alarm state when acknowledged it will be marked as acknowledged and will remain on the display until the alarm clears There are 3 ways to acknowledge an alarm 1 Via the toolbar icons 2 Via the menu 3 Via right mouse clicking on the Alarm Monitor Window To acknowledge an alarm simply click on the alarm entry on the display via the left or right mouse button The selected occurrence will be highlighted If you left clicked with the mouse button select choose either the toolbar option of alarm acknowledgement or alternatively choose the menu option i Alarm Monitor Application AlarmM1 Qi File View Window Help n rm LB Properties Alt Enter d T 9 M tT Select Font Ctl F Communication Settings Va Acknowledge Alarm Ctl A Z Acknowledge Page Ctl K e Cancel Common Alarm Ctl C Qj Mask Alarm Ctrl M r1 e al dit Stop Updating J t Acknowledge the currently selected alarm IME
348. r Minor TicColor Max Min Tics Tics 0 Light Blue 1 1 1 1 10 2 White 1 Red 5 5 5 5 3 1 White Click Apply Step 4 Next we set up the Track Bands for each Track of the Strip Chart Select the Track Bands tab and configure the fields as follows TrackID 0 TrackBands 3 TrackBandID TrackBandStart TrackBandStop BandColor 0 1 4 Red 1 4 4 Yellow 2 A 1 Green TrackID 1 TrackBands 2 TrackBandID TrackBandStart TrackBandStop BandColor 0 4 4 Light Blue 1 3 3 Yellow Click Apply Step 5 Next we set up the Variables of the Strip Chart Select the Variables tab and configure the fields as follows Variables 50 Allows for max number of channels VariablelD VariablelD TrackID Type VariableFill Color 0 0 0 Analog Enabled Pink 1 1 2 Discrete disabled Black Click Apply Version 4 0 0 274 Part Five Monitors Step 6 Next we set up the X axis of the Strip Chart Select the X Axis tab and configure the fields as follows XTicMode 1 Date Time Standard XSpan 0006944 1 minute 1 24 60 MajorTics 5 MinorTics 1 Time and Date Formats Seconds Format 96l 96M 96S p Minutes Format 96l 96M Yp Hours Format 96l 96M Yp Days format 9em 9ed 9 y Months Format 9ob Vy Years Format YY Date Format 9em 9ed 96y TicColor White Click Apply Step 7 Next we set up the General Parameters of the Strip Chart Sele
349. r if it were printed 6 Allows the to user alter the properties of the Active Alarm Monitor Window 7 Starts the Active Alarm Monitor updating with Alarms 8 Stops the Active Alarm Monitor Window from updating with Alarms 9 Acknowledge the currently selected alarm 10 Acknowledges all alarms in view 11 Cancels the common alarm 12 Masks the selected channel 13 UnMasks the selected channel 14 Toggles Gridlines on off 15 Places the Active Alarm Monitor Window in full screen mode 16 Select a new font for the Alarm Monitor Window 17 Use this command to display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of Alarm Monitor 18 Get help on a topic Version 4 0 0 152 Part Five Monitors Organizing Windows Within the main Alarm Monitor window monitor child windows can be arranged to suit the user requirements The title given to each Alarm Monitor window is name of the server whose alarms are being displayed Initially when a new monitor window is created it will display over the top of any other windows in the Alarm Monitor application window Windows can be brought to the front by either pointing to any exposed part of the required window and clicking or by choosing Window from the menu bar and then selecting the appropriate priority group window The window menu commands are further described in the topic Window Menu Commands Opening Saving Closing Alarm Monitor Windows Qi Alarm Monitor Appl
350. r more devices or the Auto Save function on one or more processors is enabled Files representing the values of each channel when the system is shutdown are stored here TRENDS The Trends sub directory stores configuration files used for the Trends option See part 7 for Replay options The above directory structure is typical of a used system Some directories may not exist until certain facilities are used Version 4 0 0 26 Part One Installation Procedure Uninstall Utility The uninstall wizard issued with Orchestrator creates a log of all changes made as part of the Installation and creates an Uninstall icon in the Orchestrator program group The Install Wizard records All programs and data files added to the system All shared files some DLL files are shared with other applications All directories created as part of the installation Changes made to the registry Program groups and program icons created Before attempting to run Orchestrator Uninstall utility on a server or client system ensure that all programs are shutdown Before using the Uninstall utility on an Orchestrator Server the Orchestrator service must be shutdown Select the Services icon in Control Panel highlight the Orchestrator service from the list and click the Stop button The Orchestrator service will then be shutdown To uninstall Orchestrator Server or Client select the Orchestrator program in Add Remove Programs in Control Pa
351. r the tic set currently selected by TicID Version 4 0 0 247 Part Five Monitors FontiD Determines which font is used for the labels of the tic set currently selected by TicID TiclD When multiple tic sets exist TicID is used to index the tic sets to which the other tic properties apply The total number of tic sets is determined by the Tics property and TicID has valid values from 0 to Tics 1 Inner Outer Determines the inner and outer extents of the tic set currently selected by TicID These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Label On Enables or disables labels at each tic mark for the tic set currently selected by TicID The position of the tic labels is defined by the TicLabelPosition property Label Postion Sets or returns the position where labels are displayed for the tic set currently selected by TicID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Tics Determines the number of tic sets displayed on the control This property must be set before all other tic properties The TiclD property is used to select the tic set to which tic properties apply Tics Shape Determines the shape of a user defined tic set This property only applies when TicStyle is set to User Defined and defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which 0 0 is located at the u
352. ration Tab at the top of the Logger Configuration window When you click on the Advanced Configuration button the following dialog is displayed Version 4 0 0 322 Part Six Loggers r 4 Configure LOGGER_1 MESVIS160 scujs so x File View Control Help jolla a General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Advanced Logger Options Logger Buffer Size Eo Logs Write To Disk Every E Secs MV Log By Tag m Logger Directory Default i C User Defined ED Logger Database G Vela sit Disk Space Checking Current Space Available 0 MegaBytes Notification When Free Disk Space Reaches fi 0 MegaBytes Log Files T ables r Synchronous Device Scanning Save Configuration File Mark Files as Read only Force Device Scan Rates to Logging Rate Li Ise Date as Table Sequet e Number E warn if No Updates from Device Name Prefix Auto Enable Devices a For Help press F1 Enabled No Errors 7 N The following fields may be configured to determine the way in which logged data is written to the disk Write To Disk Time This field determines how often a set of logs is written to disk It is expressed in seconds Buffer Size This field depends on how often the logging system logs data and writes to disk A faster logging rate requires more buffers A slower write to disk time requires fewer buffers Version 4 0 0 323 Part Six Loggers Exampl
353. rce Name This list displays all configured Orchestrator sources on a particular server The user must select the name of the required source e g Device Channels User Analog Channels etc Channel Name Displays a list of channel names for the selected Orchestrator Data Source The user can select individual channels by clicking on this list The channel name is actually the 16 character channel description As the user scrolls through the list of sources and channels the source prefix and channel number will be displayed along side Users can enter a user defined channel by selecting the first source USER DEFINED and first channel USER DEFINED in the lists and then entering there own channel number and prefix If the channel being configured is not recognised or the selected server is down then edit fields will replace the combo boxes so that the user can enter a user defined channel Version 4 0 0 183 Part Five Monitors Drawing Shapes The drawing of objects is achieved with the use of the Draw option on the monitor main window This section is concerned with all objects except channel objects To Draw Shapes Objects 1 Choose Draw on the Configure Monitor main window 2 You will be presented with a list of drawing objects that you can use Select the shape you want by clicking on it Note Alternatively you can select the appropriate icon on the monitor main window toolbar Drawing Object Associated Icon m a
354. rces ALL SOURCES ON SERVER 0 gt 99 0 59 10 999 Update Rate Mins Secs ms D Minutes Seconds and Milleseconds Version 4 0 0 138 Part Five Monitors You may however want to alter another Servers update Rate after you set one To do this you simply follow the procedure explained above but instead of clicking on OK on the dialog repeat the process but this time select a different server r z Edit Communication Settings EE as ani me i lt S Set Update Rates Set Recovery Rates S E MESVIS160 Set Update Rate SIMULATED USER ANALOG CHANNELS USER DIGITAL CHANNELS MESVIS160 Sources SIMULATED 0 39 0 559 Update Rate Mins o Secs p Version 4 0 0 139 Part Five Monitors Setting Update Rate for Source At the Edit Communications Settings Dialog select the Individual Sources button Now select the server that you want to set the update rate for by clicking on the drop down combo box that resides beside the servers in use caption Set Update Rates Set Recovery Rates MESVIS160 Selected Source Servers in use Name Once you have selected the server you require the following data should be present 1 In the List box provided under the Sources Column the names of all the sources that are open in the current application should appear 2 Under the prefix column the source s prefixes should appear 3 Under the Rates ms column the rate of the so
355. rchestrator Client double click on the Orchestrator icon The first time Orchestrator software is invoked you will see the following screen stating that the Orchestrator Service is not installed on Server machine name where machine name is the network name of your PC Click Ok to make a selection If required a Client may be run without the input of a data server so that trends maybe viewed using the local machine Select PRODUCT NAME Server Cancel Browse Auto Browse _ Cancel If a server is required then selection of the browse button will display all available computers on the network Checking the auto browse box will ensure that the list of available servers is displayed upon opening select server from the menu Select PRODUCT NAME Server MESVIS1 60 OK C Auto Browse Cancel Entire Network aft Microsoft Terminal Services P Microsoft Windows Network H 4 Web Client Network ACCOUNTS Bs e Fs MESVIS150 MESXP139 MESXP161 Once an Orchestrator RTE data server has been selected the Orchestrator main program window will be displayed Version 4 0 0 48 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator The title bar displays the Server name user name and the Orchestrator configuration E G Notepad Administrator motor orc MESV1IS160 aidan mallon Untitled PRODUCT NAME File View Control Monitors Replays Processors Loggers Help Dees 6S Q
356. re the needle remains stationary and the tics and or annulars move such as a compass Tics Property Determines the number of tic sets displayed on the control This property must be set before all other tic properties The TiclD property is used to select the tic set to which tic properties apply Start Value Stop Value Determines the values at which the tic marks start and stop for the tic set currently selected by TiclID These values are numbers between ScaleMinValue and ScaleMaxValue Tic Style Determines the style of the tic set currently selected by TicID Tic Width Determines the width of the tic marks for the tic set currently selected by TicID This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Version 4 0 0 205 Part Five Monitors Annulars Annulars are used for aesthetics as well as indicators of operating ranges Properties are provided to modify annular s start stop values inner outer radii and color Multiple annular regions can be placed on a single control FE Properties 7 AEE Frame Knob Mark Scale Tics Gms Library Background Captions Digtal Fonts Annulars 1 Col AnnularlD 0 css Value Radius Stat off Inner J ozo Stop _ gt fjio Quer j0 85 Color Determines the color of the annular currently selected by AnnularlD Annulars Determines the number of annular
357. red angle for each individual selection using the SelectionID and SelectionAngle properties AutoAngleConfine Determines if the knob can be rotated outside of the extents defined by AutoStartAngle and AutoStopAngle AutoOffset Determines whether the selection caption offset is controlled manually or automatically If AutoOffset TRUE then the control will use the AutoOffsetStyle and AutoOffsetDistance properties to draw the control If however AutoOffset FALSE the user must enter the desired offsets for each individual selection using the SelectionlD SelectionOffsetX and SelectionOffsetY properties Version 4 0 0 240 Part Five Monitors AutoOffsetDistance Determines the length of the offset from the control s center when AutoOffsetStyle is not zero This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 If the AutoOffsetStyle 0 then this property has no effect on the control If AutoOffsetStyle is not zero however than a line is drawn either horizontally or vertically using the appropriate distance AutoOffsetStyle Sets the type of offset for all selections AutoRadius Determines the radius from the center of the knob at which the labels are displayed This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Additionally the AutoOffsetDistance if AutoOffset TRUE may be used to modify the label location in order to increase readability or for purely co
358. regions displayed on the control This property must be set before all other annular properties The AnnularlD property is used to select the region to which annular properties apply AnnularlD When multiple annulars exist AnnularlD is used to index the annular to which the other annular properties apply The total number of annulars is determined by the Annulars property and AnnularlD has valid values from 0 to Annulars 1 Inner Outer Radius Determines the inner and outer radii of the annular currently selected by AnnularlD These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 0 0 and 1 0 Annular Start Stop Value Determines the values at which the annular region begins and ends The values are numbers between ScaleMinValue and ScaleMaxValue Version 4 0 0 206 Part Five Monitors Note See Caption Section on generic configuration fields for details on captions digital fonts background and frame Version 4 0 0 207 Part Five Monitors Drawing A Control Knob Example In this section we will go through the steps necessary to create a control knob like the one below Step 1 i After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document click on the icon for the control knob a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the knob is of the required size A knob will appear this is the default setting for
359. rikeout Underine ln DFKai SB Tr Dotum gt Sample Fy DotumChe Fy FangSong AaBbYyZz Fonts Determines the number of fonts available for display on the control This property must be set before all other font properties The FontlD property is used to select the font to which other font properties apply SetFont When evoked this property displays the standard Windows font dialog box Use normal Windows Techniques to edit and change font settings FontiD When multiple fonts exist FontID is used to index the font to which the other font properties apply The total number of fonts is determined by the Fonts property and FontID has valid values from 0 to Fonts 1 Version 4 0 0 278 Part Five Monitors Frame nm Properties m Library Background Annulars Captions Digital Fonts Frames Hubs Needles Scales Tics cms Color 0 None Picture Frame Style Frame Coordinates Top _ Gee Lett o Has Bottom d 15 Right iz ael as User Defined 0 100 100 0 900 0 1000 100 1000 900 900 1000 100 1000 0 900 FrameBottom Property FrameLeft Property FrameRight Property FrameTop Property Determines left right bottom and top extents of the frame if FrameStyle is other than 0 These properties are based on a unitless scale and typically have values between 1 0 and 1 0 where a value of 0 0 is located at the center of the
360. ring Handling Functionality The Calculator can handle Strings in formulas and can be used as follows The first way is to reference a channel in the system by tag For example if we have an Analog channel P1 configure with a Tag of STR we can reference this channel in the calculator by putting STR in a Calculator channels formula Note To reference a channel as prefix the tag with an _ The string functionality can also be used to reference Loggers For example to use the above vlog name function to reference a logger named LOGGER 1 simply use vlog LOGGER 1 Be sure to enclose the Logger name in quotes i e this applies to all string references Calculation Formula Timing Calculator channel expressions are re evaluated whenever any Orchestrator Channel is updated E g C1 DS1 P1 C1 will be updated whenever DS1 or P1 updates Channels in an expression that are being assigned values by the assignment operator do not case a re evaluation if an update occurs to the assigned channel The calculator will only re evaluate the expression when the assigning channel updates E g Ci DS17 Q1 This expression will only re evaluate when Q range of channels update and do not if updates occur on the DS channels If an expression contains one of the following timing functions then these expressions are re evaluated at least once per second stimer Pulse etimer Dpulse day Period ctime Ytime
361. rm is required Priority Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of this channels alarm Delay Enter the time in seconds between the channel value entering the alarm state and the system flagging an alarm Low and High Alarm Checking Alarm checking is available on all channels throughout the Orchestrator system Low Version 4 0 0 428 Part Ten Data Exchange Alarm and High Alarm levels can be configured independent of each other All the values entered are in engineering units If a channel reading exceeds the High Alarm limit then an alarm will be triggered as it will if the channel goes below the Low Alarm limit When monitoring channels if the high or low alarm is triggered then the fact will be annotated alongside the other channel information in the Monitor Window Enable Alarm Checking Check either the Low Alarm Checking or High Alarm Checking or both check boxes to enable the facility Alarm Limit The value at which the channel will flag an alarm Warning and Limit Delay If required a warning can be displayed when a channel reaches a limit close to the alarm limit For low alarm checking the limit must be less than the alarm limit For high alarm checking the warning limit must be less than the alarm limit Specify the number of seconds the channel must be in the alarm zone before an alarm will be flagged within the system Hysteresis Hysteresis can prevent
362. rmation in the Monitor Window Alarm Priority Enter the priority of the alarm triggered by this channel Common Alarm Channels can be configured to trigger a Common Alarm A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Alarm Delay Enter the time in seconds between the channel value entering the alarm state and the system flagging an alarm Alarm Message An Alarm Message can be defined for displaying on the Status line of the Orchestrator Main Window when a channel goes into an alarm state Version Error Reference source not found 64 Part Four Configuring Processors Part Four Processors Part Four covers the configuration of Orchestrator Processors History Channels Calculator Channels Alarm System System Error Processor User Analog Channels The User Analog channels are internal channels that can be used in many ways User Analog channels can be used to hold manually input values entered via the channel Monitor Window These manually entered values could be the set point or coefficient value required by an algorithm configured in Orchestrator s Calculator package User Analog channels can also hold the results of calculations performed by the Calculator package The channels are used wholly at the users discretion Once configured User Analog Channels have the prefix P and can be monitored logged and replayed
363. rmines the position of the tic marks for the X and Y axes respectively These properties allow the user to set the X and Y Tic marks on the top bottom left right etc for each track TrackColor Determines the background color of the track currently selected by TrackID It is ignored if TrackBackPicture is set Version 4 0 0 261 Part Five Monitors TrackPicture Determines the graphic to be displayed in the background of the track currently selected by TrackID TrackOutline Determines whether or not the track currently selected by TrackID is bounded by outline OutlineColor Determines the color used to draw the outline around the track currently selected by TracklD Separation If multiple tracks exist this property determines the spacing between tracks This property is based ona unitless scale ranging from 0 to 1 scaled into the drawing area defined by AreaBottom AreaLeft AreaRight and AreaTop The maximum value for this property is 0 25 Y Axis Labels Labels Determines whether or not tic labels are displayed for the track currently selected by TrackID TicColor Determines the color used when drawing the tic marks and tic labels for the track currently selected by TrackID FontID Determines which font is used in the tic labels for the track currently specified by TrackID Align Determines the alignment and orientation of the tic labels These are used to improve the readability of the labels on the gr
364. roduce an exact weight Version Error Reference source not found 90 Part Four Configuring Processors Example 3 Statistical Monitoring This example is concerned with an Electricity Power Generation Unit The requirement is to monitor the purity of the water used to produce the steam to drive the generator The levels of calcium pH and suspended solids are monitored via suitable transducers A daily record of the maximum minimum and mean value of each parameter is to be recorded The calculations are to be performed only when the unit is generating electricity The generator is regarded as running when an output of greater than 5 Mega Watts is reached Device Channel DS1 is monitoring the output of the unit in megawatts DS2 the calcium level DS3 the pH and DS4 the suspended solids The calculator formula may be written as follows C1 pulse 23 59 55 A pulse 5 seconds before midnight each day Channel C1 will be configured to trigger a logger The logger will be set to event mode event trigger specified as C1 and logger configured to record channels C4 to C12 This will store the days results C2 pulse 00 00 00 A pulse at midnight to reset all greatest least and mean calculations C3 DS1 gt 5 1 0 If the generator is operating channel C3 will assume the value of 1 TRUE If not running will have the value of 0 FALSE C4 C2 C3 greatest DS2 C2 C4 Calculate the greatest value that DS2 achieves only w
365. ronous Device Scanning The logger can be forced to log at the same rate as the scan rate of the device channels are being logged from A warning can also be triggered if the device stops updating Devices that are scanning channels to be logged can be automatically enabled when the logger is enabled Version 4 0 0 336 Part Six Loggers Including Channel Values Various logger options can be modified when the logger is enabled to include channel values This is convenient where channel values are used to store reference values such as product numbers or shift number Logger options which can include channel values include Logger Directory Name Logger File prefix Logger Header Text Logger Predefined Messages Logger Export File Name Logger Export Email Subject Channels are included by inserting the channel identifier or tags prefixed with underscore in double quotation marks e g PRODUCT P1 or PRODUCT TAGNAME If the channel is analog then the current channel value is included If the channel is digital then the current channel value description is included User analog channels can be mapped to string values using a values txt file store in Installation Directory gt CURRENT_CONFIG USERA values txt The following example maps User Analog channel 1 normally P1 to product strings and Analog channel 2 normally P2 to Channel1 x Product Values x 1 PEPSI 2 COKE 3 FANTA 4 SPRITE 5 RIVER ROCK 6 DIET COKE 7 DIET FAN
366. rs Sheets 4 Data Logs Worksheet 4 Column Headers V Header Tags V Header Units Date Time Column Time Base ABSOLUTE v Date V Long Date Format V MS Col V Test Logs with Data V Test Logs on Seperate Rows Statistics Logger Header Sheet CSV TXT and DIF export files If logger Header sheet is included the logged data file name the logger name and the start and stop times of the logger will be included in the exported data at the top of the file Excel Worksheet XLS files A worksheet wil be created called LOGGERS which will give detailed information in column format about the logged data this includes logger name start and stop times header information and logger sequence Channels Header Sheet This will display the channel number prefix plus number tags descriptions units and Low and High state descriptions of the channels selected for export Excel Worksheet XLS files A worksheet wil be created called CHANNELS this will display in column format the details of the channels selected for export such as the channel number prefix plus number tags descriptions units and Low and High state descriptions min and max scales and more Text Logs Header Sheet CSV TXT and DIF export files Text logs from the data log file will be exported By default they are exported per time basis only check Date of Text Logs to have the date associated with the data Excel Worksheet XLS files Text logs from the dat
367. rt Six Loggers Rules For Logging By Tag As the system is logging data by tag the user is free to alter the channel associated with the tag The start and end tag will be displayed on the block button if the size of the tags do not exceed the button extent Otherwise the channel range will be displayed If there is only one channel on the range the tag will be displayed if it does not exceed the button extent When the logger is enabled the channels from the start to the end tag will be logged Logged Channels Channels Ava Channels Ava Channels Ava Channels Aya 1 sec Pulse E Ist Switch 2nd Switch E ia j F ie L B in EE ES eee E a E B 7 7 B 7 a E 7 E SaaS e EE S 7 7 E 7 7 E a E e The start channel number can not be greater than the end channel number i e if the start tag refers to P30 then the end tag must refer to a channel greater than or equal to P30 If this situation arises the tag range will be removed from the logged channels range The tag name can be changed at will However the start tag must refer to a channel which is less than or equal to the end tag Version 4 0 0 307 Part Six Loggers The Rate of Change Tab General Channels Events Rate Change Text Export Advanced Rate of Change Configuration 4 Configure LOGGER
368. rtionValue to a percentage value 0 100 When PercentMode is set to 2 Value portion sizes are determined by setting PortionValue to a numeric value between Min and Max When PercentMode is set to 3 Ratio each portion s size is determined by the ratio of its PortionValue to the sum of PortionValues of all portions Digital Format Determines the format of the numbers associated with the control This format is similar to that used in C For example 960 21 X xx 0 0f xx 0 3f Percent x xxx Percent Digital Position Determines the radius or offset position of the digital numeric value displayed when DigitalStyle is set to 2 Floating Note See Generic Configuration Fields for information on Backgrounds Font and Frames Version 4 0 0 230 Part Five Monitors Drawing a Percent Control Example We will now go through an example of drawing a Percentage Gauge similar to the one below 0 Step 1 After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the Percentage Gauge a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the Percentage Gauge is of the required size A Percentage Gauge will appear this is the default setting for the Percentage Gauge but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 We will now configur
369. s The Monitor menu offers the following commands which enable you to Change modes of operation control updating on channels use the Configurable Monitor Wizard and set up your network Configure Mode Sets the active monitor to configure mode Channel values can not be set in this mode Value Entry Mode Sets the active monitor to value entry mode Objects cannot be configured in this mode Lock Monitor Allows the user to lock the currently active monitor Grid Settings Allows the user to set the Grid Settings for the active Monitor Start Updating The monitor will start updating channel objects when this command is selected Stop Updating The monitor will stop updating channel objects when this command is selected Default Visual Allows the user to set the default properties of the objects in Properties the currently active monitor Channel Wizard This command runs the configuration channel utility Select Server Allows the user to select a server Allows the user to set server update rates and recovery rates for the application Version 4 0 0 291 Part Five Monitors Window Menu Commands The Window menu offers the following commands which enable you to arrange multiple views of multiple documents in the application window Opens another window for the active monitor document Arranges windows in an overlapped fashion Arranges windows in non overlapped tiles Arranges icons at the bottom of the screen Switch Betwee
370. s after the decimal point Delimiter Three options and a User Defined alternative are available in this drop down list The delimiter separates each field in a row The correct delimiter is required for the spreadsheet package to import the data correctly The choices are User Space Comma Tab Most modern spreadsheets including Microsoft Excel and Lotus use the Comma separator As an alternative to the fixed choices a User option is available If this is chosen enter the delimiting character in the text box that appears alongside the list Version Error Reference source not found 73 Part Four Configuring Processors End Line Similar to the Delimiter there are choices for the end of line separator The choices are User CR LF LF LineFeed CR Carriage Return A User option is again an option Microsoft Excel and Lotus require CR LF end of line characters Import Export File Enter the path of the file you wish to export to or import from Alternatively click the button on the right hand side to browse for the desired file Channel Range Select the All Channels button if you wish to import export every channel configuration Alternatively select the Channels button and enter a range of channel configurations you wish to export Copy and Paste Two of the icons on the Configure User Analog toolbar are Copy and Paste From the Calculator Configuration Window it is possible to copy one channels configuration to anot
371. s displayed r DATA EXPORT Select Database Log Logger Database C Default Provider MSDASQL 1 Persist Security Info False D ata Source Excel File Select Logger LOGGER_1 7 Sequence Start Time 00000001 27 February 2007 15 50 20 2 February 2007 1E Cancel The database to use is selected in same way as the database logger is configured The logger box displays the list of all loggers which have data store in the selected database A list of logs created by that logger will be listed The sequence number of the log and the start and stop time of the log are displayed While the logger is enabled and logging data the start time only is displayed Choose the log to export and select the OK button Version 4 0 0 357 Part Seven Replays Configuring Data for Export A Data Export dialog box will be shown DATA EXPORT Configuration Files dataexport New Delete Rename Copy Settings Source Log C PRODUCT NAMESLOGGED_DATA LOGGER_14090725_175518_090804_032700 odl Select Log File Select Database Log SINGLE TIME PERIOD m C Start Time C Stop Time Content Options Text Header USER DEFINED PRODUCT COKE SHIFT SHIFT B BATCH NUMBER 22 OPERATOR OPERATOR NAME Replay Channels ALL CHANNELS X Configure Channel Lists RH 1 50 RH 70 80 RH 101 170 DS 1 24 AD 1 2 Al1 5 MI 1 50 11 4 MI 88
372. s made To save either 1 Click on the Save icon fal The History Channel configuration will be saved to the current Orchestrator System configuration No File Name will be requested 2 Select Save from the File menu 3 Select Exit from the file menu If any changes have been made a dialog box will ask if you want to save the configuration before exiting the window NB Any changes to the History Channel Configuration will not be incorporated into the Orchestrator System uniil it is next enabled Version Error Reference source not found 68 Part Four Configuring Processors Copy and Paste Two of the icons on the Configure History Channels toolbar are Copy and Paste From the History Channel Configuration Window it is possible to copy one channels configuration to another Point to the channel to be copied it will be highlighted click on the Copy icon the configuration will be copied to the clipboard Now point to the channel that the configuration is to be copied to again it will be highlighted Select the Paste icon and the configuration will be pasted from the clipboard Shortcuts Ea A Toolbar Keys CTRL C CTRL V Version Error Reference source not found 69 Part Four Configuring Processors Configure History Channels When the Configure Channel button is pressed the following dialog box appears r Configure History Channels H1 H30 Source Channel C1 IV Averaging History Period Cancel
373. s of the trends window with the exception of the Trend Area can be switched on or off depending on the user s preference Quick Start to Trends If you are anxious to start examining your logged data this section lists in brief the steps necessary to display a trend on your computer s screen Launch ORCHESTRATOR Trends by choosing the icon A trend window will appear From the File menu choose New A blank Trend Window will appear Again from the File menu choose Select Log File From the Open File Dialog box identify the file to replay The name of the log file with the start and stop time will be added to the Window Also the time base will be set To include at least one channel choose Add Line from the Edit menu An Add Line to Trend Dialog box will appear From the drop down list select the channel group that contains the channel required Immediately below this enter the actual channel in the text box Click on the Add button and then choose the Done button A trace will appear in the window To alter the scaling and colour Version 4 0 0 379 Part Seven Replays of the trace from the Edit menu choose Edit Line Edit the resulting dialog box to modify the trace The following sections detail all the facilities available in ORCHESTRATOR Trends Configuring a Trend This section of the manual assumes that no configuration has been stored Instructions to access the various options are given to use both the tool buttons and optio
374. s output and prints signs blanks decimal points and octal and hexadecimal prefixes More than one flag directive may appear in a format specification Flag Meaning Default Left align the result within the given field width Right align t Prefix the output value with a sign or if the output value is Sign appears only for of a signed type negative signed values 0 If width is prefixed with 0 zeros are added until the minimum No padding width is reached If 0 and appear the 0 is ignored If 0 is specified with an integer format i u x X o d the 0 is ignored blank Prefix the output value with a blank if the output value is signed No blank appears and positive the blank is ignored if both the blank and flags appear When used with the o x or X format the flag prefixes any No blank appears nonzero output value with 0 Ox or OX respectively When used with the e E or f format the flag forces the output Decimal point appears value to contain a decimal point in all cases only if digits follow it When used with the g or G format the flag forces the output Decimal point appears value to contain a decimal point in all cases and prevents the only if digits follow it truncation of trailing zeros Trailing zeros are truncated Ignored when used with c d i u or s width Optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output The width argument is a nonneg
375. s to common alarm output printers and loggers it it possible to annunciate alarm activity to alarm annunciation destinations such as pagers email and SMS The user may configure any number of annunciators in the system Each configuration must be provided with a unique name g Configure ALARM SYSTEM MESVIS160 File View Control Help Hat Alarm Configuration Annunciation Configuration Advanced Configuration I Annunciators Mis ER S PagerMobile T AP Mail amp nnunciator Pager amp nnunciator Delete Modify System Disabled For Help press F1 Version Error Reference source not found 102 Part Four Configuring Processors When the user clicks on the Add button the following screen will be displayed Alarm System Annunciator Options General Alarms Wamings Masking Watchdog Iv Enable Annuciation Name NENNEN Annuciation Type Vodafone UK Annuciation Destination Select Source Priority Y 0 255 Cancel Help Enabled This field enables this configuration This checkbox needs to be enabled in order for alarm notifications to be sent Annunciation Name This field allows the user to provide a unique identifier for this configuration Annunciation Type This field allows the user to select type of annunciator This field cannot be modified after pressing Select or Options buttons Annu
376. screen mode Standalone Only Options Menu Commands The Options menu offers the following commands Properties Select Font Communication Settings Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledge Page Cancel Common Alarm Mask Alarm UnMask Alarm Start Updating Stop Updating Edits alarm viewing options and selection criteria Selects a font for an Alarm Monitor Window Edit communication settings for an Alarm Monitor Window Acknowledges the currently selected alarm Acknowledges all alarms that are currently fully visible in the active page Cancels the common alarm if it is on Masks the alarms of faulty or temporary channels in alarm Unmasks the Alarms that have been previously masked by the mask command Starts updating alarms in the Alarm Monitor Window Stops updating alarms in the Alarm Monitor Window Version 4 0 0 169 Part Five Monitors Window Menu Commands The Window menu offers the following commands which enable you to arrange multiple views of multiple documents in the application window Cascade Arranges windows in an overlapped fashion Tile Horizontally Arranges windows in horizontal non overlapped tiles Tile Vertically Arrange windows in vertical non overlapping tiles Arrange Icons Arranges icons of closed windows Window 1 2 Goes to specified window Help Menu Commands The Help menu offers the following commands which provide you assistance with this application Help Topics Offers you an
377. se of one or more icons representing each trend window Choosing the Arrange Icon option from the Window menu will organise any icons uniformly in the window All trend windows displayed are visibly updated not just the active window Version 4 0 0 405 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Part Eight Excel RTD amp DDE Part Eight explains how to use Orchestrator s Excel Real Time Data RTD Capabilities and Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Version 4 0 0 406 Part Eight Dynamic Data Exchange Excel Real Time Data From Excel 2002 onwards Excel supports retrieval of real time data The RTD architecture is more fast efficient reliable and robust than the DDE architecture Excel can be used for continuous data retrieval from applications which send updates to Excel as new data becomes available The Orchestrator system supports retrieval of channels using channel identifiers Values can be retrieved from the local Orchestrator server in a cell by entering RTD Orchestrator RTDServer channel identifier a peotthestrator e Denver eher If a channel is disabled or in error values are displayed as O If a channel does not exist values are displayed as N A If N A appears in the cell even though the channel exists on the current server under Tool Options Security Macro Security set security level to Medium or Low Then save and close and reopen the spreadsheet Excel RTD across Networks Values can be retrieved from the loc
378. se of the core Real Time Engine For information concerning external Input Output devices please refer to the documentation supplied with that product The guide details the use of the core Real Time Engine For information concerning external Input Output devices connected to the system please refer to Appendix A at the rear of this manual Mouse Conventions You can use a single button mouse or a multiple button mouse with Orchestrator If you have a multiple button mouse the left hand button is the primary mouse button unless you have configured it differently Point means to position the mouse pointer until the tip of the pointer rests on whatever you want to point to on the screen Click means to press and immediately release the mouse button without moving the mouse Double Click means to press the mouse button twice in quick succession without moving the mouse Drag means to point and then hold down the mouse button as you move the mouse Keyboard Conventions Throughout this manual the Control key is referred to as CTRL The Escape key is shown as ESC Key combinations are shown as CTRL E which requires the user to press both the Control key and the E key simultaneously Version 4 0 0 7 Part One Installation Procedure Part One Overview Installation Part one introduces the Orchestrator Product and outlines how to install the Orchestrator Software Version 4 0 0 8 Part One Installation Procedure I
379. seconds in the exported data Text Logs With Data Check Text Logs With Data to include text logs from the log file for export They are appended with the data on the last column of the row Text Logs on Separate Rows Check Text Logs on Separate Rows to display text logs on a new line within the exported data file Statistics Selecting statistics will append statistics for the selected channels at the bottom of the exported data Statistics include Root Mean Square RMS Average AVG Minimum MIN Maximum MAX Standard Deviation STD DEV Difference between Minimum and Maximum DIFF Export Sample Skip Single Time Period Only Export All Skip Every logs scans Skip Time Frequency seconds Skip Duplicates With large data files users may wish to export only a certain amount of data The Sample Skip option allows the user to decide how may samples will be exported If a sample rate of say n is entered then every nth sample will be exported The Sample Skip combo box has Three options Export All and Skip Every and Skip Time Frequency Select Skip Every and an edit box will appear type in the skip factor in terms of logs scans Select Skip Time Frequency and an edit box will appear type in the skip factor in terms of seconds Select Skip Duplicates to skip duplicated data Version 4 0 0 363 Part Seven Replays Destination Options After selecting the logged data or database file and configuring it for export
380. section for details Save See Opening and Saving Configurations earlier in this section for details Save As See Opening and Saving Configurations earlier in this section for details Print This option has the effect of printing all Orchestrator configurations devices processors loggers and overall system information Version 4 0 0 50 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Print Setup Shows the standard windows Print Setup dialog which allows you to configure the current printer and paper orientation Import Configuration Use this command to import channel configuration from an ASCII file This command presents an Import dialog box where you may specify the range of channels to be imported the file to import from etc Export Configuration Use this command to export channel configuration to an ASCII file This command presents an Export dialog box where you may specify the range of channels to be exported the file to export to etc Exit Quits Orchestrator Client and closes the Orchestrator window Other options are greyed out as they are not currently available on an Orchestrator client system View menu Allows the user to change the display of the Orchestrator main window The Tool Bar Status Bar and Alarm Bar can be displayed or removed from the window Control Menu Refer to Controlling Orchestrator earlier in this chapter for details on the menu options Monitors Menu Channel Monitor Alar
381. select custom From the type list find dd mm yyyy hh mm and select it Edit the type and add ss to the end Version 4 0 0 331 Part Six Loggers r Format Cells i Alignment Font Border Patterns Protection Sample Lee Number Currency Type Accounting dd mm yyyy hh mm Type the number format code using one of the existing codes as a starting point e Click ok The date and time each sample was taken at will be visible e Save the spreadsheet Logging to an Oracle Database From the General tab of the logger configuration select Database from the storage type drop down list On the advanced tab the Database properties should now be configurable The connection string can be edited manually by changing the text in the user defined text box below The logger can automatically create the connection string by clicking the select button and selecting the properties you require Logger Database Default User Defined PROVIDER MICROSOFT JET OLEDB 4 0 DATA SOURCE C 4SCA4 Seclect To connect to an Oracle database click the provider tab and select Oracle Provider for OLE DB as shown below Version 4 0 0 332 Part Six Loggers n Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogWebDB OLE DB Provider Mi
382. set the Selections field to be equal to 2 then set the SelectionsID to be 0 and configure the fields as follows SelectionAlign Right Color Black SelectionAngle 2210 SelectionOffsetX 0 60 SelectionOffsetY 0 00 SelectionRadius 0 80 Caption OFF Highlight Selection ON Highlight Color Red Now we will configure the second selection Set the SelectionsID to be equal to 1 and configure the fields as follows SelectionAlign Right Color Black SelectionAngle 330 SelectionOffsetX 0 60 SelectionOffsetY 0 00 SelectionRadius 0 80 Caption OFF Highlight Selection ON Highlight Color Red Step 3 Now we will configure the Knob select the knob tab and configure the fields as follows KnobColor Black KnobRadius 0 65 Version 4 0 0 242 Part Five Monitors KnobOffsetX 20 00 KnobOffsetY 20 00 KnobStyle Complex MouseControl Snap To Step 4 Now we will configure the Mark select the mark tab and configure the fields as follows MarkColor Red MarkInnerRadius 20 50 MarkOuterRadius 0 80 MarkWidth 0 40 MarkStyle Triangle Step 5 Now that the selector is configured we must assign a channel to it this will be a switch for a digital channel so configure a digital channel in the applications main menu Now return to the monitor right click on the selector and select Data Source Properties from the main menu and assign the digital channel you just configured to the selector Version 4 0 0 243
383. smetic reasons AutoStartAngle AutoStopAngle Determines the angular extremes of the selector switch These properties are ignored when AutoAngle FALSE Line Display Determines whether the lines to each selection are shown Line Inner Radius Determines the inner radius of the lines to each selection This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Line Thickness Determines the thickness of the line s on the control This property is measured in pixels Note See Generic Configuration Fields for information on Background Fonts and Frame Version 4 0 0 241 Part Five Monitors Drawing a Selector Example We will now go through an example of drawing a Selector similar to the one below E OFF Step 1 ze After the Overlay has been installed run the configurable monitor open a new monitor Document Click on the icon for the Selector a crosshair will appear Click and hold the mouse button and drag the crosshair until the Selector is of the required size A Selector will appear this is the default setting for the Selector but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 Now we will configure the Selections available to the user We will need Two selections one for on and one for off so set the Selections value to be equal to two Let us configure the first selection select the Selections tab and
384. sures that each time the Logger creates a data export file it will overwrite the old data export file if one exists with the latest file Append old Files With this option the Logger exports information and creates the export file for the first time All subsequent exports are appended to the end of the file N B This option will not work with Data Interchange Files DIF Create new file always In contrast to the Overwrite old files option here a backup of the last data export file will be created followed by the creation of the new data export file For example consider the following situation You want the export file to be named data dif When the logger creates its first output file the logger also creates the data export file called data dif When the logger creates its second log file it will then rename the file called data dif to data 1 dif and then create the file data dif Similarly on the creation of the third logger file the existing data dif file will be renamed to data 2 dif This process can continue renaming files up 999 times resulting in a list of files from data 1 dif to data 999 dif After 999 files have been created the file data 999 dif will be deleted on the creation of a new file so as to allow renaming to continue as long as required Run Command To enable the Run Command option the Logger Export and Run Command options need to be selected Run Command enables the user to spec
385. t The Data Import application will Import an ACSII text file with columns of data and create a System Data Log ODL file from the data Prior to import the ASCII file must be described by the user This description can then be saved as an Import Configuration File ORI which can be reused A text header can be also imported Importing An ASCII File It is important to give a good description of the ASCII file to be imported so that the data is interpreted correctly The user must also describe how the data should be formatted in the output log file The following information is required Source Information A unique channel number and is used to identify individual columns of data Each channel may represent a data point from a device or processor A prefix and source name is used to identify the processor or device Prefix Enter up to two alphabetical characters for the source prefix of the data to be imported Start Chan No Data is stored in ranges in a data log file Enter a channel number between 1 and 10 000 for the start of the range Source Name Enter up to 25 characters for a name to describe the data being imported Header Information There may be lines of text at the start of the ASCII file to import which could be used to describe the data This header information can be imported into a text file with the correct System format This header information can also be ignored Import Header Click this check box
386. t output and processing tasks Input tasks enable the system to acquire data Output tasks redirect this data to devices such as printers displays disk drives etc Processing tasks such as calculators or alarm monitors process the data Central to this architecture is a real time database called a data module The data module provides the real time interchange between the various tasks Data can be shared between tasks such that different tasks have access to a common data pool This allows the same acquired data to be processed logged and displayed simultaneously A diagram of the software architecture is shown on the following page Client Software Features The Orchestrator software supports Client Server functionality from version 1 3 onwards The Orchestrator Client software allows Client machines to access Orchestrator via a PC connected to the server using an existing site network From the Orchestrator Client the user can Configure Devices Processors and Loggers Control Enable Disable Restart and Initialise Monitor Data and Alarms Trend Real Time amp Historic data Version 4 0 0 9 Part One Installation Procedure Export Data Change Channel Values and Acknowledge Alarms Version 4 0 0 10 Part One Installation Procedure Monitors Alarm Configurable Channel Processors Monitor Monitor Monitor History Devices Channels Data m Calculator Capture Real ca Devices World
387. t Status oe OFF ON Cancel Help Alarm Masking It is possible to mask an alarm for the selected tag by clicking the Mask button at the bottom of the window This has the effect of setting the channels alarm status to Masked Masked alarms Version 4 0 0 420 Part Ten Data Exchange can be hidden in the alarm monitor by unchecking the Masked Alarms check box in the Monitor s property page Masked alarms are not shown on Main Menu s alarm bar To Unmask a channel s alarm status click the unmask button at the bottom of the window Version 4 0 0 421 Part Ten Data Exchange Part 10 Data Exchange This section describes the use of the Data Exchange Processor Version 4 0 0 422 Part Ten Data Exchange Data Exchange Data Exchange is a data capture client that can connect to multiple OPC Servers and or multiple DDE Servers This provides a means for data transfer to and from data servers provided by more than one vendor Servers available include device drivers to proprietary hardware Data Exchange is configured as a Processor and as such it makes available data input output to and from the RTE Data transfer is performed synchronously thus making network connections update as fast as possible Each item of data to be transferred is configured as a channel NB Data Exchange can only be installed as a Client on Windows 95 NB For Data Exchange to run on Windows 95 it is necessary that DCOM for Windows
388. t back to the periodic rate If Multiple is chosen then additional time text boxes will appear Edit these boxes to set the rate at which logging is required during an EVENT When an EVENT occurs the logger will operate at the new rate when the EVENT clears the log rate will revert to the periodic rate Event Logger Multiple Logs A logger configured to this mode is triggered only by EVENTS occurring Logger Type EVENT Number of Logs Logging Rate Pre Event 0 During Event SINGLE M Post Event It is often of interest to know information about a number of channels immediately before and after an EVENT occurs The Event Logger satisfies this need by recording information on selected channels in three phases before the event occurs during the event and after the event has cleared Each of these phases can be configured separately To use this mode select Multiple from drop down list adjacent to During Event Pre Event When the logger is enabled a circular buffer will be created in memory A number of records defined by the entry in the Number of Logs text box and the values in the Logging Rate box will be stored in the circular buffer When an EVENT occurs the contents of the buffer i e the last x number of readings at a defined rate will be stored on the hard disk If this facility is not required a value of 0 can be entered During Event Whilst the EVENT is occurring the logger will record information at the r
389. t the Masked Alarms display option in the Monitor Properties page select the masked alarm s that appear MSK appears beside the alarm One can then unmask the alarm in either of three ways 1 By clicking on the toolbar icon i e o 2 By using the shortcut Ctrl U 3 From the options menu select Unmask Alarm Version 4 0 0 164 Part Five Monitors Miscellaneous Start Stop updating An option provided by the Alarm Monitor Application is to allow the user to Stop and Start the Updating of the Alarm Monitor Windows This is particularly useful if the user wants to acknowledge mask etc a certain alarm as it allows the window to stop updating the user can then select the channel in question and acknowledge mask it etc Toggle Gridlines Ta Status Value Channel ID An option provided by the Alarm Monitor Application is to toggle whether the Alarm Monitor Window displays the data in grid form To place the data of the Alarm Monitor Window into grid form simply select Gridlines On from the View menu To de select the gridlines select Gridlines Off from the View menu Two alternative ways to do this is to select the Gridlines Toggle icon from the toolbar d or hit the key on the keyboard Clicking on the icon once toggles from Gridlines On Off and vice versa Version 4 0 0 165 Part Five Monitors Alter Active Alarm Monitor Font The Fonts of each window can be modified to the user s preference The font sele
390. t the filename you want to open The box lists files with the extension ort as selected in the List Files of Type box Files of Type Select the type of file you want to open Trend Files are of type ort Look In Select the drive folder in which the Trend Configuration was stored Network Choose the Network Neighbourhood icon in the Save in field to connect to a network location assigning a new drive letter Version 4 0 0 403 Part Seven Replays 1 2 3 4 recent files command File menu Use the numbers and filenames listed at the bottom of the file menu to open the last four configuration files you closed Choose the number that corresponds to the document you want to open The Trend Window will assume the name of the Trends Configuration filename Creating New Trend Windows To create a new Trend Window either choose New from the File Menu or click on the ia toolbar button A new Trend Window will appear initially with the name Trend n where n is the number of the trend that is created during this ORCHESTRATOR session Select a logged data file and then configure the channel lines for the Trend window The name of the Trend Window will remain unaltered until the configuration information is saved using a different name Copying Traces When two or more Trend Windows are open it is possible to copy a line from one window to another To copy a line identify it in the source window Legend box by pointing to the en
391. ta Log Files ODL M Cancel Description In the File Name Box a list of files created by that logger will be listed The filename was created from the start and stop times and dates when the logger started and stopped the recording The Description field at the bottom of the dialog box will decode the filename to display the actual start and stop time of the file While the logger is enabled and logging data the filename will be that of the date and start time only The stop date and time is added when the file is successfully closed Choose the file to export and select the OK button If the connection is via TCP IP to a Windows CE CE or Linux device the following dialog appears when selecting the log file to export Version 4 0 0 355 Part Seven Replays Directory Logger LOGGER 1 44192 168 1 230 LOGGED_DATA DATA EXPORT Select Log File UE TUNNEL ONE MEN se File Name 07021 5 150433 adl D702083 135435 070203 142235 odl 070208 132435 070208 135235 odl 070203 125435 70203 132235 odl Start Time 15 February 2007 15 04 33 09 February 2007 13 54 36 09 February 2007 13 24 35 09 February 2007 12 54 35 Stop Time table still oper 09 February 2007 14 22 35 09 February 2007 13 52 35 09 February 2007 13 22 35 Version 4 0 0 356 Cancel Part Seven Replays Replay Log Files If the Replay Database Log selection is chosen the following file dialog i
392. tallation Procedure Using Windows Explorer on a client machine select Network Neighbourhood Select the Orchestrator Server from the list of machines on the network Check Orchestrator is available as a shared directory see the example below n D 7 E E E EH E RB Network Neighborhood 9 Entire Network Del Bj Gateway server B Neis Bj Notepad B Ns2 Ultra cathal Llltra michael m RTE ROOT H A CD ROM H CDRIVE H DDRIVE G Printers If for any reason the Server installation has not created the share directory automatically the directory must be shared manually using File Manager or Explorer on the Orchestrator Server Default share permissions of Full Control to group Everybody are correct although permissions can be tailored at a later date The Orchestrator Directory on Orchestrator Server machine s must be available as network share before installing Orchestrator Client Software The installation checks for a hardware key This may take some time as the installation searches for NetSentinel keys on the network Sentinel Protection System installation Hardware key only The Orchestrator Client software can be supplied with a hardware key or a software key If you are using a hardware key then you will need to install the Sentinel Protection System during the installation The hardware key should be plugged into the parallel or USB port of the Orchestrator Clent machine before installing t
393. ted from the drop down list a new data file will be created every time the logger is enabled In the Append mode when the logger is enabled the logged data will be added to the end of the most recent log file created by that logger If no file exists one will be created In create mode a log is automatically written at the start of the log file In append mode a log is not automatically written to the appended file when the logger is enabled and the log will only be written at the next log time N B When the system is enabled any loggers which are enabled at that time are not triggered to log until the next scheduled log time Start and Stop Times These optional fields can be used to start a logger some time in the future It is not necessary to complete every entry The Wild Card Symbol can be used For example in the following entry when enabled the logger will commence logging at the next occurrence of 08 00 A stop time for a logger can be configured in a similar way Delete Logs If the Delete Logs check box is checked a drop down list is available to select a period of time after which logged data will be automatically deleted The predefined times are Version 4 0 0 298 Part Six Loggers 2 Months 3 Months If a suitable time period is not shown select the Time option additional boxes will appear Edit the text boxes entering the data in the form MM DD HH MM NB It is recommended that Delete Logs op
394. ters the value of 0 FALSE is the result stimer n Start timer n If timer n is already running then this function has no effect etimer n Stops timer n and retains value If the timer is already stopped then this function has no effect rtimer n Resets timer n to zero returns the value of the timer before the reset vtimer n Gets the current value of timer n without interfering with the update of the counter There are up to 1000 individual timers available The value of each timer is reported in seconds and is accurate to 1 100 of a second They can be stopped started and reset independently of each other n is the number of the timer from 1 to 1000 Timers can be used as cumulative timers or as single event timers If a timer is halted with the etimer n function then the timer value is retained and starts from that value when restarted with the stimer n function scount n Start counter n Counter n increments by 1 whenever this function is evaluated ecount n Stop counter n Has no effect on the counter but returns its current value rcount n Resets the counter n to zero Returns the value of the counter before reset vcount n Gets the value of counter n without interfering with the update of the counter There are up to 1000 individual counters available They can be stopped started and reset independently of each other n is the number of the counter from 1 to 1000 Counters can be used as cumulative counters or as
395. th a white background Edit New Monitor Properties WEN Selection Criteria Display Fields Color and Sound intemet Server Color Settings Foreground Background Active Unacknowledged ENENN x Inactive Unacknowiedged il 7 gt Active Acknowledged EE Wamings m gt I Masked a z Sound Aam Beep 1000 Alam Sound File Browse NOTE Your system may not be able to display some custom colors depending on the number of colors available on your system To check number of colors available open the Control Panel and then double click on the Display icon Click the settings tab In the Color Palette you should see the number of colors installed If you have 256 colors or less you may have problems using certain colors Sound Click the Alarm Beep check box on if you want the Alarm Monitor Window to sound a beep when unacknowledged alarms are present Enter the level of the alarm beep in the edit field On Windows 9X ensure that speakers are turned as keyboard beep plays the default sound event if a sound card is installed An alarm sound file WAVE Format can also be associated with each Alarm Monitor Window To enable this facility click the Alarm Sound File check box on The Browse button will become enabled Click on this button to launch a File Open dialog Select the sound file with WAV extension that you want This WAVE format file will be played while unacknowledged alarms are pr
396. th the SYSTEM account and the required users groups to the list of users groups who are Allowed Launch Click Edit Limits By Default the Everyone group has already been added Ensure that the Everyone group has Local Launch Remote Launch Local Activation and Remote Activation option checked Once DCOM has been configured you can remove the Everyone group and define a smaller subset of users if required Note The Edit Limits options above are not available unless you have installed Windows XP Service Pack 2 Default Protocols Click on the Default Properties tab If the Connection orientated TCP IP protocol is not at the top of the list it must be moved there This is done by selecting the TCP IP Protocol and clicking the move up button until it is at the top of the list Version 4 0 0 436 Part Ten Data Exchange occ AN Defaut Protocols MSDTC DCOM Protocols Description Move Up Move Down The set of network protocols available to DCOM on this machine The ordering of the protocols reflects the priority in which they will be used with the top protocol having first priority Leam more about setting these properties Version 4 0 0 437 Part Ten Application Configuration Data Exchange r E 5 Component Services File Action View Window Help Console Root 4 Component Services 4 Computers 4 amp My Computer b D COM Applicatio b C D
397. the appropriate radio button to choose the type of Trend required Horizontal The first type is a Horizontal orientation which means that all lines will are plotted from right to left Vertical The second type of orientation is Vertical This means that lines are plotted from the top of the page to the bottom Version 4 0 0 380 Part Seven Replays Display Options Log Bar This box turns on or off the Log bar If selected it appears immediately below the tool buttons The bar displays the name of the logger that created the file the start and stop times of the scans within the logged data Digital Axis Unchecking this box can turn off the axis of any digital channel A single vertical axis for all digital channels appears at the beginning of the trend The ON and OFF status message as well as the tag number is shown alongside each digital line Time Axis X Axis The Time axis scale display can be turned off if required If the Trend is channel based then this field is called the X axis Legend Menu Shows or hides the legend menu which is located at the bottom of the trends window The Legend menu shows a sample of the line colour for each channel in the trend it also shows details of that channel such as channel identifier tag description units and minimum and maximum value for that channel on the trend Header Text If the logged data being displayed has header text associated with it checking this box will show th
398. the knob but it may be reconfigured to be the same as the one above we will now go through the steps required to do this Step 2 First We Will Reconfigure the Scale To Do this Right Click on the Knob and select Visual Display Properties form the Pop Up Menu Select the Scale Tab There is only one Scale for this Particular Example so set the Scales Field to be Zero Configure the rest of the fields as follows Min 1 Max 10 Direction forward Start angle 220 Stop Angle 140 The Knob will look strange at the moment but will fix itself as we progress through the example Step 3 We will now configure the annulars i e the Green Yellow and Red Bars on the Knob Select the Annulars Tab and set the value in Annulars as 3 one for green one for Yellow and one for Red To set up the first annular set the annular ID to be 0 and configure the fields as follows Start Value 0 Stop Value 5 Inner Radius 0 72 Outer Radius 0 86 Color Green Now lets configure the other two for AnnularlD 1 set the configuration fields as follows Start Value 5 Stop Value 7 Inner Radius 0 72 Outer Radius 0 86 Color Yellow Version 4 0 0 208 Part Five Monitors For AnnularlD 2 set the configuration fields as follows Start Value 7 Stop Value 10 Inner Radius 0 72 Outer Radius 20 86 Color Red Step 4 We will now configure the knob Choose the Knob tab from the menu Set the configuration fields as follows Color Blac
399. ther called NIGHTSHIFT set to event mode event trigger channel defined as C2 Channels C3 and C5 will be used to reset timers at the end of the respective shifts C5 DS1 gt 2 stimer 1 etimer 1 Test DS1 to see if it is greater than 2 Machine running If it is running start timer number 1 the machine run time timer If it is not running stop the timer C6 DS1 lt 2 stimer 2 etimer 2 When DS1 is less than 2 the machine has stopped Start down time timer when stopped stop timer when machine restarts C7 C5 C5 C6 100 runtime Calculate efficiency 10096 runtime downtime C8 npulse ds1 lt 2 C8 will have the value of 1 TRUE for the scan in which the machine stops When DS1 goes less than 2 C9 c8 scount 1 c9 When C8 is True increment counter i e every time machine stops C9 is placed in the ELSE field to ensure the calculator maintains the count value even if not being incremented C10 C1 2P1 C5 lt lt P2 C6 P11 C5 lt lt P1 2 C6 Version Error Reference source not found 88 Part Four Configuring Processors If it is day time copy run time and down time to User Channels P1 and P2 If it is night time copy to P11 and p12 The allows more than one expression to be evaluated C112 C1 P3 C7 lt lt P4 C9 P13 C7 lt lt P14 C9 Copy efficiency and number of stops to different User Analogue channels dependent on the current shift It is the User Analogue channels that in t
400. this command to move the Trend half a Window to the left when zoomed in Using Pan Menu choose Left for horizontal trends or Back for vertical trends Using Fast Key to Pan Left When the required Trend Window is active then use the F2 Function for horizontal trends and use the CTRL F2 Function Keys for vertical trends Using Toolbar Button To Pan to the left choose the button for horizontal trends and the n button for vertical trends Pan Forwards Use this command to move the Trend half a window to the right when zoomed in Using Pan Menu choose Right for horizontal trends or Forward for vertical trends Using Fast Key When the required Trend Window is active then use the F3 Function for horizontal trends and use the CTRL F3 Function Keys for vertical trends 4 Using Toolbar Button To Pan to the right choose the 5 button for horizontal trends and the button for vertical trends Version 4 0 0 394 Part Seven Replays Pan to Current Use this command to move the current or last logged point to the centre of the Window When zoomed in Using Pan Menu choose Current Using Fast Key When the required Trend Window is active then use the F4 Function for horizontal trends and use the CTRL F4 Function Keys for vertical trends 4 Using Toolbar Button To Pan to the current scan choose the button for horizontal trends and the button for vertical trends Panning Using Scroll Bars The horizontal scroll bars can be us
401. ties Version 4 0 0 318 Part Six Loggers E Mail Setttings Mail settings Email address es Mailing method C Use MAPI Use SMTP Configure SMTP Test configuration Message settings au Subject Text T Send file C iT Cancel Email address es Enter into this field the recipients email address Selecting MAPI or SMTP will allow you to configure alarm mail settings for these type of mail clients Configure MAPI MAPI Configuration m MAPI Settings Mail profile x Mail password oss Log On s Service account C This Account aidan mallon Password EM Domain MEASURESOFT Version 4 0 0 319 Part Six This defaults all fields to the currently logged on users details You can set the configuration to use another users account but only if they have previously logged onto the local computer Configure SMTP Name Email Server Timeout Fr SMTP Configuration m Sender Name Senders Name Email sendersemail domain com Server Name IP Address mailserver domain com Timeout 30 seconds Port 25 Server Requires Autorization Login Name Password Cancel The desired screen alias of the sender Account name of the sender The address of the senders mail host Server Authorisation Test configuration Send test message X
402. tings of this system Do you want to modify these settings right now Tip To modify these settings in future refer to the steps provided in the Help provided with this software InstallShield Version 4 0 0 18 Part One Installation Procedure NOTE The Installation Wizard indicates it has completed as shown below If you are using a USB Dongle you can now connect it to a free USB port on your computer The USB driver will be automatically located once the Sentinel Protection System has completed successfully Click Finish to proceed to the Orchestrator installation phase ic Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Sentinel Protection Installer 7 5 0 Click Finish to exit the wizard gt iin Protection Installer Finish Orchestrator Server Installation Follow the Install Wizard screens In most instances it is recommended to use the default answers to questions as follows Version 4 0 0 19 Part One Installation Procedure ORCHESTRATOR 4 0 0 0 Sener Welcome To ORCHESTRATOR Server Setup Version 4 0 0 0 The InstallShield Wizard will install ORCHESTRATOR Server on your computer To continue click Next You must read and accept the end user licence agreement before the installation can continue Using your mouse you must scroll to the bottom of the licence dialog When you
403. tion is used wherever possible to prevent the hard disk from becoming full Cycle Mode If this field is set to None then when files are manually started they will continue until either being manually disabled or the Stop Time is met If a logger is intended to collect data for a long period of time it is recommended that the Cycle Mode is used By using the Cycle Mode facility log files will cover specific periods of time Logged files would be smaller and more manageable specific occurrences will be quicker to find Log files can be set to cover specific periods of time that match the operational times of the process being monitored A logger could for example be set to log data between 07 00 and 19 00 every day Alternatively a logger could be configured to start at 06 00 every Monday and log data until 18 00 on a Friday Not logging data at Weekends YY MM DD HH MM StatMode MA Start Time 1998 7 09 7 feo fos for Stop Time i B B I Cycle Mode ON TIME Ever DAY M Log For 8 HOUR On Time To configure the Cycle Mode from the drop down list select On Time From the Every drop down list select a suitable periodic start time The options are Day 2 Months 3 Months If a suitable time period is not shown select the Time option additional boxes will appear Edit the text boxes entering the data in the form Version 4 0 0 299 Part Six Loggers MM DD HH MM From the Log For drop
404. tisfactorily choose the OK button The previous dialog box will be returned Version Error Reference source not found 76 Part Four Configuring Processors Calculator Formulae Introduction Many different formulae can be inserted into Calculator channels to produce real time on line calculations In the examples in this section the text within the square brackets is the actual syntax of the formula Formulae can be of simple arithmetic construction Example Channel Ci formula is DS1 DS2 Or a more complex mathematical algorithm incorporating integration trigonometric logarithmic timing and control and statistical functions Conditional statements are available allowing calculations only to be performed when the status of a condition is either true or false Each calculator channel yields a single result Each formula can contain up to 39 characters The result of one calculator channel can become an element of another channel Example Channel C1 formula is DS1 DS2 P1 Channel C2 formula is DS5 DS7 Channel C3 formula is C1 C2 Formula Construction A formula comprises one or more operands and one or more operators The Calculator compiler is not case sensitive Version Error Reference source not found 77 Part Four Configuring Processors Operands Operands are numeric quantities that are formed from User Constants Integer and floating point constants can be entered e g 1 1 5 or 2 3
405. to channels using the channel tag as the reference instead of the channel number In this way channels can be rearranged within the modules and as long as the channel tags remain the same the correct channel values will be restored to the appropriate channel number Saving the Configuration When a configuration has been completed it must be saved to retain any changes made To save either 1 Click on the Save icon i The User Analog configuration will be saved to the current Orchestrator System configuration No File Name will be requested 2 Select Save from the File menu Version 4 0 0 55 Part Three Configuring Channels 3 Select Exit from the file menu If any changes have been made a dialog box will ask if you want to save the configuration before exiting the window NB Any changes to the Channel Configuration will not be incorporated into the Orchestrator System until it is next enabled or the device processor is reconfigured Import Export the Configuration Import the Configuration Select Import Configuration from the File Menu to import channel configuration from an ASCII file This command presents an Import dialog box where you may specify the range of channels to be imported the file to import from etc Export the Configuration Select Export Configuration from the File Menu to export channel configuration to an ASCII file This command presents an Export dialog box where you may specify the range of
406. to the Clipboard it can be pasted into any other channel in this group by this button Previous d Clicking on Previous or Next buttons will accept the current channels configuration and move on to either the next or previous channel s Configuration Window Goto Selecting the Goto button will accept the current channel s configuration and move on to the channel entered in the resulting Goto Channel No dialog box Help If any help is required concerning any element of this window clicking on this button will select the Help utility Version 4 0 0 62 Part Three Configuring Channels Configure Digital Channel The configure digital channel window is divided into 2 sections plus a row of buttons at the bottom Configure User Digital Channel Q1 J Enable Channel Tag Q1Tag Description 81 Description Low State Description Off High State Description On Event Checking DISABLED X E Alarm Error Checking Drive Common Alarm Alarms Alam State HIGH STATE v Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Delay 0 C Drive Common Alarm Alarm Message Alarm Previous Next Goto l Help Enable Channel For a channel to be operative and therefore configurable the Enable Channel checkbox must be checked Tag An 12 character alphanumeric field that can contain channel information or wiring schedule references Description A 32 character alphanumeric field in which a descr
407. ton Alternatively Formula elements can be inserted into the formula text box Choose the Functions button Version Error Reference source not found 75 Part Four Configuring Processors A Construct a Formula dialog box will be shown r Construct A Formula Functions complement seconds since midnight Cancel days since january 1 in current year starts timer n If timer is running then this has no effect Insert stops timer n If timer is stopped then this has no effect resets timer n to zero Returns the value of timer before reset Check Formula returns time in seconds since last call to this delta timer m Operators Help power multiplication division addition Select a Function Operator or Constant and nenation FIR siibtraction then click on the Insert button to add it to the formula below Pl 3 14159 Alternatively double click on the required item electron rest mass kg or edit the formula string using the keyboard permeability of free space H m Avagadros number mol 1 malar walime mal 1 Formula ktimet To construct a formula select a function an operator or a constant from the scrolling lists boxes and then click the Insert button Edit the formula manually to add function parameters channel numbers etc When the formula is complete check that the syntax is correct by choosing the Check Formula button When the formula has been entered sa
408. trator Channel numbers the tag and description For digital channels the label describing the current status of the channel is displayed For analogue channels the current floating point value followed by the units as configured in the configuration window for the channel type Processor and Device output channels can have their values changed from within the Channel Monitor Window Alarms are also acknowledged from the Channel Monitor Windows The Channel Monitor Application has a client server architecture which allows it to monitor channels from remote Orchestrator servers To launch the Channel Monitor Application either double click the Channel Monitor icon within the Orchestrator program group or select Channel Monitor from the Monitor menu in the Orchestrator program window Q MESVIS160 aidan mallon Untitled PRODUCT NAME ins File View Control Monitors Replays Processors Loggers Help CHANNEL MONITOR Monitor Selection ALARM MONITOR gt Monitor Last The user is then presented with the options to either Monitor Selection run an existing monitor configuration Monitor Last revert to the last saved workspace or Configure generate a new configuration or modify an existing configuration Monitor Selection If the monitor option is taken the user is presented with a standard Windows file selection menu the required configuration file should be highlighted and the OK button clicked Version 4
409. trieval All Directories and sub directories are created automatically as required All files concerned with the Orchestrator Software Package are found in a directory called Orchestrator in the root directory All files created by the logging utilities are placed in a sub directory called LOGGED_DATA within the Orchestrator directory Whenever a logger is enabled with a new name a sub directory unique to that logger name will be created in the LOGGED_DATA directory A file containing the logged information will be placed in the new directory If subsequent files are created with the same logger name they will be added to the existing sub directory File names are automatically assigned to logged data files The filename is created from the start and stop time and dates The file name can be represented as YYMMDD HHMMSS ZZNNEE OOIIEE odl Where YYMMDD start date Year Month Day HHMMSS start time Hours Minutes Seconds ZZNNEE stop date Year Month Day OOIIEE stop time Hours Minutes Seconds E g A file started at 00 01 on 4th July 1994 and ending at 18 00 on 8th July 1994 would have the filename of 940704 000100 940708 180000 odl The file name nomenclature allows easy retrieval of specific logged instances While the logger is enabled the file name will only be that of start date and start time The stop date and time is only added when the file is successfully completed Again this easily identifies active files The Wind
410. try and clicking the Ba mouse The record will be highlighted Select Copy from the Edit menu or choose the Ba copy toolbar button If the line is to be removed from the source Trend Window then select Cut from the Edit menu or e In the destination Trend Window from the Edit menu choose Paste or click on the paste toolbar button choose the cut toolbar button The axis of the pasted channel will appear on the destination Window the line will appear also if the time base of the pasted line falls within the time base of the destination Trend Window s time frame Navigating Trend Windows The following section details methods of moving between Trend Windows Within the main ORCHESTRATOR Trend application Window Trend windows can be organised to suit the users requirements Initially when a new trend window is created it will lay over the top of any other window within the Trend Application window Windows can be brought to the front by either pointing to any exposed part of the required window and clicking or by choosing Window from the menu bar and then selecting the appropriate channel group window Version 4 0 0 404 Part Seven Replays Herp New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons 1 demotrend 1 v 2 demotrend 2 From the Window menu option windows can be arranged in a Cascade or Tile layout By creating a new window and then minimising it the Trend Application Window can compri
411. turned to a non alarm state or the time or was acknowledged Alarm Message The alarm message An Alarm Monitor Window will continually update new alarms as long as it is in update mode This mode of operation is selected from the Options Menu with the commands Start Updating and Stop Updating Version 4 0 0 151 Part Five Monitors If the Alarm Monitor application is minimized or not the currently active window and there are unacknowledged alarms present in the Alarm Monitor then the Alarm Monitor icon in the Windows Task Bar will flash continuously until all alarms have been either acknowledged or masked This feature is not supported when the alarm monitor document is embedded in a third party application such as Internet Explorer or Microsoft Binder 9 Ew gt Alarm Monitor Appl See the section on Alarm Annunciation and Alarm Acknowledgement later in this section for more details Alarm Monitor Toolbar Options Deh Go 8 v4 SE W 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 14 15 16 17 18 1 Open a new Alarm Monitor window Open an existing Alarm Monitor Document The Alarm Monitor displays the Open dialog box in which you can locate and open the desired file 3 Save the active document or template with its current name If you have not named the document the Alarm Monitor displays the Save As dialog box 4 Print the active Alarm Monitor window 5 Displays the active document as it would appea
412. ty to allow this option If the user wishes to annunciate subsequent warnings then they should simply check the Annunciate each warnings box The user may also repeat alarms by checking the Repeat Warning check box and specifying the repeat interval in seconds in Repeat Rate edit box Only warnings that are still in active state will be repeated The facility to annunciate when warnings are cleared is provided by checking the Annunciate warning clear box If the user wishes to annunciate subsequent clears then they should simply check the Annunciate each clear box r Alarm System Annunciator Options General Alarms Wamings Masking Watchdog Mask Annunciation J Annunciate alarm mask Options IV Annunciate alarm unmask Options Mask Annunciation System gives possibilities to annunciate masking or unmasking of alarms To enable it user should check Annunciate alarm mask or Annunciate alarm mask boxes ia Alarm System Annunciator Options General Alarms Wamings Masking Watchdog Watchdog annunciation V Annunciate watchdog Options DD HH MM Repeat Rate TIME i n fos foo Align Time Version Error Reference source not found 105 Part Four Configuring Processors Watchdog Annunciation Last annunciation feature is watchdog annunciation if user wishes to be aware that system is working correctly they can check Annunciate watchdog box a
413. tyle of the knob User Defined Determines the shape of a user defined knob This property only applies when KnobStyle is set to User Defined Shape This property defines a polygon made from a list of x y coordinate pairs comma delimited Version 4 0 0 246 Part Five Monitors The shape is defined using a coordinate system in which the origin is located at the upper left corner of the area defined by Barlnner BarOuter and KnobWidth Width Determines the width of the control s knob This property is based on a unitless scale and typically has values between 0 0 and 1 0 Mouse Control Determines the type of mouse input to the control Tics Tic properties were set up in an array fashion The user can place as many sets of tic marks on any slider control as he likes Each set of tic marks can be adjusted with color increment start and stop value size and placement Properties library BackGround Bar General Knob Tra Auto Tic Tics ij I Enabled TiclD ij D TicCount MajorTics E FontlD o TicSubCount MinorTics o Style 0 Rectangular ye ci Label On Offlv olor Position J o 80 Inner 040 StartValue fo Outer a _ Ifo s0 StopValue 100 Width _ a 000 DelaValue lho User Defined Shape Color Determines the color for the tic set currently selected by TiclD Delta Determines the interval value between tic marks fo
414. ual for details of configuring a Text Logger By checking Position within Graph Area the user can specify the vertical position where the logged text will appear on the trend chart Enter a Start End Text Log If the logged data chosen is configured as a Text Logger See Part Six of this manual for details of configuring a text logger this dialog allows you to enter a start and end text log to represent a time period into a time based Trend Click and drag to make a selection on the trend right click within that selection and choose Enter Start End Text Log Enter Text Log oF SS X Ce OW peices ane Cancel Hep Manual Yee ee inr ee LogatTime 15 10 2009 14 50 51 15 10 2008 14 50 51 Log at Current Time F Position within Graph Area bottom to 100 top 50 Version 4 0 0 396 Part Seven Replays Select a period name from the list of predefined messages or type in your own period in the manual section Enter the start and stop date and time using the calendar and time input boxes The start and stop date and time cannot be outside the scope of the log Workspaces and Full Screen Mode Trends saves the position of the application on the screen and the position of any Trend configurations each time the application is closed When you re launch the application the positioning of configurations will be exactly as it was when Trends was last opened The Full Screen option
415. uid DS17 is a digital input from the operators START BUTTON DS18 and DS19 are digital inputs connected to detectors sensing machine status DS33 is a digital output signal to a contactor to start the machine cycle DS34 is a digital output signal powering a red indicator lamp DS35 a digital output driving a green indicator lamp The contactor needs to be operated by a digital pulse of 5 second duration The process can only be allowed to start if the cooling fluid is below 259C and all the detectors are HIGH The calculation formula may be C1 DS17 amp DS1 25 1 0 C2 z2 C1 amp DS18 amp DS19 DS33z21 DS35z1 DS34 1 The conditions are tested and if all are true then the contactor will be switched in and the green indicator lit If they are not all true then the red indicator lamp only will be powered C3 C2 stimer 1 rtimer 1 When all conditions are met and the contactor powered a timer is started C4 C3 gt 5 DS33 0 lt crtimer 1 0 After five seconds the digital output powering the contactor is turned off and the timer reset Compiler Errors Errors that are displayed in response to choosing the Check Formula button in the Configure Calculator Channel Window are explained below Bad Parenthesis The number of left parenthesis and the number of right do not match or are in the wrong order Incorrect Number A constant number is not specified correctly Too Many Decimal Points More than 1 decimal
416. up will be annunciated if box is checked However a user may not always necessarily wish to annunciate subsequent alarms Therefore the configuration utility will give the user the ability to allow this option If the user wishes to annunciate subsequent alarms then they should simply check the Annunciate each alarm box The user may also repeat alarms by checking the Repeat Alarm check box and specifying the repeat interval in seconds in Repeat Rate edit box Only alarms that are still in alarm state will be repeated The facility to annunciate when warnings are cleared is provided by checking Annunciate alarm clear or Annunciate alarm ack boxes If the user wishes to annunciate subsequent clears or acknowledges then they should simply check the Annunciate each clear or Annunciate each ack boxes Alarm System Annunciator Options eC General Alarms Wamings Masking Watchdog IV Waming Annunciation M Repeat Waming Repeat Rate o seconds Annuciate on waming Annunciate each waming Options V Annunciate waming clear Annunciate each clear Options Cancel Help Warning Annunciation Version Error Reference source not found 104 Part Four Configuring Processors The first warning in an group will be annunciated if box is checked However a user may not always necessarily wish to annunciate subsequent warnings Therefore the configuration utility will give the user the abili
417. ur Configuring Processors Align Time YY MM DD HH MM kk J kk Jk k k kk If no change is made to the text box and asterisks are left in all the fields then the align time will be when the system is enabled If a time is entered but no date specified then a cycle will commence the next time the prescribed time is reached after the system has been enabled However Alarm Data will still be logged between enabling the system and the align time being reached Entering a date sometime in the future will have the same effect as that described for time An align time of a date in the past is also acceptable Again this will allow Alarm Logging to start when the System is next enabled log to the end on the cycle period and then start at the beginning of a complete cycle Cycle Every From the drop down list select the period of the start time of a cycle with respect to the Align Time The predefined times are Ve HR 8 HOURS 2 WEEKS HOUR 12 HOURS MONTH 2 HOURS DAY 2 MONTHS 4 HOURS WEEK 3 MONTHS If a suitable time period is not shown select the TIME option additional boxes will appear asking for a specified time period in the form of MM DD HH MM Enter the time period in the months days hours and minutes fields as required Log For From the drop down list select the length of time you want to log for on each cycle The options are the same as for the Cycle Every time Cycle Mode Configur
418. uration icrosoft SQL Server 2005 J Microsoft Visual SourceSafe IT Mi 1D j n r Icrosort Visual studio 2005 Aidan Mallon J PrintMe Internet Printing J PRODUCT NAME Documents Pictures Music Search Recent Items Computer Network Connect To Control Panel Default Programs Help and Support quum I alee eG To launch Orchestrator click on the Orchestrator icon in the program menu From the main window all the features of the package can be configured using the pull down menus Version 4 0 0 43 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator MESVIS160 aidan malion Untitled PRODUCT NAME File View Control Monitors Replays Processors Loggers Help Da blu 62S rar vM Q PRODUCT NAME Alarms None Status Disabled No Errors For Help press F1 Configuring Orchestrator Channels The channels in Orchestrator are divided into two groups The first group refers to device channels whose values are acquired from physical input output devices The second group refers to processor channels whose value is computed or processed Configure Device Channels To configure a block of device channels choose Devices from the menu and the required device from the drop down menu A configuration dialog box will appear for the particular device Configure Processors To configure a block of processor channels choose Processors from the menu bar and the required processor fr
419. uration has been saved Autostart will be set on If the power fails or the system is shutdown the Orchestrator system will start and enable itself automatically when the power returns or it is switched back on again The system will restart in the background even if the user is not available to log back on again Version 4 0 0 45 Part Two Using and Controlling Orchestrator Shortcut Keys CTRL A Options Choosing this option presents the options for system enable and disable Options include confirmation of system enable disable and which loggers are automatically enabled or disabled on a system enable disable Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the Orchestrator Window advises the user of the status of the system The centre box tells whether a system is enabled or disabled The right hand box will detail any error encountered by Orchestrator when enabling The status bar can be toggled on or off by choosing the Status Bar option from the View menu Status Error Indicator The Status error indicator describes any errors that may occur whilst the Orchestrator System is enabled Status Indicator Shows whether Orchestrator System is enabled or disabled Alarm Annunciation When an alarm occurs on the system the channel number and alarm message will be displayed in the Alarm bar at the bottom of the Orchestrator Main Window just above the status bar Alarms with the higher priority will over write those of a lesser status
420. urce should be displayed in milliseconds 4 The update rate should be displayed in minutes seconds and milliseconds on the bottom of the dialog for manipulation To alter the update Rate for the source in question 1 Click on the List box where it displays the name of the source you wish to change 2 In the Update Rate section enter the new Update rate values into the minutes seconds and milliseconds boxes Mins Secs Ms Update Rate Server MESVIS160 Sources USER ANALOG CHANNELS 0 99 0 gt 59 10 gt 999 Update Rate Mins D Secs Li Ms m Minutes Seconds and Milleseconds 3 You can repeat the process 1 and 2 above to select different sources and alter their update rate 4 The option is also available to change to a different server by selecting a new one from the drop down combo box that holds the server names Once again you can change the update rates for all these Sources on that server 5 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to quit NB Whatever state you leave the Edit Communications Settings Dialog in directly determines the rate at which your update rate will be called E g If you leave the Dialog with the Individual Sources screen in view the application will use these values as the update rates for communication Likewise if you leave with the All Sources screen in view all the sources on that server will use that update rate Version 4 0 0 140 Part Five Monitors Setting the Recovery Rate At the Edit Com
421. ures to represent the switch s state It has sound playing capabilities to indicate the switch turning on or off and timers to provide automatic cut off and blinking to draw attention to the control Toggle With Sound Bitmap Toggles EN Text Toggles a j a 9 99 OffBackColor Property OffForeColor Property OnBackColor Property OnForeColor Property Determines the background or foreground color of the control in its ON Value TRUE or OFF Value FALSE states OffCaption OnCaption Determines the text displayed on the control in its ON Value TRUE or OFF Value FALSE states Off Picture On Picture Determines the graphic to be displayed in the control s ON Value TRUE or OFF Value FALSE states OffWave OnWave Determines the wave file wav to be played in the control s ON Valuez TRUE or OFF Value FALSE states OffX Property OffY Property OnX Property OnY Property Defines the horizontal or vertical offset in pixels of the caption from the center of the control for both the ON Valuez TRUE or OFF Value FALSE states These properties only apply when OffPicture or OnPicture are not defined Version 4 0 0 251 Part Five Monitors Ontimer Determines how long in milliseconds the toggle control will remain On Value2 TRUE Note See Generic Configuration Fields For Information on Background Fonts and General Version 4 0 0 252 Part Five Monitors
422. using the Remote Access features of Windows Exporting to Microsoft Excel During configuration of a file for export to Excel choose a Delimiter as a Comma and the End Line separator as CR LF The File Type should be defined as Data Exchange Format DIF Within the Excel Spreadsheet package to import the file choose the File Open command and in the List Files of Type drop down list choose Data Interchange Format DIF Choose the correct file and it will import correctly into the spreadsheet Exporting to Lotus 1 2 3 During configuration of a file for export to Lotus 1 2 3 choose a Delimiter as a Comma and the End Line separator as CR LF The File Type should be defined as Lotus Files PRN To import an ORCHESTRATOR Exported file to Lotus 1 2 3 for Windows v4 0 or later from the 1 2 3 menu line choose the File option and then Open from the drop down menu list In the Open File dialog box in the File Type field choose files of type PRN The file will be imported into a spreadsheet and converted automatically For earlier Lotus 1 2 3 Windows versions from menu bar choose File and then Import Select Numbers followed by the file name The file will now import into the current worksheet starting at the current cursor position Printing Logged Data The Data Export utility can be used to prepare logged data to be printed using the Notepad Program within Windows Configure the data for Export in the way described in this chapter Ch
423. ustria 43 669 11 7 e 1 Callme Pro Austria 43 666 pager 7 e 1 number Cellone USA 1 888 8787727 7 e 1 D1 Alpha Germany 49 171 2092522 8 n 1 D1 Alpha ISDN 49 171 2521001 8 n 1 Germany E Plus Germany 49 177 1167 2400 7 e 1 No requests above 2400 baud Esat Digifone Ireland 353 86 8525352 8 n 1 Hutchison Paging UK 44 0941 100400 7 e 1 Libertel Netherlands 31 654 545000 7 e 1 Lnk Australia 61 738 326002 8 n 1 MetroCall USA 1 800 9171168 7 e 1 MobileComm USA 1 800 9464644 7 e 1 MobileComm USA 1 800 6556555 7 e 1 password M Mobile Media USA 1 800 6225742 7 e 1 Netcom Norway 47 920 00890 7 e 1 NexTel USA 1 801 3016683 7 e 1 NexTel USA 1 312 9076683 7 e 1 One2One Mobiles UK 44 07958 879889 7 e 1 One2One UK 44 07956 201072 8 n 1 Orange UK 44 07973 100602 8 n 1 Orange Fleet UK 44 07973 100601 8 n 1 This is a subscription service requiring a password to access Page New England 1 800 6488233 7 e 1 USA PageMart USA 1 800 8649499 7 e 1 PageNet USA 1 800 7208398 7 e 1 PageOne Canada 1 416 715 9999 7 e 1 PageOne Canada 1 416 791 2499 7 e 1 PageOne UK 44 0640 900199 7 e 1 PageOne Direct 44 01523 530300 7 e 1 password 001001 Access UK PageOne Direct Call 44 0991 910910 7 e 1 password 001001 UK PageOne MiniCall UK 44 0640 900139 7 e 1 password HOMCPP Proximus Belgium 32 751 61621 8 n 1 Version Error Reference source not found 109 Configuring Processors
424. utomobile Misc Savings 17 17 17 Mouse Input Enabled mI Version 4 0 0 227 Part Five Monitors Miscellaneous Properties 0 T9 CNN E Portions GMS Direction 0 Forward MouseControl 2 Snap To v Orientation 0 Horizontal Start ngle foo DisplayMode O Linear Min o PercentMode jo Percent v Max fi 00 00 Direction Selects either a forward or backward fill direction for the control Orientation Determines whether the control is displayed horizontally or vertically Display Mode Determines if the control fills linearly or radially pie Percent Mode Determines the mode which is used to size displayed portions Mouse Control Determines the type of mouse input to the control Start Angle Determines the starting angle of portions displayed when DisplayMode is set to Radial pie Min Max Sets or returns the maximum or minimum value for the percentage indicator The percentage caption displays the Percent property and is calculated by changing the Value property Version 4 0 0 228 Part Five Monitors Portion Tab E r Properties Ae Library Background Fonts Frame Misc c X PortionPicture Portions a PottionID 0 PorionValue _ 0 00 Digital Display DigitalStyle E Fixed PortionDigitalColor DigitalF ormat 0 0f Z PartionDig
425. ve Your configuration will be saved Saving Using Toolbar Simply Click on the diskette and your Configuration will be saved Printing Configuration There are two ways to print the configuration From the file menu and from the toolbar by selecting print from either of these a print dialog box will be displayed here you can select a printer and specify various print options Getting Online Help Press the F1 key at any time to bring up the Processors Online Help Version Error Reference source not found 118 Part Five Monitors Part Five Monitoring Part Five details the Monitor Windows Channel Monitor Alarm Monitor Configurable Monitor Version 4 0 0 119 Part Five Monitors Channel Monitor Overview Terminology Channel Monitor Main Window e The Channel Monitor Main Window manages a workspace of child Channel Monitor Windows Channel Monitor Window Displays all channels for a Data Source on a given Server Is associated with a Channel Monitor Document i e A Channel Monitor Window is actually a Document File Channel Monitor Document Stores configuration information about the monitor i e how and what it displays Introduction The Channel Monitor facility in Orchestrator provides real time monitoring of channels and status information The Channel Monitor Application consists of a number of Windows each displaying an Orchestrator data source The channel information shown includes the Orches
426. ve Saves an opened Channel Monitoring Window document using the same file name Print Prints a Channel Monitoring document Print Preview Displays the Channel Monitoring document on the screen as it would appear printed Print Setup Selects a printer and printer connection Exit Exits Channel Monitor Application View menu commands The View menu offers the following commands Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar Gridlines Offers the ability to turn the Gridlines on or off Options menu commands The Options menu offers the following commands Modify Value Modifies the Selected Channels Value Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges a Channel In Alarm Cancel Common Alarm Cancels the Common Alarm Channel Goto Channel Navigates to a selected Channel Configuration menu commands The Configuration menu offers the following commands Properties Modifies the properties of the Channel Monitor Window Communications Modifies the Update and Recovery Rate that the Application uses to communicate with the Servers and Sources Version 4 0 0 146 Part Five Monitors Window menu commands The Window menu offers the following commands which enable you to arrange multiple views of multiple documents in the application window Cascade Arranges windows in an overlapped fashion Tile Arranges windows in non overlapped tiles Arrange Icons Arranges icons of closed windows Window 1 2 Goes to specifi
427. ve Window press the keys CTRL N Using the Toolbar click on the New Monitor Tool Ey The Channel Monitor Application launches by displaying the Properties Dialog box which provides the user with the tools to select a data source and service that runs on that data source for their monitoring purposes The user also has the option to alter other properties such as the number of visible columns and the colour of the Channel Monitor Window and text within the window The Monitor Properties Dialog box will appear Edit New Monitor Properties 3 DataSource Selection Columns Setup Color Setup Intemet Server Server Server Name Browse Data Source EN Available Data Source Name Channels 8 USER ANALOG CHANNELS l USER DEFINED P Channel DataSource MESVIS160 SIMULATED Monitors gg Select Server MESVIS150 1 Auto Browse Entire Network 3 Microsoft Terminal Services E Xt Microsoft Windows Network H Web Client Network amp Bs amp Fs MESVIS150 MESXP139 MESXP150 It can be noted from the above image that the Monitor Properties Dialog Box is composed of three tabs The Data Source Selection tab the Column Setup tab and the Color Setup tab We now explain all three DATASOURCE SELECTION DataSource Selection allows the user configure the following Server Name Via t
428. ver is down then the USER DEFINED option provides a way to create a Channel Monitor Window for the Server and Data Source If the Channel Monitor Application can not connect to the Server or the Data source after we pick the USER DEFINED option a blank Channel Monitor Window will open The user may save this Channel Monitor Window and wait until the Channel Monitor Application can initiate a valid connection to the Server Data Source Version 4 0 0 125 Part Five Monitors COLUMNS SETUP r Edit Monitor Properties DataSource Selection Columns Setup Color Setup Intemet Server Column Settings Click on a Colum Tag to Select Deselect it from the Tabular View IV Description IV Value Precision 2 JV Significant Change v Event Status IV Acknowledge Alarm DataSource MESVIS160 CALCULATED CHANNELS The Column Setup part of the Monitor Properties Dialog Box allows the user select or de select the number of visible columns per channel monitoring window Click on each columns check box if you want that Column to displayed and vice versa if you don t want the column displayed The Channel Monitor Application will allow you to change your preferences later if you require to do so Note also the Default button located within dialog Pressing it indicates to the system that the user required all columns to be visible Version 4 0 0 126 Part Five Monitors COLOR SETUP The user can select
429. w Alarm Checking or High Alarm Checking or both check boxes to enable the facility Version 4 0 0 418 Part Ten Data Exchange Drive Common Alarm A common alarm is a single digital output which will switch on when any channel with the Drive Common Alarm enabled goes into an alarm state Check this box if a link to the Common Alarm is required Alarm Limit Enter or edit the alarm limit in the text box Warning Check the box if this feature if needed Enter the warning value in the text box Hysteresis Check the box if this feature if needed Enter the value of the dead band in the text box Hysteresis can prevent noisy channels from reporting multiple alarms when the average reading is close to the alarm threshold Priority Enter or edit the number in the text box to allocate the priority of this alarm Delay Enter the number of seconds before the alarm is announced Alarm Message Enter up to 32 characters to describe the channel when it is in low and high alarm state Automatic Scaling Enter the low measured value the high measured value and the output range of the channel When the fields have been completed and assuming the System is enabled click on the Apply button Under the heading Current Values the actual measured value will be shown as well as the Engineering Value Click on OK to accept the scaling or Cancel to abort the Auto Scaling facility Fr Automatic Scaling High Current Values
430. w is providing status information on Version 4 0 0 136 Part Five Monitors Communications Setup The network can be edited for the Channel Monitor software Two attributes of the client can be configured These are 1 Recovery Rate This specifies how long the client will wait for the server to recover 2 Update Rate This specifies the rate at which the client will request data from the server This can be done on a Server or Source basis Update Rate Option All Sources Update Rate set for ALL sources on one particular server Individual Sources Update Rate set for a particular source on a particular server To Configure Orchestrator Communication Settings 1 Choose the Communication Settings item from the Monitor menu 2 The following dialog will then appear Edit Communication Settings Set Update Rates Set Recovery Rates MESVIS160 ervers in use Type Of Setting All or Individual Set Update Rate Al Sources Individual Sources ALL SOURCES ON SERVER Server Source Update Rate Server MESVIS160 Sources ALL SOURCES ON SERVER 0 39 0 59 10 gt 999 Update Rate Mins D Secs E ws 0 lt E Update Rate Section Ges ee 3 The network can then be configured as desired By clicking on the desired button i e the All Sources or the Individual Sources the communication setting for the source will appear in the Mins Secs and Ms bo
431. x s provided Version 4 0 0 137 Part Five Monitors Setting Communications Rates The recovery rate specifies how long the client will wait for the server to recover i e the server has gone down The update rate specifies how often Channel Monitor Application will retrieve values form the server Set Update Rates Set Recovery Rates MESVIS160 MESVIS160 Setting the Update Rate for Server At the Edit Communications Links Dialog select the All Sources button Now select the server that you want to set the update rate for by clicking on the drop down combo box that resides beside the servers in use caption Once you have selected the server you require the following data should be present 1 In the List box provided under the Sources Column the caption ALL SOURCES ON SERVER should appear 2 Under the prefix column the caption should appear 3 Under the Rates ms column the rate of the server should be displayed in milliseconds 4 The update rate should be displayed in minutes seconds and milliseconds on the bottom of the dialog for manipulation To alter the update Rate for the server in question 1 Click on the List box where it displays the information ALL SOURCES ON SERVER 2 In the Update Rate section enter the new Update rate values into the minutes seconds and milliseconds boxes Mins Secs Ms 3 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to quit Update Rate Server MESVIS160 Sou
432. y com msactivedocuments useranalogs mcm E S E Your Internet Address The directory and file you created Click OK Step 4 1 Save your work 2 When you have saved your work select preview from the tabs on the bottom left hand side of the screen 3 Click on your link and the Channel Monitor Document will open embedded within Microsoft FrontPage 98 You can now repeat the process to enter in as many Links as you require To allow the page to be accessed from the Internet simply enter a link to the htm file you have just created on your webpage i e your company webpage Opening an ActiveX Document and run it across the LAN An easy way to open the a Channel Monitor ActiveX Document via your web browser is from the File menu select Open and the browse to the Computer that contains the mcm file you wish to open When you choose open the Channel Monitor File will open embedded into your web browser Not that you can open a mcm file across the network using the Channel Monitor Application or any other ActiveX Document Server Applications i e Microsoft FrontPage 98 and Microsoft Binder for example Version 4 0 0 145 Part Five Monitors Channel Monitor Menu Commands File menu commands The File menu offers the following commands New Monitor Creates a New Channel Monitor Window Document Close Monitor Closes an opened Channel Monitoring Window Document Open Opens an existing Channel Monitoring Window document Sa
433. y have created the logged data file The n specifier informs the Standard Logger that the data export file should be named using the same date and time field as the logged data file i e if the logger is set to log data every half hour the first time it is enabled it will operate for a half an hour shift and create a logged data file similar to the following 980819 110051 980819 120052 odl At this point the data export file needs to be created The Standard Logger reads the name of the data export file to be created and notices that the Yon specifier has been used Upon reading this it substitutes the name of the logged data file for the 9on parameter name names the data export file as 980819 110051 980819 120052 ext where ext is the extension of the data export file i e DIF PRN or TXT Split into separate files for Excel column limit Microsoft Excel is limited to 255 columns in dif format and 256 columns in csv format If you require to use more than the above number of columns select this check box Data Export will create the necessary number of Export files Version 4 0 0 316 Part Six Loggers Selecting Data Export File Creation Options There are three ways in which logged data can be exported to files Each time the Standard Logger Configuration creates a log file of the current data if a data export file has been specified then this data export file will be created at this time Overwrite old files This option en
434. you are using a parallel hardware key the key should be plugged into the parallel port of the Orchestrator Client machine before continuing If you are using a USB key do not plug the key into the machine until the Sentinel Protection System installation phase has been completed see below Server and Client Keys are different The software will not operate if the wrong key is used Click Next to continue the Seninel Driver installation Welcome to the Installshield Wizard for Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 The InstallShield R Wizard will install Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 on your computer To continue click Next Sentinel Protection Installer Version 4 0 0 33 Part One Installation Procedure Click I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Es Sentinel Protection Installer 7 4 0 InstallShield Wizard ES License Agreement a Please read the following license agreement carefully License Grant Warranty for Software This License describes limited rights granted by SafeNet Inc and or one of its subsidiaries such grantor Seller to the Buyer A The term Software as used herein shall mean a program or programs consisting of machine readable logical instruction and tables of information designed as libraries or drivers to work in conjunction with Seller s Sentinel Keys Products Title to all Software furnished to Buyer hereunder shall H Oalline Callac meme tn Dine

Orchestrator User Guide - Measurement Systems Ltd

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents